《梵网经》的义注巴利
1. Brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanā
关于游方者议论的注释巴利
Paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā
在第一次大结集正在进行、律藏结集即将结束时,具寿大迦叶问具寿阿难:“贤友阿难,《梵网经》是在哪里说的?”在这样问完之后,具寿阿难为了说明它是在哪里说的、是依什么而说的等全部内容,就说了“如是我闻”等话。因此说:“《梵网经》的‘如是我闻’等序分,也是具寿阿难在第一次大结集时说的。”巴利
Imissā paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiyā vattamānāya vinayasaṅgahāvasāne suttantapiṭake ādinikāyassa ādisuttaṃ brahmajālaṃ pucchantena āyasmatā mahākassapena – ‘‘brahmajālaṃ, āvuso ānanda, kattha bhāsita’’nti, evamādivuttavacanapariyosāne yattha ca bhāsitaṃ, yañcārabbha bhāsitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ pakāsento āyasmā ānando evaṃ me sutantiādimāha. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘brahmajālassāpi evaṃ me sutantiādikaṃ āyasmatā ānandena paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikāle vuttaṃ nidānamādī’’ti.
1 这里,“evaṃ”是虚词,“me”等是名词。在“paṭipanno hoti”中,“paṭi”是前缀,“hoti”是动词。首先应当按这种方式来理解词类的划分。巴利
1. Tattha evanti nipātapadaṃ. Metiādīni nāmapadāni. Paṭipanno hotīti ettha paṭīti upasaggapadaṃ, hotīti ākhyātapadanti. Iminā tāva nayena padavibhāgo veditabbo.
不过从含义上说,“evaṃ”这个词首先有譬喻、教导、称赞、呵责、接受话语、行相、示例、确定等多种不同的用法。比如:
在“evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahuṃ”(既然这样生而为人,就应当多行善)等句子里,它是用在譬喻上。
在“Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabbaṃ”(你应当这样前进,你应当这样后退)等句子里,它是用在教导上。
在“Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā”(就是这样,世尊!就是这样,善逝!)等句子里,它是用在称赞上。
在“Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī”(可这个贱女,不管在谁面前都称赞那个剃头沙门)等句子里,它是用在呵责上。
在“Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosuṃ”(“是的,尊者!”那些比丘回答世尊)等句子里,它是用在接受话语上。
在“Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī”(尊者,我这样了知世尊所开示的法)等句子里,它是用在行相上。
在“Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha. ‘Subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’ti. Evañca vadehi, sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā”(来,年轻人,你去沙门阿难那里,到了以后,用我的话问候沙门阿难:是否无病、无疾、身体轻快、有力、安住舒适。就说:“都提耶之子苏巴年轻人问候尊者阿难:是否无病、无疾、身体轻快、有力、安住舒适。”再这样说:“如果尊者阿难出于慈悲,能去都提耶之子苏巴年轻人的住处,那就好了。”)等句子里,它是用在示例上。
在“Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī”(卡拉玛人,你们怎么想?这些法是善还是不善?——不善,尊者。是有罪还是无罪?——有罪,尊者。是智者所呵责还是智者所称赞?——是智者所呵责,尊者。完全执取之后会带来损害和痛苦,还是不会?你们在这里怎么想?——尊者,完全执取之后会带来损害和痛苦,我们在这里就是这样认为的)等句子里,它是用在确定上。
而在这里,这个“evaṃ”应当看作具有行相、示例、确定这三种意义。巴利
Atthato pana evaṃ-saddo tāva upamūpadesasampahaṃsanagarahaṇavacanasampaṭiggahākāranidassanāvadhāraṇādianekatthappabhedo. Tathāhesa – ‘‘evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti (dha. pa. 53) evamādīsu upamāyaṃ āgato. ‘‘Evaṃ te abhikkamitabbaṃ, evaṃ te paṭikkamitabba’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 4.122) upadese. ‘‘Evametaṃ bhagavā, evametaṃ sugatā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) sampahaṃsane. ‘‘Evamevaṃ panāyaṃ vasalī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā tassa muṇḍakassa samaṇakassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.187) garahaṇe. ‘‘Evaṃ, bhanteti kho te bhikkhū bhagavato paccassosu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.1) vacanasampaṭiggahe. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho ahaṃ, bhante, bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.398) ākāre. ‘‘Ehi tvaṃ, māṇavaka, yena samaṇo ānando tenupasaṅkama, upasaṅkamitvā mama vacanena samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ puccha. ‘‘Subho māṇavo todeyyaputto bhavantaṃ ānandaṃ appābādhaṃ appātaṅkaṃ lahuṭṭhānaṃ balaṃ phāsuvihāraṃ pucchatī’’ti. ‘‘Evañca vadehi, sādhu kira bhavaṃ ānando yena subhassa māṇavassa todeyyaputtassa nivesanaṃ, tenupasaṅkamatu anukampaṃ upādāyā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.445) nidassane. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, kālāmā, ime dhammā kusalā vā akusalā vāti? Akusalā, bhante. Sāvajjā vā anavajjā vāti? Sāvajjā, bhante. Viññugarahitā vā viññuppasatthā vāti? Viññugarahitā, bhante. Samattā samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotīti? Samattā, bhante, samādinnā ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti, evaṃ no ettha hotī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 3.66) avadhāraṇe. Svāyamidha ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇesu daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,正是通过“行相”这一含义,用“evaṃ”(如此)这个词来说明这个道理:那位世尊的教法,理趣种种、极为精微,从众多不同的意乐中产生,义理与文句都圆满具足,具有种种神变,在法义的宣说与通达上深奥难测,并且能随顺一切众生各自的语言而进入他们的耳中——这样一位世尊的教法,谁有能力以一切方式完全了知呢?然而,即使只是尽全部心力生起想要听闻的意愿之后,说“如是我闻”,意思就是“我也以一种方式听闻了”。巴利
Tattha ākāratthena evaṃ-saddena etamatthaṃ dīpeti, nānānayanipuṇamanekajjhāsayasamuṭṭhānaṃ, atthabyañjanasampannaṃ, vividhapāṭihāriyaṃ, dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīraṃ, sabbasattānaṃ sakasakabhāsānurūpato sotapathamāgacchantaṃ tassa bhagavato vacanaṃ sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātuṃ, sabbathāmena pana sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi ‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’ mayāpi ekenākārena sutanti.
以“示现”的含义,他为了把自己排除在外而说“我不是自生者,这不是由我亲证”,接着用“如是我闻”“我也这样听闻”来指示现在要说的整部经。巴利
Nidassanatthena – ‘‘nāhaṃ sayambhū, na mayā idaṃ sacchikata’’nti attānaṃ parimocento – ‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’, ‘mayāpi evaṃ suta’nti idāni vattabbaṃ sakalaṃ suttaṃ nidasseti.
为了显示“确定、正是如此”的意思,世尊曾这样说:“比丘们,在我的比丘弟子中,多闻第一的,就是阿难;在具足行持、具念、坚忍、侍奉的人中,也是阿难。”同样,世尊还这样赞叹过:“阿难尊者善于义理,善于法,善于文句,善于言辞,善于前后关联。”法将舍利弗也这样赞叹过。阿难尊者为了显示自己与这些赞叹相称的忆持能力,并让众生对听闻佛法生起希求之心,所以说“如是我闻”。而且,无论从义理上还是从文句上,都不增不减,正应这样看待,不应看成别的样子。巴利
Avadhāraṇatthena – ‘‘etadaggaṃ, bhikkhave, mama sāvakānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahussutānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando, gatimantānaṃ, satimantānaṃ, dhitimantānaṃ, upaṭṭhākānaṃ yadidaṃ ānando’’ti (a. ni. 1.223). Evaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘āyasmā ānando atthakusalo, dhammakusalo, byañjanakusalo, niruttikusalo, pubbāparakusalo’’ti (a. ni. 5.169). Evaṃ dhammasenāpatinā ca pasatthabhāvānurūpaṃ attano dhāraṇabalaṃ dassento sattānaṃ sotukāmataṃ janeti – ‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’, tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikaṃ, evameva na aññathā daṭṭhabba’’nti.
“me”这个音声出现在三种含义里。比如在“gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyyaṃ”这类句子里,意思是“被我”。在“Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetū”这类句子里,意思是“为我”。在“Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave, bhavathā”这类句子里,意思是“我的”。但在这里,它同时适用于“被我听闻”和“我的听闻”这两种含义。巴利
Me-saddo tīsu atthesu dissati. Tathā hissa – ‘‘gāthābhigītaṃ me abhojaneyya’’ntiādīsu (su. ni. 81) mayāti attho. ‘‘Sādhu me, bhante, bhagavā saṅkhittena dhammaṃ desetū’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.88) mayhanti attho. ‘‘Dhammadāyādā me, bhikkhave , bhavathā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.29) mamāti attho. Idha pana mayā sutanti ca, mama sutanti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
“所闻”中的“闻”这个词,既可以带前缀,也可以不带前缀,含义有多种分别:前往、闻名、沾湿、积集、专务、耳所识、随耳门而了知等等。比如在“senāya pasuto”这类说法里,意思是“前往”。在“Sutadhammassa passato”这类说法里,意思是“闻名的法”。在“Avassutā avassutassa”这类说法里,意思是“沾湿的”。在“Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappakaṃ”这类说法里,意思是“积集的”。在“Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā”这类说法里,意思是“专务禅那的”。在“Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ”这类说法里,意思是“耳所识的”。在“Sutadharo sutasannicayo”这类说法里,意思是“随耳门而了知并受持的”。而在这里,它的意思是“依耳门而受持的”或“受持”。因为当“me”表示“被我”时,“evaṃ mayā sutaṃ”就说得通,意思是“我依耳门这样受持了”。当“me”表示“我的”时,“evaṃ mama sutaṃ”就说得通,意思是“我依耳门这样受持”。巴利
Sutanti ayaṃ suta-saddo saupasaggo ca anupasaggo ca – gamanavissutakilinna-upacitānuyoga-sotaviññeyya-sotadvārānusāra-viññātādianekatthappabhedo, tathā hissa ‘‘senāya pasuto’’tiādīsu gacchantoti attho. ‘‘Sutadhammassa passato’’tiādīsu (udā. 11) vissutadhammassāti attho. ‘‘Avassutā avassutassā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 657) kilinnākilinnassāti attho. ‘‘Tumhehi puññaṃ pasutaṃ anappaka’’ntiādīsu (khu. pā. 7.12) upacitanti attho. ‘‘Ye jhānapasutā dhīrā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 181) jhānānuyuttāti attho. ‘Diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ muta’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.241) sotaviññeyyanti attho. ‘‘Sutadharo sutasannicayo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.339) sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti attho. Idha panassa sotadvārānusārena upadhāritanti vā upadhāraṇanti vāti attho. ‘Me’ saddassa hi ‘mayā’ti atthe sati ‘evaṃ mayā sutaṃ’ sotadvārānusārena upadhāritanti yujjati. ‘Mamā’ti atthe sati evaṃ mama sutaṃ sotadvārānusārena upadhāraṇanti yujjati.
在这三个词当中,“evaṃ(这样)”是指示耳识等识的作用;“me(我)”是指示具有所说的识的人;“sutaṃ(所闻)”是从否定“未曾听闻”的角度,指示没有增减、没有颠倒地执取。同样地,“evaṃ”是说明:依耳门而转起的识道以种种方式在所缘上活动;“me”是说明自身;“sutaṃ”是说明法。这里的要点是:当识道以种种方式在所缘上活动时,我并没有做别的什么,所做的只是这件事——这个法被如此听闻了。巴利
Evametesu tīsu padesu evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassanaṃ. Meti vuttaviññāṇasamaṅgipuggalanidassanaṃ. Sutanti assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassanaṃ. Tathā evanti tassā sotadvārānusārena pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Meti attappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti dhammappakāsanaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepo – ‘‘nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattāya viññāṇavīthiyā mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana kataṃ, ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti.
同样地,“如是”是在说明应当指出的法。“我”是在说明人。“所闻”是在说明这个人所做的事。这里要表达的是:“我将要指出的这部经,就是我这样听闻的。”巴利
Tathā evanti niddisitabbadhammappakāsanaṃ. Meti puggalappakāsanaṃ. Sutanti puggalakiccappakāsanaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Yaṃ suttaṃ niddisissāmi, taṃ mayā evaṃ suta’’nti.
同样地,“evaṃ(如是)”是对这样一种心相续的说明:它以种种方式生起,并执取种种含义和文句。“evaṃ”就是这种方式的安立。“me(我)”是对行为者的说明。“sutaṃ(所闻)”是对对象的说明。到此为止,对于具有这种以种种方式生起的心相续的行为者来说,就已经完成了对对象的执取和确定。巴利
Tathā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddeso. Evanti hi ayamākārapaññatti. Meti kattuniddeso. Sutanti visayaniddeso. Ettāvatā nānākārappavattena cittasantānena taṃ samaṅgino kattu visayaggahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kataṃ hoti.
或者,“如是”是指向补特伽罗作用的说明;“所闻”是指向识的作用的说明;“我”是指向兼具这两种作用的补特伽罗的说明。这里简要的意思是:“由我——这个具有听闻作用的识的补特伽罗,从识的角度获得了‘听闻作用’这个称呼,因此说是所闻。”巴利
Athavā evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso. Meti ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo, ‘‘mayā savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena viññāṇavasena laddhasavanakiccavohārena suta’’nti.
在这里,“evaṃ”和“me”这两种说法,从真实、究竟的意义来看,是并不存在的假名施设。为什么呢?因为在究竟意义上,根本不存在一个可以被称为“evaṃ”或“me”的东西。而“sutaṃ”则是存在的施设。因为这里通过耳朵所获得的那个东西,在究竟意义上是存在的。同样,“evaṃ”和“me”因为要依靠种种事物才能说出来,所以是依止施设;“sutaṃ”因为要对照所见等事物才能说出来,所以是对比施设。在这里,“evaṃ”这个说法表明不迷乱,因为迷乱的人没有能力以种种方式通达。“sutaṃ”这个说法表明对所闻的不忘失,因为如果所闻已经被忘掉,他过一段时间就不会承认“我曾听过”。这样一来,通过不迷乱成就了慧,通过不忘失成就了念。其中,以慧为先导的念有能力确定文句,以念为先导的慧有能力通达义理。由于具备这两种能力,就有能力守护义理和文句都圆满的法藏,因此成就为法藏的守护者。巴利
Tattha evanti ca meti ca saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññatti. Kiñhettha taṃ paramatthato atthi, yaṃ evanti vā meti vā niddesaṃ labhetha? Sutanti vijjamānapaññatti. Yañhi taṃ ettha sotena upaladdhaṃ, taṃ paramatthato vijjamānanti. Tathā ‘eva’nti ca, meti ca, taṃ taṃ upādāya vattabbato upādāpaññatti. ‘Suta’nti diṭṭhādīni upanidhāya vattabbato upanidhāpaññatti. Ettha ca evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpeti. Na hi sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho hoti. ‘Suta’nti vacanena sutassa asammosaṃ dīpeti. Yassa hi sutaṃ sammuṭṭhaṃ hoti, na so kālantarena mayā sutanti paṭijānāti. Iccassa asammohena paññāsiddhi, asammosena pana satisiddhi. Tattha paññāpubbaṅgamāya satiyā byañjanāvadhāraṇasamatthatā, satipubbaṅgamāya paññāya atthapaṭivedhasamatthatā. Tadubhayasamatthatāyogena atthabyañjanasampannassa dhammakosassa anupālanasamatthato dhammabhaṇḍāgārikattasiddhi.
另一种解释:用“这样”这个词,是在说明如理作意。因为不如理作意的人,就无法以种种方式通达。用“听闻”这个词,是在说明不散乱,因为心散乱的人不可能听闻。就像这样,一个心散乱的人,即使别人在对他说他拥有的一切成就,他也会说:“我没听到,你再说一遍。”在这里,如理作意能成就自身的正确发愿以及过去所造的福业,因为如果发愿不正确,或者过去没有造过福业,就不会有这些。不散乱则能成就听闻正法和亲近善士,因为心散乱的人听不进去,而不亲近善士的人也不会有听闻。巴利
Aparo nayo, evanti vacanena yoniso manasikāraṃ dīpeti. Ayoniso manasikaroto hi nānappakārapaṭivedhābhāvato. Sutanti vacanena avikkhepaṃ dīpeti, vikkhittacittassa savanābhāvato. Tathā hi vikkhittacitto puggalo sabbasampattiyā vuccamānopi ‘‘na mayā sutaṃ, puna bhaṇathā’’ti bhaṇati. Yoniso manasikārena cettha attasammāpaṇidhiṃ pubbe ca katapuññataṃ sādheti, sammā appaṇihitattassa pubbe akatapuññassa vā tadabhāvato. Avikkhepena saddhammassavanaṃ sappurisūpanissayañca sādheti. Na hi vikkhittacitto sotuṃ sakkoti, na ca sappurise anupassayamānassa savanaṃ atthīti.
另一种解释:所谓“如是”,是因为对于那以种种方式运转的心相续来说,会有对种种义理和文句的执取,所以就说这是对种种方式的说明。而这种善美的状态,对于一个过去没有正确发愿、或先前没有修集福业的人来说,是不会真正拥有的。因此,用“如是”这个善美的状态,表明他自己获得了后一对成就。而“闻”则通过听闻这一条件,表明前一对成就。因为,住在不适当的地方,或者没有亲近善士的人,是不可能有听闻的。这样一来,由后一对成就的达成,就达成了意乐的清净;由前一对成就的达成,就达成了加行的清净。又由意乐清净,就达成了证悟与善巧;由加行清净,就达成了教法与善巧。所以,一个加行清净、意乐清净、具足教法与证悟的人所说的话,就像日出前的曙光,又像如理作意对于善业那样,堪能成为世尊话语的前导。于是,在恰当之处安立起因,而说出“如是我闻”等开头语。巴利
Aparo nayo, yasmā evanti yassa cittasantānassa nānākārappavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇaṃ hoti, tassa nānākāraniddesoti vuttaṃ, so ca evaṃ bhaddako ākāro na sammāappaṇihitattano pubbe akatapuññassa vā hoti, tasmā evanti iminā bhaddakenākārena pacchimacakkadvayasampattimattano dīpeti. Sutanti savanayogena purimacakkadvayasampattiṃ. Na hi appatirūpadese vasato sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa vā savanaṃ atthi. Iccassa pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyā āsayasuddhisiddhā hoti, purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā payogasuddhi, tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhi, payogasuddhiyā āgamabyattisiddhi. Iti payogāsayasuddhassa āgamādhigamasampannassa vacanaṃ aruṇuggaṃ viya sūriyassa udayato yoniso manasikāro viya ca kusalakammassa arahati bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitunti ṭhāne nidānaṃ ṭhapento – ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādimāha.
另一种解释:通过“如是”这个说明种种通达的词语,表明自己已经具足了义无碍解和辩无碍解。“闻”这个说明所闻类别通达的词语,则表明已经具足了法无碍解和词无碍解。而且,当他说出“如是”这个显示如理作意的词语时,是在表明:“这些法,我已经用意识反复观察,用见解彻底通达。”当他说出“闻”这个显示听闻关系的词语时,是在表明:“很多法,我已经听闻、受持,用语言反复研习。”通过这两方面,他显示了义理和文句的圆满,从而让人对听闻生起尊重。因为,如果一个人对义理和文句都圆满的法不尊重地听闻,就会与巨大的利益隔绝。所以,应当生起尊重之心,恭敬地听闻这个法。巴利
Aparo nayo, ‘eva’nti iminā nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena vacanena attano atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ dīpeti. ‘Suta’nti iminā sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhadīpakena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvaṃ. ‘Eva’nti ca idaṃ yoniso manasikāradīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā, diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhā’’ti dīpeti. ‘Suta’nti idaṃ savanayogadīpakaṃ vacanaṃ bhāsamāno – ‘‘bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitā’’ti dīpeti. Tadubhayenāpi atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpento savane ādaraṃ janeti. Atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhi dhammaṃ ādarena assuṇanto mahatā hitā paribāhiro hotīti, tasmā ādaraṃ janetvā sakkaccaṃ ayaṃ dhammo sotabboti.
通过“如是我闻”这整句话,具寿阿难不把如来所宣说的法执为自己所有,因此超越了非善人的境地。他承认自己是声闻弟子,因此进入了善人的境地。同样,他让心从非正法中脱离出来,把心安立在正法上。当他表明“这只是我所听闻的,正是那位世尊所说”时,他解脱了自己,把法归归于导师,随顺了胜者之语,确立了法的轨范。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’nti iminā pana sakalena vacanena āyasmā ānando tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammaṃ attano adahanto asappurisabhūmiṃ atikkamati. Sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanto sappurisabhūmiṃ okkamati. Tathā asaddhammā cittaṃ vuṭṭhāpeti, saddhamme cittaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. ‘‘Kevalaṃ sutamevetaṃ mayā, tasseva bhagavato vacana’’nti dīpento attānaṃ parimoceti, satthāraṃ apadisati, jinavacanaṃ appeti, dhammanettiṃ patiṭṭhāpeti.
而且,他不承认“如是我闻”是自己编出来的,为了进一步说明前面那句话,他指出:这是我在那位世尊面前亲自领受的——那位世尊具有四无所畏,具足十力,安住于牛王之位,发出狮子吼,是一切众生中最上的、法自在者、法王、法主、法灯、法的归依处、正法的殊胜转轮王、正等正觉者。对这番话,不论在义理上、法上、语句上还是文句上,都不该有任何犹豫或疑惑。这样一来,他就消除了一切天和人对这法的无信,令信心生起。因此这样说——巴利
Apica ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti attanā uppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivaranto – ‘‘sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayā tassa bhagavato catuvesārajjavisāradassa dasabaladharassa āsabhaṭṭhānaṭṭhāyino sīhanādanādino sabbasattuttamassa dhammissarassa dhammarājassa dhammādhipatino dhammadīpassa dhammasaraṇassa saddhammavaracakkavattino sammāsambuddhassa vacanaṃ, na ettha atthe vā dhamme vā pade vā byañjane vā kaṅkhā vā vimati vā kātabbā’’ti sabbesaṃ devamanussānaṃ imasmiṃ dhamme assaddhiyaṃ vināseti, saddhāsampadaṃ uppādeti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
它摧毁没有信心的人,让信心在教法中得到增长;
乔达摩的弟子这样说:如是我闻。巴利
‘‘Vināsayati assaddhaṃ, saddhaṃ vaḍḍheti sāsane; Evaṃ me sutamiccevaṃ, vadaṃ gotamasāvako’’ti.
“一”是限定数量的说明;“时”是限定范围的说明;“一时”是没有明确指定地表达。在这里,“时”这个词——巴利
Ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso. Samayanti paricchinnaniddeso. Ekaṃ samayanti aniyamitaparidīpanaṃ. Tattha samayasaddo –
和合、刹那、时间、集会、原因、邪见这些地方,都能见到“时”这个词。
在获得、断除和证悟中,它都能被看到。巴利
‘‘Samavāye khaṇe kāle, samūhe hetudiṭṭhisu; Paṭilābhe pahāne ca, paṭivedhe ca dissati’’.
同样地,对于“但愿我们明天也能依着时机和因缘前去亲近”这类说法(长部注1.447),这里的“时”是“集会”的意思。对于“诸比丘,梵行生活只有一刹那、一时机”这类说法(增支部8.29),这里的“时”是“刹那”的意思。对于“炎热之时、酷热之时”这类说法(波逸提358),这里的“时”是“时间”的意思。对于“森林中的大集会”这类说法(长部注2.332),这里的“时”是“聚集”的意思。对于“跋陀利,你确实没有通达时机:世尊正住在舍卫城,世尊也会知道我——名叫跋陀利的比丘,在大师的教法中修学尚未圆满。跋陀利,这也是你没有通达的时机”这类说法(中部2.135),这里的“时”是“原因”的意思。对于“那时,游方僧乌加哈马那,即萨摩那木迪卡之子,执持时论、穿廷杜卡树皮衣、住单层屋,住在末利夫人的园林里”这类说法(中部2.260),这里的“时”是“见解”的意思。巴利
Tathā hissa – ‘‘appevanāma svepi upasaṅkameyyāma kālañca samayañca upādāyā’’ti evamādīsu (dī. ni. 1.447) samavāyo attho. ‘‘Ekova kho bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) khaṇo. ‘‘Uṇhasamayo pariḷāhasamayo’’tiādīsu (pāci. 358) kālo. ‘‘Mahāsamayo pavanasmi’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.332) samūho. ‘‘Samayopi kho te, bhaddāli, appaṭividdho ahosi, bhagavā kho sāvatthiyaṃ viharati, bhagavāpi maṃ jānissati, bhaddāli nāma bhikkhu satthusāsane sikkhāya aparipūrakārī’ti. Ayampi kho, te bhaddāli, samayo appaṭividdho ahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) hetu. ‘‘Tena kho pana samayena uggahamāno paribbājako samaṇamuṇḍikāputto samayappavādake tindukācīre ekasālake mallikāya ārāme paṭivasatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.260) diṭṭhi.
在当下这一生能得到的利益,以及来世的利益;
智者因为通达了利益,就被称为贤者。巴利
‘‘Diṭṭhe dhamme ca yo attho, yo cattho samparāyiko; Atthābhisamayā dhīro, paṇḍitoti pavuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.128) –
在“等”的语境中,是指“获得”。在“以正止灭慢,令苦终结”等(增支部7.9)中,是指“断除”。在“苦有逼迫义、有为义、热恼义、变易义、现观义”等(无碍解道108)中,是指“证悟”。但在这里,它是指时间。因此,通过这个词,说明在年、季、月、半月、夜、日、上午、中午、下午、初夜、中夜、后夜、须臾等种种时间差别中,取某一个时段。巴利
Ādīsu paṭilābho. ‘‘Sammā mānābhisamayā antamakāsi dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 7.9) pahānaṃ. ‘‘Dukkhassa pīḷanaṭṭho saṅkhataṭṭho santāpaṭṭho vipariṇāmaṭṭho abhisamayaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (paṭi. 108) paṭivedho. Idha panassa kālo attho. Tena saṃvaccharautumāsaḍḍhamāsarattidivapubbaṇhamajjhanhikasāyanhapaṭhamamajjhi-mapacchimayāmamuhuttādīsu kālappabhedabhūtesu samayesu ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti.
在这里,虽然长老以智慧完全了知、清楚确定了这些经典是在哪一年、哪个季节、哪个月、哪个半月、夜间还是白天所说的,但是,如果直接说“如是我闻:在某年、某季、某月、某半月、某夜分或某日分”,就不容易记住,也不容易诵习,也不容易教别人诵习,而且要说很多话。所以,就用一个词把那个意思总括起来,说“一时”。或者说,世尊在人间和天界有许多非常明显、各不相同的时间,比如入胎时、出生时、生起厌离时、出家时、修苦行时、降魔时、成正觉时、现法乐住时、说法时、般涅槃时等等。在这些时间当中,这里指的是说法时,所以用一个“时”来表示。再者,在智慧的作用和悲悯的作用这两种时中,这里指悲悯的作用时;在自利修行和利他修行这两种时中,这里指利他修行时;在集会大众的两种应做事中,这里指说法时;在说法和修行这两种时中,这里指说法时——为了指明这些时中的某一种,所以说“一时”。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi etesu saṃvaccharādīsu samayesu yaṃ yaṃ suttaṃ yasmiṃ yasmiṃ saṃvacchare utumhi māse pakkhe rattibhāge vā divasabhāge vā vuttaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ therassa suviditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ paññāya. Yasmā pana – ‘‘evaṃ me sutaṃ’’ asukasaṃvacchare asukautumhi asukamāse asukapakkhe asukarattibhāge asukadivasabhāge vāti evaṃ vutte na sakkā sukhena dhāretuṃ vā uddisituṃ vā uddisāpetuṃ vā, bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti, tasmā ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha. Ye vā ime gabbhokkantisamayo, jātisamayo, saṃvegasamayo, abhinikkhamanasamayo, dukkarakārikasamayo, māravijayasamayo, abhisambodhisamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo, desanāsamayo, parinibbānasamayoti, evamādayo bhagavato devamanussesu ativiya pakāsā anekakālappabhedā eva samayā. Tesu samayesu desanāsamayasaṅkhātaṃ ekaṃ samayanti dīpeti. Yo cāyaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākiccasamayesu karuṇākiccasamayo, attahitaparahitapaṭipattisamayesu parahitapaṭipattisamayo, sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesu dhammikathāsamayo desanāpaṭipattisamayesu desanāsamayo, tesupi samayesu aññataraṃ samayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti āha.
为什么这里不像阿毗达摩里那样说“yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara”(《法集论》1),也不像其他经句里那样说“yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī”(诸比丘,当比丘远离诸欲之时),用位置格来表达,也不像律藏里那样说“tena samayena buddho bhagavā”(那时,世尊),用工具格来表达,而是不用这些方式,改用业格说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时)呢?因为那些地方和这里的意义不同。在阿毗达摩和那些经句里,存在“所依”的意义,也存在以“有”来标示“有之相”的意义。所谓“所依”,就是时间的意思;“集合”也是“时”的意思。在那里,各处所说的触等诸法,以及被称为刹那和合之因的“时”,通过它们的存在而被标示出来。因此,为了显示这个意义,那些地方就用了位置格来表达。巴利
Kasmā panettha yathā abhidhamme ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacara’’nti (dha. sa. 1) ca, ito aññesu ca suttapadesu – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’ti ca bhummavacananiddeso kato, vinaye ca – ‘‘tena samayena buddho bhagavā’’ti karaṇavacanena, tathā akatvā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti upayogavacananiddeso katoti? Tattha tathā idha ca aññathā atthasambhavato. Tattha hi abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu ca adhikaraṇattho bhāvena bhāvalakkhaṇattho ca sambhavati. Adhikaraṇañhi kālattho, samūhattho ca samayo, tattha tattha vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa bhāvena tesaṃ bhāvo lakkhīyati, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha bhummavacananiddeso kato.
在律藏里,因的意思和工具的意思都能成立。因为制定学处的那个时机,连舍利弗等人也难以了知;世尊正是以那个时机作为因、作为工具来制定学处,并且顾念着制定学处的因,才在各处安住。所以,为了说明这个意思,在律藏里就用工具格来表述。巴利
Vinaye ca hetuattho karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Yo hi so sikkhāpadapaññattisamayo sāriputtādīhipi dubbiññeyyo, tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ tattha karaṇavacanena niddeso kato.
在这里,对于其他同类经典,“彻底结合”的意思也成立。因为世尊在宣说这部经或其他经的那个时候,确实是完全以悲心而安住。所以,为了说明这个意思,这里就用了业格的表达方式。巴利
Idha pana aññasmiñca evaṃ jātike accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati. Yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā imaṃ aññaṃ vā suttantaṃ desesi, accantameva taṃ samayaṃ karuṇāvihārena vihāsi, tasmā tadatthajotanatthaṃ idha upayogavacananiddeso katoti.
因此,这样说:巴利
Tenetaṃ vuccati –
根据各种不同的含义,以及依处格和工具格来考虑。
别处已经说过“时”,这里则是根据它的用法(以对格)来说的。巴利
‘‘Taṃ taṃ atthamapekkhitvā, bhummena karaṇena ca; Aññatra samayo vutto, upayogena so idhā’’ti.
古人对这句话的解释是:说“tasmiṃ samaye”(在那时),或者说“tena samayena”(以那时),或者说“ekaṃ samayaṃ”(一时),这些只是说法上的不同,实际意思在所有情况下都是处格。所以,即使说的是“ekaṃ samayaṃ”,也应该理解为“ekasmiṃ samaye”(在一个时候)的意思。巴利
Porāṇā pana vaṇṇayanti – ‘‘tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā, ‘‘tena samayenā’’ti vā, ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā, abhilāpamattabhedo esa, sabbattha bhummamevatthoti. Tasmā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttepi ‘‘ekasmiṃ samaye’’ti attho veditabbo.
“世尊”这个词,意思是值得敬重的人。世间上,人们把值得敬重的人称为“世尊”。而这位佛陀,因为具足一切殊胜功德,所以在一切众生中最为值得敬重,因此应当知道他就是“世尊”。古代的大德们也这样说过:巴利
Bhagavāti garu. Garuñhi loke bhagavāti vadanti. Ayañca sabbaguṇavisiṭṭhatāya sabbasattānaṃ garu, tasmā bhagavāti veditabbo. Porāṇehipi vuttaṃ –
“世尊”这个称呼是最殊胜的,“世尊”这个称呼是最上的。
他可敬,又具足恭敬,因此被称为世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttamaṃ; Garu gāravayutto so, bhagavā tena vuccatī’’ti.
他拥有福运,也具足破坏之力,并且以种种福运而著称。
已受用(苦的止息),已舍弃(轮回的)趣向,因此在诸有之中,被称为世尊。巴利
‘‘Bhāgyavā bhaggavā yutto, bhagehi ca vibhattavā; Bhattavā vantagamano, bhavesu bhagavā tato’’ti.
依这首偈颂,“世尊”这个词的详细含义应当这样理解。而这些含义在《清净道论》讲佛随念的部分里已经说过了。巴利
Imissā gāthāya vasenassa padassa vitthāraattho veditabbo. So ca visuddhimagge buddhānussatiniddese vuttoyeva.
到这里,通过“如是我闻”这句话,开示了随所听闻的法,从而让世尊的法身成为眼前亲证。以此安慰那些因为见不到导师而心生忧恼的人:此圣教并非失去了导师,这(法与律)即是你们的导师。巴利
Ettāvatā cettha evaṃ me sutanti vacanena yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ dassento bhagavato dhammakāyaṃ paccakkhaṃ karoti. Tena ‘‘nayidaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ pāvacanaṃ, ayaṃ vo satthā’’ti satthu adassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāseti.
用“一时,世尊”这句话,是在说明当时世尊已经不在世间,从而点出色身已经般涅槃。借此提醒那些因为活着就骄傲沉醉的人:“像这样宣说圣法、具足十力、身如金刚的世尊,都已经般涅槃了,还有谁能让人们对活着抱有期待呢?”同时激发他们在正法上努力精进。巴利
Ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavāti vacanena tasmiṃ samaye bhagavato avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento rūpakāyaparinibbānaṃ sādheti. Tena ‘‘evaṃvidhassa nāma ariyadhammassa desako dasabaladharo vajirasaṅghāta samānakāyo sopi bhagavā parinibbuto, kena aññena jīvite āsā janetabbā’’ti jīvitamadamattaṃ janaṃ saṃvejeti, saddhamme cassa ussāhaṃ janeti.
说“如是”的时候,是在指出教法的圆满;说“我闻”的时候,是在指出弟子的圆满;说“一时”的时候,是在指出时机的圆满;说“世尊”的时候,是在指出说法者的圆满。巴利
Evanti ca bhaṇanto desanāsampattiṃ niddisati. Me sutanti sāvakasampattiṃ. Ekaṃ samayanti kālasampattiṃ. Bhagavāti desakasampattiṃ.
“在王舍城与那烂陀之间”——“antarā”这个词,出现在表示原因、刹那、心、中间、空隙等意思的地方。比如在“Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā”(增支部6.44)等句中,“antarā”表示原因;在“Addasa maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī”(中部2.149)等句中,表示刹那;在“Yassantarato na santi kopā”(自说20)等句中,表示心;在“Antarā vosānamāpādī”(小品350)等句中,表示中间;在“Api cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī”(波罗夷231)等句中,表示空隙。这里它用的是“空隙”的意思,所以应当理解为“在王舍城与那烂陀之间的空隙处”。另外,因为和“antarā”这个词搭配,[两个地名]就用了宾格的形式。在这类情况下,研究文字的人通常只用一个“antarā”,比如说“antarā gāmañca nadiñca yāti”(在村落与河流之间行走),这同一个“antarā”必须同时连接到第二个词上;如果不这样连接,宾格的用法就说不通。而这里,是连接之后才这样说的。巴利
Antarā ca rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti antarā-saddo kāraṇakhaṇacittavemajjhavivarādīsu dissati. ‘‘Tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya aññatra tathāgatā’’ti (a. ni. 6.44) ca, ‘‘janā saṅgamma mantenti mañca tañca kimantara’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.228) ca ādīsu hi kāraṇe antarā-saddo. ‘‘Addasa maṃ, bhante, aññatarā itthī vijjantarikāya bhājanaṃ dhovantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) khaṇe. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) citte. ‘‘Antarā vosānamāpādī’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 350) vemajjhe. ‘‘Api cāyaṃ, bhikkhave, tapodā dvinnaṃ mahānirayānaṃ antarikāya āgacchatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 231) vivare. Svāyamidha vivare vattati, tasmā rājagahassa ca nāḷandāya ca vivareti evametthattho veditabbo. Antarā-saddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Īdisesu ca ṭhānesu akkharacintakā ‘‘antarā gāmañca nadiñca yātī’’ti evaṃ ekameva antarāsaddaṃ payujjanti, so dutiyapadenapi yojetabbo hoti, ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Idha pana yojetvāyeva vuttoti.
已经踏上长途旅程,意思是已经走上了被称为长途的道路,也就是“很长的路”。因为在分析长途出行时机的《分别》里说到“心想‘我要走半由旬’就应该吃东西”等等,所以半由旬也算长途旅程。不过,从王舍城到那烂陀正好是一由旬。巴利
Addhānamaggappaṭipannohotīti addhānasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno hoti, ‘‘dīghamagga’’nti attho. Addhānagamanasamayassa hi vibhaṅge ‘‘aḍḍhayojanaṃ gacchissāmīti bhuñjitabba’’ntiādivacanato (pāci. 218) aḍḍhayojanampi addhānamaggo hoti. Rājagahato pana nāḷandā yojanameva.
与大比丘僧团一起。“大”既是因为功德上的大而称大,也是因为数量上的大而称大。因为这个比丘僧团在功德上也是大的,具足了少欲等功德;在数量上也是大的,有五百位之多。比丘的聚合就是“比丘僧团”,与这个比丘僧团一起,意思就是与那个由见和同、戒和同而聚合的沙门团体在一起。“一起”就是一同。巴利
Mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhinti ‘mahatā’ti guṇamahattenapi mahatā, saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. So hi bhikkhusaṅgho guṇehipi mahā ahosi, appicchatādiguṇasamannāgatattā. Saṅkhyāyapi mahā, pañcasatasaṅkhyattā. Bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho ‘bhikkhusaṅgho’, tena bhikkhusaṅghena. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātasaṅkhātena samaṇagaṇenāti attho. Saddhinti ekato.
“以大约五百位比丘”这句话中,“五百”是指这些比丘大约有五百位。“mattā”的意思是分量、尺度。所以,就像说“于食知量”时,意思是“在食物上知道分量,知道尺度”,这里也应该这样理解:“那些比丘的百数,大约五百,即五百之数。”“比丘的百数”就是数百位比丘,以那大约五百位比丘。巴利
Pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehīti pañcamattā etesanti pañcamattāni. Mattāti pamāṇaṃ vuccati, tasmā yathā ‘‘bhojane mattaññū’’ti vutte ‘‘bhojane mattaṃ jānāti, pamāṇaṃ jānātī’’ti attho hoti, evamidhāpi – ‘‘tesaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ pañcamattā pañcapamāṇa’’nti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Bhikkhūnaṃ satāni bhikkhusatāni, tehi pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi.
这位外道游行者叫须卑,“须卑”是他的名字。“pi”这个字是为了把走在同一条路上的人归到一起才说的。“kho”这个字是连接词,是为了让音节顺畅才说的。“外道游行者”指的是删阇耶的内弟子阐那外道游行者。这里说的是:“当世尊走上那条长途道路时,外道游行者须卑也走上了。”这里的“hoti”这个词表示过去的时间。巴利
Suppiyopikho paribbājakoti suppiyoti tassa nāmaṃ. Pi-kāro maggappaṭipannasabhāgatāya puggalasampiṇḍanattho. Kho-kāro padasandhikaro, byañjanasiliṭṭhatāvasena vutto. Paribbājakoti sañjayassa antevāsī channaparibbājako. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘yadā bhagavā taṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno, tadā suppiyopi paribbājako paṭipanno ahosī’’ti. Atītakālattho hettha hoti-saddo.
和名叫梵授的年轻内弟子一起——这里,“内弟子”是指住在近处的人,也就是亲近随侍的弟子。“梵授”是他的名字。“青年”这个词,也可以指众生、盗贼,或者年轻人。巴利
Saddhiṃ antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenāti – ettha ante vasatīti antevāsī. Samīpacāro santikāvacaro sissoti attho. Brahmadattoti tassa nāmaṃ. Māṇavoti sattopi coropi taruṇopi vuccati.
那些被死神使者警告过的青年,如果仍然放逸懈怠,
他们长久以来一直忧愁,因为投生到了低贱的身体里。巴利
‘‘Coditā devadūtehi, ye pamajjanti māṇavā; Te dīgharattaṃ socanti, hīnakāyūpagā narā’’ti. (ma. ni. 3.271) –
在这些情况下,众生被称为“青年”。比如在“与青年们相聚,不论已作盗业还是未作盗业”这类句子中,“青年”指的是盗贼;而在“青年庵婆咤”“青年盎伽”这类说法中,“青年”指的是年轻人。这里也是这个意思。因为这里说的是:与名叫梵授的年轻内弟子一起。巴利
Ādīsu hi satto māṇavoti vutto. ‘‘Māṇavehipi samāgacchanti katakammehipi akatakammehipī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.149) coro. ‘‘Ambaṭṭho māṇavo, aṅgako māṇavo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.316) taruṇo ‘māṇavo’ti vutto. Idhāpi ayamevattho. Idañhi vuttaṃ hoti – brahmadattena nāma taruṇantevāsinā saddhinti.
这里“在那条长途路上”,或者“在那两个人当中”。“Suda”只是一个语气助词。“以种种方式”:“pariyāya”这个词可以表示场合、开示、原因等。比如在“阿难,今天有什么场合让我去教诫诸比库尼呢?”这类经文里,“pariyāya”表示场合;在“你应当把这‘蜜丸’的开示记持为‘蜜丸’ ”这类经文里,表示开示;在“王族,也以这个理由,应当如此”这类经文里,表示原因。在这里也是表示原因,所以这里的含义是:“以种种原因”“以许多原因”。巴利
Tatrāti tasmiṃ addhānamagge, tesu vā dvīsu janesu. Sudanti nipātamattaṃ. Anekapariyāyenāti pariyāya-saddo tāva vāradesanākāraṇesu vattati. ‘‘Kassa nu kho, ānanda, ajja pariyāyo bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398) hi vāre pariyāyasaddo vattati. ‘‘Madhupiṇḍikapariyāyotveva naṃ dhārehī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) desanāyaṃ. ‘‘Imināpi kho, te rājañña, pariyāyena evaṃ hotū’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.411) kāraṇe. Svāyamidhāpi kāraṇe vattati, tasmā ayamettha attho – ‘‘anekavidhena kāraṇenā’’ti, ‘‘bahūhi kāraṇehī’’ti vuttaṃ hoti.
说佛陀的坏话,意思是:对于那位远离过失、具足无量功德的佛陀世尊,他却这样说——“世间对尊长和有身份者应做的致敬等合宜行为,被称为‘和合味’,而沙门乔达摩没有这些,所以沙门乔达摩是无味的、无福德的、主张无作的、主张断灭的、令人厌恶的、须调伏的、苦行的、无胆量的。沙门乔达摩没有超越常人的法,没有无上圣者的如实知见之殊胜。沙门乔达摩所开示的法,是依推论而成的,随推测而转,出自他自己的辩才。沙门乔达摩并非一切知者,不是世间解,不是无上者,不是最上人。”他就这样把种种根本不是理由的事说成是理由,用各种方式说佛陀的坏话、指责过失、加以诽谤。巴利
Buddhassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti avaṇṇavirahitassa aparimāṇavaṇṇasamannāgatassāpi buddhassa bhagavato – ‘‘yaṃ loke jātivuḍḍhesu kattabbaṃ abhivādanādisāmīcikammaṃ ‘sāmaggiraso’ti vuccati, taṃ samaṇassa gotamassa natthi tasmā arasarūpo samaṇo gotamo, nibbhogo, akiriyavādo, ucchedavādo, jegucchī, venayiko, tapassī, apagabbho. Natthi samaṇassa gotamassa uttarimanussadhammo alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso. Takkapariyāhataṃ samaṇo gotamo dhammaṃ deseti, vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ, sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ. Samaṇo gotamo na sabbaññū, na lokavidū, na anuttaro, na aggapuggalo’’ti. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ akāraṇameva kāraṇanti vatvā tathā tathā avaṇṇaṃ dosaṃ nindaṃ bhāsati.
就像对佛陀那样,对法也一样:他把各种根本不是理由的事情说成是理由,说“沙门乔达摩的法讲得不好、难以证悟、不能引导人出离、不能导向寂静”,用各种方式说法的坏话。巴利
Yathā ca buddhassa, evaṃ dhammassāpi taṃ taṃ akāraṇameva kāraṇato vatvā – ‘‘samaṇassa gotamassa dhammo durakkhāto, duppaṭivedito, aniyyāniko, anupasamasaṃvattaniko’’ti tathā tathā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.
就像对法那样,对僧团也一样:他把各种各样根本不是理由的事当成理由来说,说什么“沙门乔达摩的弟子僧团行邪道、行歪道、行违背之道、行不顺之道、行随顺非法之道”,用各种方式加以毁谤。巴利
Yathā ca dhammassa, evaṃ saṅghassāpi yaṃ vā taṃ vā akāraṇameva kāraṇato vatvā – ‘‘micchāpaṭipanno samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakasaṅgho, kuṭilapaṭipanno, paccanīkapaṭipadaṃ ananulomapaṭipadaṃ adhammānulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipanno’’ti tathā tathā avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.
他的内弟子心里想:“我们的老师去抓不该抓的东西,去踩不该踩的地方。他这样下去,就像吞火的人,像用手去摸剑刃的人,像想用拳头劈开须弥山的人,像在锯齿之间玩耍的人,像用手去抓一头狂怒发情的大象——他对本该称赞的三宝偏偏说坏话,一定会遭到不幸和灾祸。可是,当老师踩进粪坑、火堆、荆棘或黑蛇,爬上尖桩,吞下剧毒,喝下碱水,或者坠入地狱深渊的时候,内弟子并不需要样样都跟着去做。因为众生都是自己业的主人,只能随着自己的业而投生。父亲不会因为儿子的业而投生,儿子不会因为父亲的业而投生;母亲不会因为儿子的业而投生,儿子不会因为母亲的业而投生;兄弟不会因为姊妹的业而投生,姊妹不会因为兄弟的业而投生;老师不会因为内弟子的业而投生,内弟子也不会因为老师的业而投生。我的老师正在诽谤三宝,而诽谤圣者可是极大的罪过啊。”他这样如理地省察之后,就驳斥老师的说法,正确地举出真正的理由,以种种方式开始称扬三宝的功德,正像一个有智慧、出身良家的人那样。因此经文说:“然而,游方者须卑的内弟子——青年梵授,以种种方式称扬佛的功德,称扬法的功德,称扬僧伽的功德。”巴利
Antevāsī panassa – ‘‘amhākaṃ ācariyo aparāmasitabbaṃ parāmasati, anakkamitabbaṃ akkamati, svāyaṃ aggiṃ gilanto viya, hatthena asidhāraṃ parāmasanto viya, muṭṭhinā sineruṃ padāletukāmo viya, kakacadantapantiyaṃ kīḷamāno viya, pabhinnamadaṃ caṇḍahatthiṃ hatthena gaṇhanto viya ca vaṇṇārahasseva ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsamāno anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇissati. Ācariye kho pana gūthaṃ vā aggiṃ vā kaṇṭakaṃ vā kaṇhasappaṃ vā akkamante, sūlaṃ vā abhirūhante, halāhalaṃ vā visaṃ khādante, khārodakaṃ vā pakkhalante, narakapapātaṃ vā papatante, na antevāsinā taṃ sabbamanukātabbaṃ hoti. Kammassakā hi sattā attano kammānurūpameva gatiṃ gacchanti. Neva pitā puttassa kammena gacchati, na putto pitu kammena, na mātā puttassa, na putto mātuyā, na bhātā bhaginiyā, na bhaginī bhātu, na ācariyo antevāsino, na antevāsī ācariyassa kammena gacchati. Mayhañca ācariyo tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, mahāsāvajjo kho panāriyūpavādoti. Evaṃ yoniso ummujjitvā ācariyavādaṃ maddamāno sammākāraṇameva kāraṇato apadisanto anekapariyāyena tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitumāraddho, yathā taṃ paṇḍitajātiko kulaputto’’. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘suppiyassa pana paribbājakassa antevāsī brahmadatto māṇavo anekapariyāyena buddhassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, dhammassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, saṅghassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti.
在这里,“vaṇṇa”这个词出现在外形、出身、色处、原因、分量、功德、称赞等含义中。其中,在“化作一条巨大的蛇王外形”这类语句里,指的是外形;在“婆罗门是最高的种姓,别的种姓是低劣的”这类语句里,指的是出身;在“具足最殊胜的肤色之美”这类语句里,指的是色处。巴利
Tattha vaṇṇanti vaṇṇa-saddo saṇṭhāna-jāti-rūpāyatana-kāraṇa-pamāṇa-guṇa-pasaṃsādīsu dissati . Tattha ‘‘mahantaṃ sapparājavaṇṇaṃ abhinimminitvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.142) saṇṭhānaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Brāhmaṇova seṭṭho vaṇṇo, hīno añño vaṇṇo’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.402) jāti. ‘‘Paramāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya samannāgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.303) rūpāyatanaṃ.
我不摘取,也不折断,只是远远地嗅一嗅水里的莲花。
那么,到底是根据什么道理,才被称为“盗香者”呢?巴利
‘‘Na harāmi na bhañjāmi, ārā siṅghāmi vārijaṃ; Atha kena nu vaṇṇena, gandhatthenoti vuccatī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.234) –
在这些语境里,ādīsu 的 vaṇṇa 指原因。在“钵有三种 vaṇṇa”(《波罗夷》602)这类句子中,指量度。在“居士,你们是从什么时候知道沙门乔达摩这些 vaṇṇa 的?”(《中部》2.77)这类句子中,指功德。在“他称赞应受称赞者的 vaṇṇa”(《增支部》2.135)这类句子中,指赞叹。而在这里,既指功德,也指赞叹。据说这位青年正是依据那些真实的原因,以种种方式宣说了与三宝功德相连的赞叹。
其中,佛陀的功德应当通过“彼世尊是阿拉汉、正自觉者……”(《波罗夷》1)这样的方式,以及“诸比丘,若对佛有净信,即是对最胜者有净信”“诸比丘,有一人出现于世……无可比拟,无可等伦”(《增支部》1.174)这样的方式来了知。法的功德应当通过“法为世尊所善说”(《长部》2.159)、“阿赖耶的根除,轮回的截断”(《如是语》90、《增支部》4.34),以及“诸比丘,若对圣八支道有净信,即是对最胜者有净信”等这样的方式来了知。僧的功德则应当通过“世尊的弟子僧团是善行道者”(《长部》2.159)、“诸比丘,若对僧有净信,即是对最胜者有净信”(《增支部》4.34)等这样的方式来了知。
有能力说法的人,应当深入五部、九分量的导师教法、八万四千法蕴,来阐明佛等三宝的功德。在这个地方,若有人阐明佛等三宝的功德,不能说他是从非渡口涉水而妄入的说法者。在这样的场合,应当知道说法者的力量。而婆罗门青年婆罗门达多,只是凭靠传闻之类的东西,以自己的力量宣说三宝的功德。巴利
Ādīsu kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Tayo pattassa vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 602) pamāṇaṃ. ‘‘Kadā saññūḷhā pana, te gahapati, ime samaṇassa gotamassa vaṇṇā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.77) guṇo. ‘‘Vaṇṇārahassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 2.135) pasaṃsā. Idha guṇopi pasaṃsāpi. Ayaṃ kira taṃ taṃ bhūtameva kāraṇaṃ apadisanto anekapariyāyena ratanattayassa guṇūpasañhitaṃ pasaṃsaṃ abhāsi. Tattha – ‘‘itipi so bhagavā arahaṃ sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (pārā. 1) nayena, ‘‘ye bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā agge te pasannā’’tiādinā ‘‘ekapuggalo, bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjati…pe… asamo asamasamo’’tiādinā (a. ni. 1.174) ca nayena buddhassa vaṇṇo veditabbo. ‘‘Svākkhāto bhagavatā dhammo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.159) ca ‘‘ālayasamugghāto vaṭṭupacchedo’’ti (iti. 90, a. ni. 4.34) ca, ‘‘ye bhikkhave, ariye aṭṭhaṅgike magge pasannā, agge te pasannā’’ti ca evamādīhi nayehi dhammassa vaṇṇo veditabbo. ‘‘Suppaṭipanno bhagavato sāvakasaṅgho’’ti (dī. ni. 2.159) ca, ‘‘ye, bhikkhave, saṅghe pasannā, agge te pasannā’’ti (a. ni. 4.34) ca evamādīhi pana nayehi saṅghassa vaṇṇo veditabbo. Pahontena pana dhammakathikena pañcanikāye navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃ caturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassāni ogāhitvā buddhādīnaṃ vaṇṇo pakāsetabbo. Imasmiñhi ṭhāne buddhādīnaṃ guṇe pakāsento atitthena pakkhando dhammakathikoti na sakkā vattuṃ. Īdisesu hi ṭhānesu dhammakathikassa thāmo veditabbo. Brahmadatto pana māṇavo anussavādimattasambandhitena attano thāmena ratanattayassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati.
就这样,他们两位是老师和弟子。互相,就是一个对另一个。直接唱反调,意思是丝毫不加回避,直截了当地提出各种对立主张,一次又一次地成为对立说法。因为当老师宣说三宝的坏话时,弟子就宣说三宝的好话;接着老师又说坏话,弟子又说好话——就这样,老师就像在木板上反复钉入毒木钉一样,一次又一次地宣说三宝的坏话;而弟子则像用金银珠宝做的钉子去挡住那根钉子一样,一次又一次地宣说三宝的好话。因此才说直接唱反调。巴利
Itiha te ubho ācariyantevāsīti evaṃ te dve ācariyantevāsikā. Aññamaññassāti añño aññassa. Ujuvipaccanīkavādāti īsakampi apariharitvā ujumeva vividhapaccanīkavādā, anekavāraṃ viruddhavādā eva hutvāti attho. Ācariyena hi ratanattayassa avaṇṇe bhāsite antevāsī vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, puna itaro avaṇṇaṃ, itaro vaṇṇanti evaṃ ācariyo sāraphalake visarukkhaāṇiṃ ākoṭayamāno viya punappunaṃ ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati. Antevāsī pana suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimayāya āṇiyā taṃ āṇiṃ paṭibāhayamāno viya punappunaṃ ratanattayassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘ujuvipaccanīkavādā’’ti.
他们紧跟在世尊和比丘僧团的后面,一步接一步地跟随着。意思是:他们紧跟在世尊和比丘僧团身后,始终不离开视线,以随行威仪的方式跟随,像仰头望着前方的人一样一路随行。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañcāti bhagavantañca bhikkhusaṅghañca pacchato pacchato dassanaṃ avijahantā iriyāpathānubandhanena anubandhā honti, sīsānulokino hutvā anugatā hontīti attho.
那么,世尊为什么走上了那段长途?须卑又为什么跟在后面?他又为什么毁谤三宝呢?先说世尊:那时他住在王舍城周围十八座大寺中的一座。清晨打理好身体,到了乞食的时候,就在比丘僧团的围绕下,进入王舍城乞食。那天,他让比丘僧团很容易地得到了食物。午后,从乞食处回来,他让比丘僧团拿好钵和衣,说:“我要去那烂陀。”于是从王舍城出发,踏上了那条路。须卑那时也住在王舍城附近的某个游方者园里,由游方者们围绕着,在王舍城乞食。那天他也为游方众弄到了容易得到的食物,吃过早饭,让游方者们拿好游方者的资具,心想“我也要去那烂陀”,却不知道世尊已经走上了那条路,就这样跟在后面。要是他知道,就不会跟了。他不知情地走着,抬起头来四处张望时,看见了世尊——正以佛陀的威德光辉闪耀,像被红色毛毯环绕着,宛如一座行走的金山之巅。巴利
Kasmā pana bhagavā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno? Kasmā ca suppiyo anubandho? Kasmā ca so ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti? Bhagavā tāva tasmiṃ kāle rājagahaparivattakesu aṭṭhārasasu mahāvihāresu aññatarasmiṃ vasitvā pātova sarīrappaṭijagganaṃ katvā bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto rājagahe piṇḍāya carati. So taṃ divasaṃ bhikkhusaṅghassa sulabhapiṇḍapātaṃ katvā pacchābhattaṃ piṇḍapātapaṭikkanto bhikkhusaṅghaṃ pattacīvaraṃ gāhāpetvā – ‘‘nāḷandaṃ gamissāmī’’ti, rājagahato nikkhamitvā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno. Suppiyopi kho tasmiṃ kāle rājagahaparivattake aññatarasmiṃ paribbājakārāme vasitvā paribbājakaparivuto rājagahe bhikkhāya carati. Sopi taṃ divasaṃ paribbājakaparisāya sulabhabhikkhaṃ katvā bhuttapātarāso paribbājake paribbājakaparikkhāraṃ gāhāpetvā – nāḷandaṃ gamissāmicceva bhagavato taṃ maggaṃ paṭipannabhāvaṃ ajānantova anubandho. Sace pana jāneyya nānubandheyya. So ajānitvāva gacchanto gīvaṃ ukkhipitvā olokayamāno bhagavantaṃ addasa buddhasiriyā sobhamānaṃ rattakambalaparikkhittamiva jaṅgamakanakagirisikharaṃ.
据说,那时候从十力尊的身体放出六色光明,向四周扩散,遍及约八十肘的范围。那片山林就像撒满了珠宝网、宝链和宝粉,又像铺展开的宝绘金毯,又像流淌的赤金溶液,又像上百支火炬同时落下、交相辉映,又像迦尼迦罗花不间断地纷纷飘散,又像被风吹起的支那红粉四处飞扬,又像彩虹、闪电和群星的光芒同时迸发闪烁,璀璨夺目。巴利
Tasmiṃ kira samaye dasabalassa sarīrato nikkhamitvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo samantā asītihatthappamāṇe padese ādhāvanti vidhāvanti ratanāveḷaratanadāmaratanacuṇṇavippakiṇṇaṃ viya, pasāritaratanacittakañcanapaṭamiva, rattasuvaṇṇarasanisiñcamānamiva, ukkāsatanipātasamākulamiva, nirantaravippakiṇṇakaṇikārapupphamiva vāyuvegakkhittacīnapiṭṭhacuṇṇamiva, indadhanuvijjulatātārāgaṇappabhāvisaravipphuritaviccharitamiva ca taṃ vanantaraṃ hoti.
世尊的身体由八十种随形好所庄严,就像盛开的青莲与红莲,又像整棵开满花的巴利恰答咖树,像星光绽放,光辉映照得整个虚空都好像失去了颜色。他身上的一寻光明周围,那由三十二种殊胜相组成的庄严花环,仿佛把三十二个月亮、三十二个太阳依次排列起来,又仿佛在威光上压过了三十二位转轮王、三十二位帝释天王、三十二位大梵天合在一起的光彩。
围绕在世尊身边站着的那些比丘,个个都是少欲、知足、远离尘世、不与人混杂、敢于指摘过失、谴责恶行、能说能劝、能接受别人批评的人;他们戒行圆满,具足定、慧、解脱和解脱知见。在他们中间,世尊就像被红色毛毯围墙围住的金柱,像红莲丛中的金船,像被珊瑚栏杆围住的火堆,像被群星围绕的满月,连飞禽走兽看了都觉得眼睛舒服,更何况是天和人。
那一天,大多数是八十位大长老,披着如云般颜色的粪扫衣,偏袒一肩,手持拐杖,像披着金甲的香象一样,已经远离嗔恨,已经抛弃嗔恨,已经破除烦恼,已经解开缠结,已经断除束缚,围绕着世尊。世尊自己已离贪,被已离贪的人围绕;自己已离嗔,被已离嗔的人围绕;自己已离痴,被已离痴的人围绕;自己已离渴爱,被已离渴爱的人围绕;自己已无烦恼,被无烦恼的人围绕;自己是佛,被随觉者围绕。就像花瓣围绕花蕊,花蕊围绕花心;又像八千头象围绕的六牙象王,九万只天鹅围绕的持国天鹅王,军队围绕的转轮王,天众围绕的帝释天王,梵众围绕的哈利多梵天。世尊以无量时劫积累福德之力所生起的、不可思议、无可比拟的佛陀游戏,像月亮行于虚空一样,走上了那条路。巴利
Asīti anubyañjanānurañjitañca pana bhagavato sarīraṃ vikasitakamaluppalamiva, saraṃ sabbapāliphullamiva pāricchattakaṃ, tārāmarīcivikasitamiva, gaganatalaṃ siriyā avahasantamiva, byāmappabhāparikkhepavilāsinī cassa dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇamālā ganthetvā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacandamālāya dvattiṃsasūriyamālāya paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacakkavattidvattiṃsasakkadevarājadvattiṃsamahābrahmānaṃ siriṃ siriyā abhibhavantimiva. Tañca pana bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā ṭhitā bhikkhū sabbeva appicchā santuṭṭhā pavivittā asaṃsaṭṭhā codakā pāpagarahino vattāro vacanakkhamā sīlasampannā samādhipaññāvimuttivimuttiññāṇadassanasampannā. Tesaṃ majjhe bhagavā rattakambalapākāraparikkhitto viya kañcanathambho, rattapadumasaṇḍamajjhagatā viya suvaṇṇanāvā, pavāḷavedikāparikkhitto viya aggikkhandho, tārāgaṇaparivārito viya puṇṇacando migapakkhīnampi cakkhūni pīṇayati, pageva devamanussānaṃ. Tasmiñca pana divase yebhuyyena asītimahātherā meghavaṇṇaṃ paṃsukūlaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karitvā kattaradaṇḍaṃ ādāya suvammavammitā viya gandhahatthino vigatadosā vantadosā bhinnakilesā vijaṭitajaṭā chinnabandhanā bhagavantaṃ parivārayiṃsu. So sayaṃ vītarāgo vītarāgehi, sayaṃ vītadoso vītadosehi, sayaṃ vītamoho vītamohehi, sayaṃ vītataṇho vītataṇhehi, sayaṃ nikkileso nikkilesehi, sayaṃ buddho anubuddhehi parivārito; pattaparivāritaṃ viya kesaraṃ, kesaraparivāritā viya kaṇṇikā, aṭṭhanāgasahassaparivārito viya chaddanto nāgarājā, navutihaṃsasahassaparivārito viya dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā, senaṅgaparivārito viya cakkavattirājā, devagaṇaparivārito viya sakko devarājā, brahmagaṇaparivārito viya hārito mahābrahmā, aparimitakālasañcitapuññabalanibbattāya acinteyyāya anopamāya buddhalīlāya cando viya gaganatalaṃ taṃ maggaṃ paṭipanno hoti.
游方者看见世尊以无与伦比的佛陀风姿向前走去,比丘们垂着眼帘,诸根寂静,内心寂静,就像在高空中安住的满月一样,而他们只礼敬世尊。他一看到这情景,就回头看了看自己的随众。那些人身上挂着担杖,上面吊着破破烂烂的背筐、三脚杖、孔雀羽毛、陶钵、滤水囊、水瓶等一大堆杂物,背负着种种沉重的资具;他们多嘴多舌,言语散乱,尽说些“某人的手好看,某人的脚好看”之类的废话,既不雅观,也不令人起敬。他看到这些之后,心里生起了悔恨。巴利
Athevaṃ bhagavantaṃ anopamāya buddhalīlāya gacchantaṃ bhikkhū ca okkhittacakkhū santindriye santamānase uparinabhe ṭhitaṃ puṇṇacandaṃ viya bhagavantaṃyeva namassamāne disvāva paribbājako attano parisaṃ avalokesi. Sā hoti kājadaṇḍake olambetvā gahitoluggaviluggapiṭṭhakatidaṇḍamorapiñchamattikāpattapasibbakakuṇḍikādianekaparikkhārabhārabharitā . ‘‘Asukassa hatthā sobhaṇā, asukassa pādā’’ti evamādiniratthakavacanā mukharā vikiṇṇavācā adassanīyā apāsādikā. Tassa taṃ disvā vippaṭisāro udapādi.
现在本该讲说世尊的功德了。可是,这个游方者因为利养和恭敬减少、徒众流失,一直对世尊心怀嫉妒。原来,只要佛陀还没出现在世间,外道们就能得到利养和恭敬;但从佛陀出世以后,他们就失去了利养和恭敬,就像太阳升起后萤火虫变得毫无光彩一样。而且,舍利弗和目犍连还在删阇耶门下出家的时候,游方者们拥有庞大的徒众;可当他们离开之后,那些徒众也就散了。正因为这两个原因,这个游方者始终嫉妒世尊,所以他吐出嫉妒之毒,说的全是对三宝的诽谤。应当这样理解。巴利
Idāni tena bhagavato vaṇṇo vattabbo bhaveyya. Yasmā panesa lābhasakkārahāniyā ceva pakkhahāniyā ca niccampi bhagavantaṃ usūyati. Aññatitthiyānañhi yāva buddho loke nuppajjati, tāvadeva lābhasakkārā nibbattanti, buddhuppādato pana paṭṭhāya parihīnalābhasakkārā honti , sūriyuggamane khajjopanakā viya nissirīkataṃ āpajjanti. Upatissakolitānañca sañjayassa santike pabbajitakāleyeva paribbājakā mahāparisā ahesuṃ, tesu pana pakkantesu sāpi tesaṃ parisā bhinnā. Iti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi ayaṃ paribbājako yasmā niccampi bhagavantaṃ usūyati, tasmā taṃ usūyavisuggāraṃ uggiranto ratanattayassa avaṇṇameva bhāsatīti veditabbo.
2 那时,世尊与比丘僧团一起,到芒果园的王家精舍过一夜。事情是这样的:世尊以佛陀的威仪一路前行,渐渐走到芒果园的入口,看了看太阳,心想:“现在不是赶路的时候了,太阳已经偏西。”于是就在芒果园的王家精舍过了一夜。巴利
2.Atha kho bhagavā ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ rājāgārake ekarattivāsaṃ upagacchi saddhiṃ bhikkhusaṅghenāti bhagavā tāya buddhalīlāya gacchamāno anupubbena ambalaṭṭhikādvāraṃ pāpuṇitvā sūriyaṃ oloketvā – ‘‘akālo dāni gantuṃ, atthasamīpaṃ gato sūriyo’’ti ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ rājāgārake ekarattivāsaṃ upagacchi.
这里说的“芒果苗圃”,是国王的一座园林。据说,园林入口附近有一棵幼小的芒果树,人们就把那个地方叫作“芒果苗圃”。这座园林离那棵树不远,因此也得名为芒果苗圃。园中树荫清凉、水源充足,四周有围墙环绕,门户设置得整齐妥当,守护得像宝库一样严密。在那里,人们为国王游乐建了一座屋舍,构思巧妙,装饰华丽,称为“王室精舍”。巴利
Tattha ambalaṭṭhikāti rañño uyyānaṃ. Tassa kira dvārasamīpe taruṇaambarukkho atthi, taṃ ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā’’ti vadanti. Tassa avidūre bhavattā uyyānampi ambalaṭṭhikā tveva saṅkhyaṃ gataṃ. Taṃ chāyūdakasampannaṃ pākāraparikkhittaṃ suyojitadvāraṃ mañjusā viya suguttaṃ. Tattha rañño kīḷanatthaṃ paṭibhānacittavicittaṃ agāraṃ akaṃsu. Taṃ ‘‘rājāgāraka’’nti vuccati.
须皮耶也是这样。他在那个地方看了看太阳,心想:“现在不是赶路的时候。游方者里有不少老老少少,而且这条路危险很多,有盗贼,有凶暴的夜叉,还有猛兽。这位沙门乔达摩已经进了园林,而沙门乔达摩住的地方,天神都会守护。不如我也在这里住一夜,明天再走。”于是他就进了那座园林。接着,比丘僧团侍奉完世尊,各自选好自己的住处。那位游方者也带着自己的随众,在园林的一角放下游方者的用具,住了下来。不过按经文本身的记载,是说“和他的弟子青年梵授一起”。巴利
Suppiyopi khoti suppiyopi tasmiṃ ṭhāne sūriyaṃ oloketvā – ‘‘akālo dāni gantuṃ, bahū khuddakamahallakā paribbājakā, bahuparissayo ca ayaṃ maggo corehipi vāḷayakkhehipi vāḷamigehipi. Ayaṃ kho pana samaṇo gotamo uyyānaṃ paviṭṭho, samaṇassa ca gotamassa vasanaṭṭhāne devatā ārakkhaṃ gaṇhanti, handāhampi idha ekarattivāsaṃ upagantvā sveva gamissāmī’’ti tadevuyyānaṃ pāvisi. Tato bhikkhusaṅgho bhagavato vattaṃ dassetvā attano attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ sallakkhesi. Paribbājakopi uyyānassa ekapasse paribbājakaparikkhāre otāretvā vāsaṃ upagacchi saddhiṃ attano parisāya. Pāḷiyamārūḷhavaseneva pana – ‘‘saddhiṃ attano antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
那位游方者就这样住下来之后,在夜里抬头望着十力世尊。那时,四周的灯火亮着,像散落的星星一样,世尊坐在中间,比丘僧团围绕在世尊身边。在那里,连一位比丘都没有手不安分、脚不安分,也没有咳嗽声或喷嚏声。因为这群人既自己持守学处,又对导师怀着恭敬,由于这两个原因,他们就像无风处的灯焰一样,一动不动,安安静静地坐着。游方者看到这样的庄严景象,又回头看看自己的随众。在那里,有的人挥手,有的人踢脚,有的人胡言乱语,有的人伸出舌头、口水直流,有的人咬着牙,发出咯咯的磨牙声,有的人打着呼噜呼呼大睡。他本该赞叹三宝的功德,却因为嫉妒,又开始只说毁谤的话。而梵授则像前面说的那样,作了赞叹。因此经中说:“在那里,须皮耶游方者……”等等,都应当这样理解。其中的“在那里”,就是指在那座芒果苗圃园林里。巴利
Evaṃ vāsaṃ upagato pana so paribbājako rattibhāge dasabalaṃ olokesi. Tasmiñca samaye samantā vippakiṇṇatārakā viya padīpā jalanti, majjhe bhagavā nisinno hoti, bhikkhusaṅgho ca bhagavantaṃ parivāretvā. Tattha ekabhikkhussapi hatthakukkuccaṃ vā pādakukkuccaṃ vā ukkāsitasaddo vā khipitasaddo vā natthi. Sā hi parisā attano ca sikkhitasikkhatāya satthari ca gāravenāti dvīhi kāraṇehi nivāte padīpasikhā viya niccalā sannisinnāva ahosi. Paribbājako taṃ vibhūtiṃ disvā attano parisaṃ olokesi. Tattha keci hatthaṃ khipanti, keci pādaṃ, keci vippalapanti, keci nillālitajivhā paggharitakheḷā, dante khādantā kākacchamānā gharugharupassāsino sayanti. So ratanattayassa guṇavaṇṇe vattabbepi issāvasena puna avaṇṇameva ārabhi. Brahmadatto pana vuttanayeneva vaṇṇaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tatrāpi sudaṃ suppiyo paribbājako’’ti sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Tattha tatrāpīti tasmimpi, ambalaṭṭhikāyaṃ uyyāneti attho.
3 “众多”是指许多位。在这里,按照律藏的说法,三个人就可以叫“众多”,超过这个数目就是僧团。但按照经藏的说法,从三个人开始就叫“众多”。这里应该按经藏的说法,理解为“众多”。
“圆堂”:有些地方把架了两根房梁、盖上像雁羽一样层叠的瓦片建成的尖顶房屋,也叫“圆堂”;有些地方把立了一根中心柱、周围环绕一圈柱子建成的集会堂,也叫“圆堂”。但这里指的是坐卧休息的堂屋,应理解为“圆堂”。
“共坐”:指以坐下来的方式聚在一起。
“聚集”:指以会合的方式集在一处。
“生起如是论议之语”:“论议”就是谈论,“论议之语”就是他们谈论的话题。“生起”就是产生。那么,是什么样的谈论呢?就是“真是稀有啊,贤友!”这一类的话。
其中,“稀有”:就像盲人攀登高山一样,不是经常能发生的事,所以叫稀有。这是从构词角度说的。而按照注疏家的解释:值得击掌赞叹的,就是稀有,意思是这件事让人为之击节赞叹。“前所未有而竟然出现”,就叫奇异。这两者都是用来表达惊异和赞叹的说法。
“乃至”:是指直到这件事因为被他彻底通达而显示出不可衡量的程度。巴利
3.Sambahulānanti bahukānaṃ. Tattha vinayapariyāyena tayo janā ‘‘sambahulā’’ti vuccanti. Tato paraṃ saṅgho. Suttantapariyāyena pana tayo tayova tato paṭṭhāya sambahulā. Idha suttantapariyāyena ‘‘sambahulā’’ti veditabbā. Maṇḍalamāḷeti katthaci dve kaṇṇikā gahetvā haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena katā kūṭāgārasālāpi ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷo’’ti vuccati, katthaci ekaṃ kaṇṇikaṃ gahetvā thambhapantiṃ parikkhipitvā katā upaṭṭhānasālāpi ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷo’’ti vuccati. Idha pana nisīdanasālā ‘‘maṇḍalamāḷo’’ti veditabbo. Sannisinnānanti nisajjanavasena. Sannipatitānanti samodhānavasena. Ayaṃ saṅkhiyadhammoti saṅkhiyā vuccati kathā , kathādhammoti attho. Udapādīti uppanno. Katamo pana soti? Acchariyaṃ āvusoti evamādi. Tattha andhassa pabbatārohaṇaṃ viya niccaṃ na hotīti acchariyaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva saddanayo. Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathānayo – accharāyogganti acchariyaṃ. Accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttanti attho. Abhūtapubbaṃ bhūtanti abbhutaṃ. Ubhayaṃ petaṃ vimhayassevādhivacanaṃ. Yāvañcidanti yāva ca idaṃ tena suppaṭividitatāya appameyyattaṃ dasseti.
世尊以了知而善通达,这里先总说其义:那位世尊圆满三十种波罗蜜,摧破一切烦恼,证得无上正等正觉。正是这位世尊,了知一切有情的根性与随眠,以一切应知之法犹如放在掌中的余甘子果一般清晰照见。巴利
Tena bhagavatā jānatā…pe… suppaṭividitāti etthāyaṃ saṅkhepattho. Yo so bhagavā samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, tena bhagavatā tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ āsayānusayaṃ jānatā, hatthatale ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya sabbañeyyadhammaṃ passatā.
而且,他是以宿命智等来了知,以天眼来照见;是以三明或六通来了知,以遍及一切处、毫无障碍的周遍眼来照见;是以能了知一切法的智慧来了知,以极其清净的肉眼,照见一切众生眼识所不能及、藏在墙壁内外等处的色法;或者,是以成就自利、以定为直接基础的证悟智慧来了知,以成就利他、以大悲为直接基础的教说智慧来照见。巴利
Api ca pubbenivāsādīhi jānatā, dibbena cakkhunā passatā. Tīhi vijjāhi chahi vā pana abhiññāhi jānatā, sabbattha appaṭihatena samantacakkhunā passatā. Sabbadhammajānanasamatthāya vā paññāya jānatā, sabbasattānaṃ cakkhuvisayātītāni tirokuṭṭādigatānipi rūpāni ativisuddhena maṃsacakkhunā passatā. Attahitasādhikāya vā samādhipadaṭṭhānāya paṭivedhapaññāya jānatā, parahitasādhikāya karuṇāpadaṭṭhānāya desanāpaññāya passatā.
因为摧毁了烦恼之敌,又因为值得接受资具等供养,所以是阿拉汉;因为正确、亲自地觉悟了一切法,所以是正自觉者。也就是说:他了知障碍法,照见能导向出离的法,因为摧毁了烦恼之敌而是阿拉汉;因为正确、亲自地觉悟了一切法而是正自觉者。就这样,以四种无所畏的方式受到赞叹的世尊,对众生种种的意乐、种种的倾向,都已透彻通达,乃至极其透彻地通达。巴利
Arīnaṃ hatattā paccayādīnañca arahattā arahatā. Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhena antarāyikadhamme vā jānatā, niyyānikadhamme passatā, kilesārīnaṃ hatattā arahatā. Sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā sammāsambuddhenāti. Evaṃ catūvesārajjavasena catūhākārehi thomitena sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatā nānajjhāsayatā suppaṭividitā yāva ca suṭṭhu paṭividitā.
现在要显示世尊对这一点已经完全透彻了知,所以说了“这些”等话。这里说的是:世尊以了知众生种种志向的智慧,以及一切知智,像用斗量、用秤称那样,完全清楚地了知众生有种种志向、种种意欲、种种见解、种种容忍、种种喜好。也就是说,世尊这样了知:“比丘们,众生依界而聚集、而会合:志向低劣的与志向低劣的聚集、会合;志向良善的与志向良善的聚集、会合。比丘们,过去时段的众生也是依界而聚集、而会合:志向低劣的与志向低劣的……志向良善的与志向良善的聚集、会合。比丘们,未来时段的众生……也会聚集、会合。比丘们,现在时段的众生也是依界而聚集、而会合:志向低劣的与志向低劣的……志向良善的与志向良善的聚集、会合。”这种了知已经彻底通达。世间很难找到两个意欲完全相同的众生。一个想走,另一个却想停;一个想喝,另一个却想吃。就拿这位老师和弟子来说,也正是这样:“善觉游方者……紧紧跟在世尊和比丘僧团后面。”这里“如是这些”的意思就是“这些如此”。其余部分和前面所说的一样。巴利
Idānissa suppaṭividitabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ayañhītiādimāha. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti yā ca ayaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘dhātuso, bhikkhave, sattā saṃsandanti samenti, hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samenti, kalyāṇādhimuttikā kalyāṇādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samenti. Atītampi kho, bhikkhave, addhānaṃ dhātusova sattā saṃsandiṃsu samiṃsu, hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttikehi…pe… kalyāṇādhimuttikā kalyāṇādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandiṃsu samiṃsu, anāgatampi kho, bhikkhave, addhānaṃ…pe… saṃsandissanti samessanti, etarahipi kho, bhikkhave, paccuppannaṃ addhānaṃ dhātusova sattā saṃsandanti samenti, hīnādhimuttikā hīnādhimuttikehi…pe… kalyāṇādhimuttikā kalyāṇādhimuttikehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanti samentī’’ti evaṃ sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatā, nānajjhāsayatā, nānādiṭṭhikatā, nānākhantitā, nānārucitā, nāḷiyā minantena viya tulāya tulayantena viya ca nānādhimuttikatāñāṇena sabbaññutaññāṇena viditā, sā yāva suppaṭividitā. Dvepi nāma sattā ekajjhāsayā dullabhā lokasmiṃ. Ekasmiṃ gantukāme eko ṭhātukāmo hoti, ekasmiṃ pivitukāme eko bhuñjitukāmo. Imesu cāpi dvīsu ācariyantevāsīsu ayañhi ‘‘suppiyo paribbājako…pe… bhagavantaṃ piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhā honti bhikkhusaṅghañcā’’ti. Tattha itihameti itiha ime, evaṃ imeti attho. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva.
4 当时,世尊了知那些比丘的这个算数法。“了知”在这里是指以一切知智而知道。因为世尊有时是用肉眼看见后知道的——就像“世尊看见一根大木头被恒河的水流冲走”等经文里那样;有时是用天眼看见后知道的——就像“世尊以清净、超越常人的天眼,看见那些天神在巴嗒厘村各自占据上千处宅地”等经文里那样;有时是用普通的耳朵听到后知道的——就像“世尊听到具寿阿难与须跋陀游方者之间这样的一段对话”等经文里那样;有时是用天耳听到后知道的——就像“世尊以清净、超越常人的天耳界,听到商主居士与尼拘律游方者之间这样的一段对话”等经文里那样。但在这里,世尊是以一切知智了知的。他是在做什么的时候了知的呢?是在做后夜分应做的事的时候。而事有两种:有意义的事和无意义的事。其中,无意义的事,世尊在菩提座上就已经用阿罗汉道彻底断除了。所以世尊所做的只有有意义的事。这有意义的事有五种:食前事、食后事、初夜分事、中夜分事、后夜分事。巴利
4.Atha kho bhagavā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ imaṃ saṅkhiyadhammaṃ viditvāti ettha viditvāti sabbaññutaññāṇena jānitvā. Bhagavā hi katthaci maṃsacakkhunā disvā jānāti – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā mahantaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ gaṅgāya nadiyā sotena vuyhamāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 4.241) viya. Katthaci dibbacakkhunā disvā jānāti – ‘‘addasā kho bhagavā dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena tā devatāyo sahassasseva pāṭaligāme vatthūni parigaṇhantiyo’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.152) viya. Katthaci pakatisotena sutvā jānāti – ‘‘assosi kho bhagavā āyasmato ānandassa subhaddena paribbājakena saddhiṃ imaṃ kathāsallāpa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.213) viya. Katthaci dibbasotena sutvā jānāti – ‘‘assosi kho bhagavā dibbāya sotadhātuyā visuddhāya atikkantamānusikāya sandhānassa gahapatissa nigrodhena paribbājakena saddhiṃ imaṃ kathāsallāpa’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.54) viya. Idha pana sabbaññutaññāṇena sutvā aññāsi. Kiṃ karonto aññāsi? Pacchimayāmakiccaṃ, kiccañca nāmetaṃ sātthakaṃ, niratthakanti duvidhaṃ hoti. Tattha niratthakakiccaṃ bhagavatā bodhipallaṅkeyeva arahattamaggena samugghātaṃ kataṃ. Sātthakaṃyeva pana bhagavato kiccaṃ hoti. Taṃ pañcavidhaṃ – purebhattakiccaṃ, pacchābhattakiccaṃ, purimayāmakiccaṃ, majjhimayāmakiccaṃ, pacchimayāmakiccanti.
这里说的是食前应做的事。巴利
Tatridaṃ purebhattakiccaṃ –
世尊确实在清晨起身后,为了照顾侍者、也让身体舒服,先洗脸等做身体的清洁整理,然后在僻静处待到乞食时间。到了乞食时,他穿好下衣,系好腰带,披上袈裟,拿着钵,有时独自一人,有时被比丘僧团围绕着,进入村庄或城镇乞食;有时以平常的方式,有时则有种种神通显现伴随。比如,当世间怙主进村乞食时,柔和的风走在前面为他清扫地面,雨云洒下细雨,压住路上的尘土,又在上面像华盖一样停住;另一些风把花朵吹来,撒在路上;高的地面低下去,低的地面高起来;每当抬脚落脚时,地面都变得平坦,柔软触感的莲花一样的花朵承接他的双脚。刚跨过门槛,右脚一落下,身体就放出六色光芒,像金色的丝网,又像被绚丽的彩帛围绕,装饰着殿堂楼阁等,四处流散;大象、马、鸟等各自待在自己的地方,发出美妙的声音;同样,鼓、琴等乐器以及人们身上佩戴的饰物也发出声音。人们凭这些征兆就知道:“今天世尊进入这里乞食了。”他们穿好下衣、披好上衣,拿着香、花等物走出家门,来到街道中间,恭敬地用香、花等供养世尊,顶礼之后请求说:“尊者,请给我们十位比丘、二十位、五十位……乃至一百位。”然后接过世尊的钵,铺好座位,恭敬地以食物等候。世尊吃完饭,观察那些众生的心相续,然后相应地说法,使得有些人确立于三皈依,有些人确立于五戒,有些人证得须陀洹果、斯陀含果、阿那含果中的某一种;有些人出家后证得最高的果位——阿罗汉果。就这样利益大众之后,他从座位起身,回精舍去。到了那里,在圆厅中铺设好的殊胜佛座上坐下,等待比丘们吃完饭。然后,当比丘们吃完饭,侍者禀告世尊。于是世尊进入香室。以上就是食前的事。巴利
Bhagavā hi pātova uṭṭhāya upaṭṭhākānuggahatthaṃ sarīraphāsukatthañca mukhadhovanādisarīraparikammaṃ katvā yāva bhikkhācāravelā tāva vivittāsane vītināmetvā, bhikkhācāravelāyaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā cīvaraṃ pārupitvā pattamādāya kadāci ekako, kadāci bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto, gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya pavisati; kadāci pakatiyā, kadāci anekehi pāṭihāriyehi vattamānehi. Seyyathidaṃ, piṇḍāya pavisato lokanāthassa purato purato gantvā mudugatavātā pathaviṃ sodhenti, valāhakā udakaphusitāni muñcantā magge reṇuṃ vūpasametvā upari vitānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhanti, apare vātā pupphāni upasaṃharitvā magge okiranti, unnatā bhūmippadesā onamanti, onatā unnamanti, pādanikkhepasamaye samāva bhūmi hoti, sukhasamphassāni padumapupphāni vā pāde sampaṭicchanti. Indakhīlassa anto ṭhapitamatte dakkhiṇapāde sarīrato chabbaṇṇarasmiyo nikkhamitvā suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāni viya citrapaṭaparikkhittāni viya ca pāsādakūṭāgārādīni alaṅkarontiyo ito cito ca dhāvanti, hatthiassavihaṅgādayo sakasakaṭṭhānesu ṭhitāyeva madhurenākārena saddaṃ karonti, tathā bherivīṇādīni tūriyāni manussānañca kāyūpagāni ābharaṇāni. Tena saññāṇena manussā jānanti – ‘‘ajja bhagavā idha piṇḍāya paviṭṭho’’ti. Te sunivatthā supārutā gandhapupphādīni ādāya gharā nikkhamitvā antaravīthiṃ paṭipajjitvā bhagavantaṃ gandhapupphādīhi sakkaccaṃ pūjetvā vanditvā – ‘‘amhākaṃ, bhante, dasa bhikkhū, amhākaṃ vīsati, paññāsaṃ…pe… sataṃ dethā’’ti yācitvā bhagavatopi pattaṃ gahetvā āsanaṃ paññapetvā sakkaccaṃ piṇḍapātena paṭimānenti. Bhagavā katabhattakicco tesaṃ sattānaṃ cittasantānāni oloketvā tathā dhammaṃ deseti, yathā keci saraṇagamanesu patiṭṭhahanti, keci pañcasu sīlesu, keci sotāpattisakadāgāmianāgāmiphalānaṃ aññatarasmiṃ; keci pabbajitvā aggaphale arahatteti. Evaṃ mahājanaṃ anuggahetvā uṭṭhāyāsanā vihāraṃ gacchati. Tattha gantvā maṇḍalamāḷe paññattavarabuddhāsane nisīdati, bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosānaṃ āgamayamāno. Tato bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosāne upaṭṭhāko bhagavato nivedeti. Atha bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisati. Idaṃ tāva purebhattakiccaṃ.
世尊这样做完午前该做的事之后,在香室的侍奉处坐下,洗了脚,站在洗脚凳上,对比丘僧团教诫说:“比丘们,你们要以不放逸来努力成就。佛陀出现在世间是很难得的,得到人身是很难得的,具足圆满的机缘是很难得的,出家是很难得的,听闻正法也是很难得的。”这时,有些比丘向世尊请教禅修业处。世尊就根据他们各自的性情,给予相应的禅修业处。然后,所有比丘都顶礼世尊,各自回到自己夜间住处或白天住处。有的去森林,有的去树下,有的去山中某处,有的去四天王天宫……有的去他化自在天宫。接着,世尊进入香室,如果想休息,就以右胁而卧,保持正念正知,像狮子一样躺卧片刻。身体恢复之后,世尊起身,在第二时段观察世间。第三时段,无论世尊住在哪个村庄或城镇附近,那里的大众在午前布施食物后,午后穿好下衣、披好上衣,带着香、花等物品,聚集到精舍来。这时,世尊以适合到场大众的神变前往法堂,坐在铺设好的殊胜佛座上,应时应机地宣说佛法。然后知道时间到了,就让大众散去。人们顶礼世尊后离去。这就是午后该做的事。巴利
Atha bhagavā evaṃ katapurebhattakicco gandhakuṭiyā upaṭṭhāne nisīditvā pāde pakkhāletvā pādapīṭhe ṭhatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ovadati – ‘‘bhikkhave, appamādena sampādetha, dullabho buddhuppādo lokasmiṃ, dullabho manussattapaṭilābho, dullabhā sampatti, dullabhā pabbajjā, dullabhaṃ saddhammassavana’’nti. Tattha keci bhagavantaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ pucchanti. Bhagavāpi tesaṃ cariyānurūpaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ deti. Tato sabbepi bhagavantaṃ vanditvā attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni gacchanti. Keci araññaṃ, keci rukkhamūlaṃ, keci pabbatādīnaṃ aññataraṃ, keci cātumahārājikabhavanaṃ…pe… keci vasavattibhavananti. Tato bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā sace ākaṅkhati, dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno muhuttaṃ sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti. Atha samassāsitakāyo vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyabhāge lokaṃ voloketi. Tatiyabhāge yaṃ gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā upanissāya viharati tattha mahājano purebhattaṃ dānaṃ datvā pacchābhattaṃ sunivattho supāruto gandhapupphādīni ādāya vihāre sannipatati. Tato bhagavā sampattaparisāya anurūpena pāṭihāriyena gantvā dhammasabhāyaṃ paññattavarabuddhāsane nisajja dhammaṃ deseti kālayuttaṃ samayayuttaṃ, atha kālaṃ viditvā parisaṃ uyyojeti, manussā bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkamanti. Idaṃ pacchābhattakiccaṃ.
他这样完成午后的日常事务后,如果想冲洗身体,就从佛座起身,走进浴室,用侍者准备好的水冲洗身体,让身体适应季节气候。侍者把佛座搬过来,安放在香室的走廊里。世尊穿上染成上妙颜色的布衣,系好腰带,把上衣偏袒右肩,走到那里坐下,独自在禅坐中静默片刻。这时,比丘们从各处前来亲近世尊。其中有些人来提问,有些人来请求禅修业处,有些人来请求听法。世尊满足他们的心愿,就这样度过初夜分。这就是初夜分所做的事。巴利
So evaṃ niṭṭhitapacchābhattakicco sace gattāni osiñcitukāmo hoti, buddhāsanā vuṭṭhāya nhānakoṭṭhakaṃ pavisitvā upaṭṭhākena paṭiyāditaudakena gattāni utuṃ gaṇhāpeti. Upaṭṭhākopi buddhāsanaṃ ānetvā gandhakuṭipariveṇe paññapeti. Bhagavā surattadupaṭṭaṃ nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā uttarāsaṅgaṃ ekaṃsaṃ karitvā tattha gantvā nisīdati ekakova muhuttaṃ paṭisallīno, atha bhikkhū tato tato āgamma bhagavato upaṭṭhānaṃ āgacchanti. Tattha ekacce pañhaṃ pucchanti, ekacce kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ekacce dhammassavanaṃ yācanti. Bhagavā tesaṃ adhippāyaṃ sampādento purimayāmaṃ vītināmeti. Idaṃ purimayāmakiccaṃ.
初夜分的事结束后,比丘们向世尊顶礼,各自离去。这时,整个一万个世界里的天神们得到机会,来到世尊面前提问,有些问题短到只有四个音节。世尊为这些天神一一解答,就这样度过了中夜分。这就是中夜分所做的事。巴利
Purimayāmakiccapariyosāne pana bhikkhūsu bhagavantaṃ vanditvā pakkantesu sakaladasasahassilokadhātudevatāyo okāsaṃ labhamānā bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañhaṃ pucchanti, yathābhisaṅkhataṃ antamaso caturakkharampi. Bhagavā tāsaṃ devatānaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjento majjhimayāmaṃ vītināmeti. Idaṃ majjhimayāmakiccaṃ.
后夜分则分成三段。从食前开始就一直坐着,身体被久坐逼得疲惫,为了解除这种疲劳,他用经行度过第一段。第二段,他进入香室,右胁而卧,保持正念正知,作狮子卧。第三段,他起身端坐,以佛眼观察世间,为了看到那些在过去诸佛面前曾行布施、持戒等功德的人。这就是后夜分所行的事。巴利
Pacchimayāmaṃ pana tayo koṭṭhāse katvā purebhattato paṭṭhāya nisajjāya pīḷitassa sarīrassa kilāsubhāvamocanatthaṃ ekaṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ caṅkamena vītināmeti. Dutiyakoṭṭhāse gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā dakkhiṇena passena sato sampajāno sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti. Tatiyakoṭṭhāse paccuṭṭhāya nisīditvā purimabuddhānaṃ santike dānasīlādivasena katādhikārapuggaladassanatthaṃ buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ voloketi. Idaṃ pacchimayāmakiccaṃ.
就在那一天,世尊在王舍城办完食前该做的事,吃过饭以后就上路了。初夜时,他为比丘们讲说业处;中夜时,解答诸天提出的问题;后夜时,他登上经行道经行。经行的时候,他听到五百位比丘正在谈论与一切知智有关的话题,就以一切知智亲自了知了这件事。因此才说:他在做后夜分该做的事时,了知了这件事。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana divase bhagavā purebhattakiccaṃ rājagahe pariyosāpetvā pacchābhatte maggaṃ āgato, purimayāme bhikkhūnaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathetvā, majjhimayāme devatānaṃ pañhaṃ vissajjetvā, pacchimayāme caṅkamaṃ āruyha caṅkamamāno pañcannaṃ bhikkhusatānaṃ imaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbha pavattaṃ kathaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇeneva sutvā aññāsīti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘pacchimayāmakiccaṃ karonto aññāsī’’ti.
他明白之后,心里又这样想:这些比丘是围绕我的一切知智在赞叹功德,而一切知智的作用对他们并不清楚,只有我才清楚。可是等我走了以后,他们就会不停地谈论这件事。那我就以此为因缘,为他们分别开演三种戒,在六十二处发出不可退转的狮子吼,把缘起理则贯通起来,让佛陀的功德清楚显现——就像举起须弥山,又像用金山峰撞击虚空,震动一万个世界,以阿罗汉果为顶点,把《梵网经》讲完。这样,即使我般涅槃之后,我的这次开示也能在五千年间,引导众生达到不死的大涅槃。这样想完之后,他就朝圆堂走去。由何处,是指从哪个方向、哪个地方去,那是他应当去的地方。或者这里的由何处是处格用法,意思是那个圆堂在什么地方,他就去到那里。这就是这里的含义。巴利
Ñatvā ca panassa etadahosi – ‘‘ime bhikkhū mayhaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbha guṇaṃ kathenti, etesañca sabbaññutaññāṇakiccaṃ na pākaṭaṃ, mayhameva pākaṭaṃ. Mayi pana gate ete attano kathaṃ nirantaraṃ ārocessanti, tato nesaṃ ahaṃ taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā tividhaṃ sīlaṃ vibhajanto, dvāsaṭṭhiyā ṭhānesu appaṭivattiyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadanto, paccayākāraṃ samodhānetvā buddhaguṇe pākaṭe katvā, sineruṃ ukkhipento viya suvaṇṇakūṭena nabhaṃ paharanto viya ca dasasahassilokadhātukampanaṃ brahmajālasuttantaṃ arahattanikūṭena niṭṭhāpento desessāmi, sā me desanā parinibbutassāpi pañcavassasahassāni sattānaṃ amatamahānibbānaṃ sampāpikā bhavissatī’’ti. Evaṃ cintetvā yena maṇḍalamāḷo tenupasaṅkamīti . Yenāti yena disābhāgena, so upasaṅkamitabbo. Bhummatthe vā etaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, yasmiṃ padese so maṇḍalamāḷo, tattha gatoti ayamettha attho.
在铺设好的座位上坐下:据说佛陀在世的时候,无论哪位比丘住在哪里,哪怕只有一位比丘,那里也一定铺设有佛陀的座位。为什么呢?因为世尊对于那些从自己身边领受了禅修业处、到舒适的地方安住的人,会这样作意:某某从我这里领了业处回去,他能不能证得殊胜的成就呢?然后他看到那个人放下业处,在想着不善的念头,于是心想:像这样在我这样的导师身边领了业处而住的人,竟然被不善的念头压倒,要在无始的轮回之苦中流转!为了帮助他,世尊就亲自出现在那里,教导那位善男子之后,腾空飞起,又回到自己住的地方。那些比丘受到这样的教导后就想:导师知道我们的心意,所以前来,在我们面前现身。在那个时候,如果还要找座位说“尊者,请坐这里,请坐这里”,那就成了负担。所以比丘们总是先把座位铺好才安住。有凳子的人就把凳子摆好,没有凳子的人就把床板、木板、木块、石头或者一堆沙子铺好。如果连这些也找不到,就把枯叶收集起来,在上面铺上粪扫衣,安置好。而在这里,只有国王的坐具,比丘们把它拍打干净、铺设妥当后,围绕在世尊身边坐下,赞叹世尊的功德。针对这个情形,才说“在铺设好的座位上坐下”。巴利
Paññatte āsane nisīdīti buddhakāle kira yattha yattha ekopi bhikkhu viharati sabbattha buddhāsanaṃ paññattameva hoti. Kasmā? Bhagavā kira attano santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā phāsukaṭṭhāne viharante manasi karoti – ‘‘asuko mayhaṃ santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā gato, sakkhissati nu kho visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ no vā’’ti. Atha naṃ passati kammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā akusalavitakkaṃ vitakkayamānaṃ, tato ‘‘kathañhi nāma mādisassa satthu santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā viharantaṃ imaṃ kulaputtaṃ akusalavitakkā abhibhavitvā anamatagge vaṭṭadukkhe saṃsāressantī’’ti tassa anuggahatthaṃ tattheva attānaṃ dassetvā taṃ kulaputtaṃ ovaditvā ākāsaṃ uppatitvā puna attano vasanaṭṭhānameva gacchati. Athevaṃ ovadiyamānā te bhikkhū cintayiṃsu – ‘‘satthā amhākaṃ manaṃ jānitvā āgantvā amhākaṃ samīpe ṭhitaṃyeva attānaṃ dasseti’’. Tasmiṃ khaṇe – ‘‘bhante, idha nisīdatha, idha nisīdathā’’ti āsanapariyesanaṃ nāma bhāroti. Te āsanaṃ paññapetvāva viharanti. Yassa pīṭhaṃ atthi, so taṃ paññapeti. Yassa natthi, so mañcaṃ vā phalakaṃ vā kaṭṭhaṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā vālukapuñjaṃ vā paññapeti. Taṃ alabhamānā purāṇapaṇṇānipi saṅkaḍḍhitvā tattha paṃsukūlaṃ pattharitvā ṭhapenti. Idha pana rañño nisīdanāsanameva atthi, taṃ papphoṭetvā paññapetvā parivāretvā te bhikkhū bhagavato adhimuttikañāṇamārabbha guṇaṃ thomayamānā nisīdiṃsu. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ – ‘‘paññatte āsane nisīdī’’ti.
世尊这样坐着,虽然心里明明知道,但为了引出话题,还是问比丘们。比丘们就把一切都告诉了他。因此经中说:“世尊坐下后”等等。其中,“kāya nuttha”的意思是:“你们是为了什么话题而聚坐在一起的呢?”也有读作“kāya nettha”的,意思是:“你们为什么在这里呢?”还有读作“kāya nottha”的,意思也和前面一样。巴利
Evaṃ nisinno pana jānantoyeva kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ bhikkhū pucchi. Te cassa sabbaṃ kathayiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘nisajja kho bhagavā’’tiādi. Tattha kāya nutthāti katamāya nu kathāya sannisinnā bhavathāti attho. Kāya netthātipi pāḷi, tassā katamāya nu etthāti attho kāya notthātipi pāḷi. Tassāpi purimoyeva attho.
“中断的话题”是指:在业处作意、教导、问难等事情中间,另外生起的某一种话题。“被打断的”是指:因为我的到来,话题没有完成,还没有达到顶点。这说明了什么?说明:“我不是为了打断你们的话题而来的,我是要以一切知智,把你们的话题圆满完成,使它达到顶点,才来的。”世尊就这样坐着,宣示了一切知智的邀请。另外,“尊者,我们这个中断的话题才被打断,世尊就来了”这句话,在这里也有这样的意思:“尊者,我们这关于世尊一切知智功德的话题还没有结束,不是王论之类的畜生论;就在这时世尊来了。请您现在为我们把它圆满完成并开示吧。”巴利
Antarākathāti , kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīnaṃ antarā aññā ekā kathā. Vippakatāti, mama āgamanapaccayā apariniṭṭhitā sikhaṃ appattā. Tena kiṃ dasseti? ‘‘Nāhaṃ tumhākaṃ kathābhaṅgatthaṃ āgato, ahaṃ pana sabbaññutāya tumhākaṃ kathaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā matthakappattaṃ katvā dassāmīti āgato’’ti nisajjeva sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāreti. Ayaṃ kho no, bhante, antarākathā vippakatā , atha bhagavā anuppattoti etthāpi ayamadhippāyo. Ayaṃ bhante amhākaṃ bhagavato sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbha guṇakathā vippakatā, na rājakathādikā tiracchānakathā, atha bhagavā anuppatto; taṃ no idāni niṭṭhāpetvā desethāti.
到这一步,阿难尊者所说的这个序言,是为了让人容易理解这部具足义理与文辞、能显示佛陀功德威力的经,它就像以下这些事物一样:为了让人轻松进入那座开满红莲青莲、水清味甘的池塘,而用纯净石板铺成、庄严美丽的宝石阶梯;为了让人轻松登上那座仿佛要触及星宿、高耸入云的华丽殿堂,而用象牙做成平滑柔软的踏板、又以金藤缠绕、宝石群光闪耀的阶梯;为了让人轻松走进那座回荡着金镯踝环碰撞声、夹杂着谈笑欢语、有家人往来其间、以广大威势与富饶庄严的大宅,而用金、银、宝石、珍珠、珊瑚等光辉照耀、稳固建立的宽阔大门。这个序言以时节、地点、说法者、事由、听众、教示来庄严,使这部经容易领悟。它的义注释到此结束。巴利
Ettāvatā ca yaṃ āyasmatā ānandena kamalakuvalayujjalavimalasādhurasasalilāya pokkharaṇiyā sukhāvataraṇatthaṃ nimmalasilātalaracanavilāsasobhitaratanasopānaṃ, vippakiṇṇamuttātalasadisavālukākiṇṇapaṇḍarabhūmibhāgaṃ titthaṃ viya suvibhattabhittivicitravedikāparikkhittassa nakkhattapathaṃ phusitukāmatāya viya, vijambhitasamussayassa pāsādavarassa sukhārohaṇatthaṃ dantamayasaṇhamuduphalakakañcanalatāvinaddhamaṇigaṇappabhāsamudayujjalasobhaṃ sopānaṃ viya, suvaṇṇavalayanūpurādisaṅghaṭṭanasaddasammissitakathitahasitamadhurassaragehajanavicaritassa uḷārissarivibhavasobhitassa mahāgharassa sukhappavesanatthaṃ suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttapavāḷādijutivissaravijjotitasuppatiṭṭhitavisāladvārabāhaṃ mahādvāraṃ viya ca atthabyañjanasampannassa buddhaguṇānubhāvasaṃsūcakassa imassa suttassa sukhāvagahaṇatthaṃ kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitaṃ, tassatthavaṇṇanā samattāti.
5 现在到了给世尊所安立的这部经作注释的时候了。这部经是世尊以“诸比丘,如果有人诽谤我……”这样的方式开示的。而这就是对这部经的注释。因为要先审察经的安立方式再来讲说,注释才会清楚明白,所以我们先来审察经的安立方式。经的安立方式有四种:依自己的意愿、依他人的意愿、随问而答、依事缘而生起。巴利
5. Idāni – ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādinā nayena bhagavatā nikkhittassa suttassa vaṇṇanāya okāso anuppatto. Sā panesā suttavaṇṇanā. Yasmā suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā suttanikkhepaṃ tāva vicārayissāma. Cattāro hi suttanikkhepā – attajjhāsayo, parajjhāsayo, pucchāvasiko, aṭṭhuppattikoti.
其中,有些经是世尊没有受人请求,纯粹出于自己的意愿而说的。比如《希望经》《衣经》《大念处经》《大六处分别经》《圣种经》《正勤经摄颂》,以及《神足、根、力、觉支、道支经摄颂》等。这些经的安立方式,就是依自己的意愿。巴利
Tattha yāni suttāni bhagavā parehi anajjhiṭṭho kevalaṃ attano ajjhāsayeneva kathesi; seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasuttaṃ, vatthasuttaṃ, mahāsatipaṭṭhānaṃ, mahāsaḷāyatanavibhaṅgasuttaṃ, ariyavaṃsasuttaṃ, sammappadhānasuttantahārako, iddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgasuttantahārakoti evamādīni; tesaṃ attajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
还有一些经,是世尊观察到别人的根性、意愿、倾向和领悟能力之后,顺着对方的意愿而说的。比如他观察到:“罗睺罗的解脱资粮已经成熟,我现在应当进一步教导罗睺罗,让他灭尽诸漏。”于是说了《小罗睺罗教诫经》《大罗睺罗教诫经》《转法轮经》《界分别经》等。这些经的安立方式,就是依他人的意愿。巴利
Yāni pana ‘‘paripakkā kho rāhulassa vimuttiparipācaniyā dhammā; yaṃnūnāhaṃ rāhulaṃ uttariṃ āsavānaṃ khaye vineyya’’nti; (saṃ. ni. 4.121) evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ khantiṃ manaṃ abhinīhāraṃ bujjhanabhāvañca avekkhitvā parajjhāsayavasena kathitāni; seyyathidaṃ, cūḷarāhulovādasuttaṃ, mahārāhulovādasuttaṃ, dhammacakkappavattanaṃ, dhātuvibhaṅgasuttanti evamādīni; tesaṃ parajjhāsayo nikkhepo.
四众、四种姓,以及龙、金翅鸟、干闼婆、阿修罗、夜叉、四大王天、三十三天等诸天和大梵天等,来到世尊面前,这样问道:“尊者,人们说的‘觉支、觉支’是指什么?”“尊者,人们说的‘盖、盖’是指什么?”“尊者,这些就是五取蕴吗?”或者以“世间什么才是人最上等的财富?”这样的方式提问。世尊针对这些提问所开示的《觉支相应》等经,以及《天相应》《魔相应》《梵相应》《帝释所问》《小吠陀罗》《大吠陀罗》《沙门果经》《旷野夜叉经》《针毛夜叉经》《佉罗夜叉经》等经,这些经的安立方式是随问而答。巴利
Bhagavantaṃ pana upasaṅkamitvā catasso parisā, cattāro vaṇṇā, nāgā, supaṇṇā, gandhabbā, asurā, yakkhā, mahārājāno, tāvatiṃsādayo devā, mahābrahmāti evamādayo – ‘‘bojjhaṅgā bojjhaṅgā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti. ‘‘Nīvaraṇā nīvaraṇā’’ti, bhante, vuccanti; ‘‘ime nu kho, bhante, pañcupādānakkhandhā’’. ‘‘Kiṃ sūdha vittaṃ purisassa seṭṭha’’ntiādinā nayena pañhaṃ pucchanti. Evaṃ puṭṭhena bhagavatā yāni kathitāni bojjhaṅgasaṃyuttādīni, yāni vā panaññānipi devatāsaṃyutta-mārasaṃyutta-brahmasaṃyutta-sakkapañha-cūḷavedalla-mahāvedalla-sāmaññaphala-āḷavaka-sūciloma-kharalomasuttādīni; tesaṃ pucchāvasiko nikkhepo.
不过,那些针对某件已发生的事而说的经,比如《法嗣经》《小狮子吼经》《月喻经》《子肉喻经》《大树干喻经》《火聚喻经》《泡沫团喻经》《珊瑚树喻经》等等,这些经的安立方式是依事而说。巴利
Yāni pana tāni uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭicca kathitāni, seyyathidaṃ – dhammadāyādaṃ, cūḷasīhanādaṃ, candūpamaṃ, puttamaṃsūpamaṃ, dārukkhandhūpamaṃ, aggikkhandhūpamaṃ, pheṇapiṇḍūpamaṃ, pāricchattakūpamanti evamādīni; tesaṃ aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo.
在这四种安立当中,这部经的安立属于依事而立的类型。世尊确实是依着某个事件才宣说了这部经。是依着哪个事件呢?是关于毁谤和称赞的事。有一位外道老师说了毁谤三宝的话,他的内弟子却说了称赞三宝的话。善于教导的世尊就以这毁谤和称赞的事件为因缘,开始了“诸比丘,如果有人毁谤我……”这段教导。其中,“我”(mamaṃ)是属格词,意思是“我的”;“或”(vā)表示选择;“他人”(pare)指怀有敌意的众生;“在其中”(tattha)指那些说毁谤话的人。巴利
Evametesu catūsu nikkhepesu imassa suttassa aṭṭhuppattiko nikkhepo. Aṭṭhuppattiyā hi idaṃ bhagavatā nikkhittaṃ. Katarāya aṭṭhuppattiyā? Vaṇṇāvaṇṇe. Ācariyo ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ abhāsi, antevāsī vaṇṇaṃ. Iti imaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā desanākusalo bhagavā – ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti desanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha mamanti , sāmivacanaṃ, mamāti attho. Vāsaddo vikappanattho. Pareti, paṭiviruddhā sattā. Tatrāti ye avaṇṇaṃ vadanti tesu.
“无嗔”等说法:那些比丘确实没有嗔恨,但为了阻止未来的善男子在类似情况下生起不善法,世尊仍然确立了法导。其中,伤害心的状态叫“嗔”,这是忿怒的别名。因此而不悦、不欣喜的状态叫“不悦”,这是忧的别名。既不能达成自己的利益,也不能达成他人的利益,叫“无成”,这也是忿怒的别名。这样一来,这里用两个词说明了行蕴,用一个词说明了受蕴,所以说了两个蕴;依这两个蕴,其余相应法的生起因缘也就被遮止了。巴利
Na āghātotiādīhi kiñcāpi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ āghātoyeva natthi, atha kho āyatiṃ kulaputtānaṃ īdisesupi ṭhānesu akusaluppattiṃ paṭisedhento dhammanettiṃ ṭhapeti. Tattha āhanati cittanti ‘āghāto’; kopassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Appatītā honti tena atuṭṭhā asomanassikāti appaccayo; domanassassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Neva attano na paresaṃ hitaṃ abhirādhayatīti anabhiraddhi; kopassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Evamettha dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandhoti dve khandhā vuttā. Tesaṃ vasena sesānampi sampayuttadhammānaṃ kāraṇaṃ paṭikkhittameva.
世尊先用第一种方式说明如何防止心里的嗔怒,接着又用第二种方式指出其中的过患,于是说道:“如果你们在那里生气或不满,那就会成为你们自己的障碍。”这里,“如果你们在那里”是说:面对那些说你们坏话的人,或者面对那种毁谤,如果你们心里变成那样——也就是如果你们真的那样了,就是这个意思。“生气”是出于忿怒,“不满”是出于忧恼。“那就会成为你们自己的障碍”是说:因为那份忿怒和那份不满,就会成为你们自己证得初禅等的障碍。巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamena nayena manopadosaṃ nivāretvā, dutiyena nayena tattha ādīnavaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā vā anattamanā vā, tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’’ti. Tattha ‘tatra ce tumhe assathā’ti tesu avaṇṇabhāsakesu, tasmiṃ vā avaṇṇe tumhe bhaveyyātha ce; yadi bhaveyyāthāti attho. ‘Kupitā’ kopena, anattamanā domanassena. ‘Tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyo’ti tumhākaṃyeva tena kopena, tāya ca anattamanatāya paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo bhaveyya.
这样,用第二种方式说明了过患之后,又用第三种方式说明:他们连言辞的含义都分辨不了,于是说:“你们难道能了知他人的……”等等。其中,“他人”指任何一些人。因为一个忿怒的人,对于佛陀、独觉佛、圣弟子、父母,乃至敌对者所说的善说或恶说,都了知不了其中的含义。正如所说的:巴利
Evaṃ dutiyena nayena ādīnavaṃ dassetvā, tatiyena nayena vacanatthasallakkhaṇamattepi asamatthataṃ dassento – ‘‘api nu tumhe paresa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha paresanti yesaṃ kesaṃ ci. Kupito hi neva buddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakānaṃ, na mātāpitūnaṃ, na paccatthikānaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitassa atthaṃ ājānāti. Yathāha –
愤怒的人不知道什么是有利的,愤怒的人看不见法。
那时,人一旦被愤怒压倒,眼前就是一片盲目的黑暗。
愤怒会带来损害,愤怒会搅乱内心。
恐惧从内心生起,人们却不知道。巴利
‘‘Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ kodho sahate naraṃ. Anatthajanano kodho, kodho cittappakopano; Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhatī’’ti. (a. ni. 7.64);
就这样,从各方面驳斥了针对毁谤所生的心嗔之后,现在为了说明应当怎么做,说了“对此,你们要把不实的当作不实的”等话。巴利
Evaṃ sabbathāpi avaṇṇe manopadosaṃ nisedhetvā idāni paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassento – ‘‘tatra tumhehi abhūtaṃ abhūtato’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“你们对那一点”指的是:对那种毁谤,你们要回应。“要把不实当作不实来清除”,意思是:凡是不真实的,就要按它根本不真实这一点把它去掉。怎么做呢?就是通过“这件事是不实的”这样的方式。这里的整体意思是:听到“你们的导师不是一切知者,法说得不好,僧团修行不好”这类话时,不应该沉默。而应该这样说:“你们所说的这件事是不实的,因为这个理由它是不实的,也因为那个理由它是虚假的;‘这些在我们身上没有’,‘这些在我们身上也找不到’。我们的导师确实是一切知者,法是善说的,僧团是善修的,对此有如此这般的理由。”这里应当知道,第二句是第一句的同义说法,第四句是第三句的同义说法。而且,这种驳斥只应该针对毁谤来做,并不是在任何情况下都要这样做。因为如果有人说“你戒行不好,你的老师戒行不好,你做了这个那个,你的老师做了这个那个”,你如果沉默忍受,就会让人起疑。所以,不应该生起嗔心,但要驳斥毁谤。至于有人用“你是骆驼,你是牛”等十种骂人的话来辱骂,那就应当不予理会,只在那里修忍耐。巴利
Tattha tatra tumhehīti, tasmiṃ avaṇṇe tumhehi. Abhūtaṃ abhūtato nibbeṭhetabbanti yaṃ abhūtaṃ, taṃ abhūtabhāveneva apanetabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Itipetaṃ abhūtantiādinā nayena. Tatrāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ satthā na sabbaññū, dhammo durakkhāto, saṅgho duppaṭipanno’’tiādīni sutvā na tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pana vattabbaṃ – ‘‘iti petaṃ abhūtaṃ, yaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, taṃ imināpi kāraṇena abhūtaṃ, imināpi kāraṇena atacchaṃ, ‘natthi cetaṃ amhesu’, ‘na ca panetaṃ amhesu saṃvijjati’, sabbaññūyeva amhākaṃ satthā, svākkhāto dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho, tatra idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti. Ettha ca dutiyaṃ padaṃ paṭhamassa, catutthañca tatiyassa vevacananti veditabbaṃ. Idañca avaṇṇeyeva nibbeṭhanaṃ kātabbaṃ, na sabbattha. Yadi hi ‘‘tvaṃ dussīlo, tavācariyo dussīlo, idañcidañca tayā kataṃ, tavācariyena kata’’nti vutte tuṇhībhūto adhivāseti, āsaṅkanīyo hoti. Tasmā manopadosaṃ akatvā avaṇṇo nibbeṭhetabbo. ‘‘Oṭṭhosi, goṇosī’’tiādinā pana nayena dasahi akkosavatthūhi akkosantaṃ puggalaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā adhivāsanakhantiyeva tattha kātabbā.
6 世尊先在不赞叹的场合显示了这样的特相,现在为了显示在赞叹的场合,说了“诸比丘,如果有人对我称赞……”等话。其中,“他人”指任何有净信的天与人。“欢喜”是因为以此而欢喜,所以叫欢喜,这是喜悦的同义词。“善意”的状态就是悦,这是心所乐的同义词。“踊跃”的状态就是踊跃性。是谁的踊跃性呢?是心的。这是会导致掉举、令心雀跃的喜悦的同义词。在这里,同样用两个词说明了行蕴,用一个词说明了受蕴。巴利
6. Evaṃ avaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ tādilakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā idāni vaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mamaṃ vā, bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādimāha. Tattha pareti ye keci pasannā devamanussā. Ānandanti etenāti ānando, pītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sumanassa bhāvo somanassaṃ, cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppilāvino bhāvo uppilāvitattaṃ. Kassa uppilāvitattanti? Cetasoti. Uddhaccāvahāya uppilāpanapītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Idhāpi dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandho vutto.
像这样,先用第一种方式挡住了心的雀跃,再用第二种方式指出其中的过患,于是说了“如果你们在那里……”等话。这里也应该这样理解:那种雀跃就是你们的障碍;意思是,由于那种雀跃,它就会成为你们获得初禅等的障碍。那么,世尊为什么这样说呢?难道世尊不曾——巴利
Evaṃ paṭhamanayena uppilāvitattaṃ nivāretvā, dutiyena tattha ādīnavaṃ dassento – ‘‘tatra ce tumhe assathā’’tiādimāha. Idhāpi tumhaṃ yevassa tena antarāyoti tena uppilāvitattena tumhākaṃyeva paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo bhaveyyāti attho veditabbo. Kasmā panetaṃ vuttaṃ? Nanu bhagavatā –
当人称赞“佛陀”时,身体里生起的那种喜;
那一种喜确实更殊胜,哪怕拿整个赡部洲的遍处(定境)来比也比不上。
当人称赞“法”的时候,身体里生起的那种喜;
这喜确实更殊胜,哪怕拿整个赡部洲来比也一样。
当人在称扬僧团时,身体里生起的那种喜;
这喜确实更殊胜,甚至胜过整个赡部洲。巴利
‘‘Buddhoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenāpi jambudīpassa. Dhammoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenāpi jambudīpassa. Saṅghoti kittayantassa, kāye bhavati yā pīti; Varameva hi sā pīti, kasiṇenāpi jambudīpassā’’ti ca.
比丘们,凡是净信佛陀的人,就是净信最殊胜者——像这样,在几百部经里,佛陀都只赞叹对三宝的喜与悦。这确实是赞叹,但那种喜与悦是依于出离的。而这里说的,是像具寿阐那那样,以“我们的佛陀、我们的法”这种方式生起的、依于在家生活的喜与悦。因为这种喜与悦会成为证得禅那等的障碍。也正因如此,具寿阐那在佛陀入般涅槃之前,一直没能证得殊胜的成就;直到佛陀入般涅槃时,他被制定的梵罚惩治,舍弃了那种喜与悦,才证得了殊胜。所以应当知道,这里是针对会成为障碍的那种喜与悦而说的。因为这是与贪相应的喜,而贪就像嗔一样。正如所说——巴利
‘‘Ye, bhikkhave, buddhe pasannā, agge te pasannā’’ti ca evamādīhi anekasatehi suttehi ratanattaye pītisomanassameva vaṇṇitanti. Saccaṃ vaṇṇitaṃ, taṃ pana nekkhammanissitaṃ. Idha – ‘‘amhākaṃ buddho, amhākaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā nayena āyasmato channassa uppannasadisaṃ gehassitaṃ pītisomanassaṃ adhippetaṃ. Idañhi jhānādipaṭilābhāya antarāyakaraṃ hoti. Tenevāyasmā channopi yāva buddho na parinibbāyi, tāva visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi, parinibbānakāle paññattena pana brahmadaṇḍena tajjito taṃ pītisomanassaṃ pahāya visesaṃ nibbattesi. Tasmā antarāyakaraṃyeva sandhāya idaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Ayañhi lobhasahagatā pīti. Lobho ca kodhasadisova. Yathāha –
被贪欲控制的人不知道什么是有益的,被贪欲控制的人看不见法。
贪欲一旦控制住人,那时就是一片盲目的黑暗。
贪欲会带来无益,贪欲会搅乱内心;
恐惧从内心生起,人们却不知道。巴利
‘‘Luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ lobho sahate naraṃ. Anatthajanano lobho, lobho cittappakopano; Bhayamantarato jātaṃ, taṃ jano nāvabujjhatī’’ti. (itivu. 88);
第三种情况在这里应当理解为:即使尚未发生,从意义上说也已经包含在内了。就像愤怒的人不了解真实意义一样,贪婪的人同样不了解真实意义。巴利
Tatiyavāro pana idha anāgatopi atthato āgato yevāti veditabbo. Yatheva hi kuddho, evaṃ luddhopi atthaṃ na jānātīti.
在说明应当怎样实践的这部分里,连接方式是这样的:听到“你们的导师是一切知者、阿拉汉、正自觉者,法是善说的,僧团是善行的”这类话之后,不应该保持沉默。而应该这样承认:“你们所说的这些确实是真实的,以这个理由也是真实的,以这个理由也是确实的。那位世尊,正是阿拉汉,正是正自觉者;法,确实是善说的,确实是现前自见的;僧团,确实是善行的,确实是正直而行的。”即使被问“你是持戒者吗?”,如果确实持戒,也应当承认“我是持戒者”。被问“你是初禅的获得者吗?……你是阿拉汉吗?”时,也只应在同类比丘面前承认。这样做,既避开了不善的欲望,也显示了教法并非空无实效。其余部分,应按照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
Paṭipajjitabbākāradassanavāre panāyaṃ yojanā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ satthā sabbaññū arahaṃ sammāsambuddho, dhammo svākkhāto, saṅgho suppaṭipanno’’tiādīni sutvā na tuṇhī bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ pana paṭijānitabbaṃ – ‘‘itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, yaṃ tumhehi vuttaṃ, taṃ imināpi kāraṇena bhūtaṃ, imināpi kāraṇena tacchaṃ. So hi bhagavā itipi arahaṃ, itipi sammāsambuddho; dhammo itipi svākkhāto, itipi sandiṭṭhiko ; saṅgho itipi suppaṭipanno, itipi ujuppaṭipanno’’ti. ‘‘Tvaṃ sīlavā’’ti pucchitenāpi sace sīlavā, ‘‘sīlavāhamasmī’’ti paṭijānitabbameva. ‘‘Tvaṃ paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhī…pe… arahā’’ti puṭṭhenāpi sabhāgānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃyeva paṭijānitabbaṃ. Evañhi pāpicchatā ceva parivajjitā hoti, sāsanassa ca amoghatā dīpitā hotīti. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
7 比丘们,这确实是微不足道的——这句话的连结是什么呢?这部经由两个方面组成:赞叹和非难。其中,非难就是“这是不真实的,这是不确实的”这种态度,它到了这里就像火碰到水边一样熄灭了,就此止住。而赞叹则应当如实承认它是真实的——“这是真实的”——这样赞叹才会继续下去。这种赞叹又有两种:一种是梵施所说的赞叹,另一种是比丘僧团以“贤友,真是稀有!”等方式所发起的赞叹。在这两种当中,比丘僧团所说的赞叹,后面在说明空性的时候会显示它的连结。而在这里,为了显示梵施所说的赞叹的连结,世尊开始了这段开示:“比丘们,这确实是微不足道的。”巴利
7.Appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhaveti ko anusandhi? Idaṃ suttaṃ dvīhi padehi ābaddhaṃ vaṇṇena ca avaṇṇena ca. Tattha avaṇṇo – ‘‘iti petaṃ abhūtaṃ iti petaṃ ataccha’’nti, ettheva udakantaṃ patvā aggiviya nivatto. Vaṇṇo pana bhūtaṃ bhūtato paṭijānitabbaṃ – ‘‘iti petaṃ bhūta’’nti evaṃ anuvattatiyeva. So pana duvidho brahmadattena bhāsitavaṇṇo ca bhikkhusaṅghena acchariyaṃ āvusotiādinā nayena āraddhavaṇṇo ca. Tesu bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇassa upari suññatāpakāsane anusandhiṃ dassessati. Idha pana brahmadattena vuttavaṇṇassa anusandhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave’’ti desanā āraddhā.
在这里,“微少”是“微小”的名称。“微些”是它的同义词。“量”称为尺度。某物的量微少,所以叫“微少”;某物的量更低微,所以叫“微些”。仅仅是戒本身,就是“唯戒而已”。这段话的意思是:“然而,比丘们,这是微少、微些、唯戒而已”——凡夫即使鼓起勇气想“我要赞叹如来的功德”,他所赞叹的功德,也只不过到这个程度而已。在这里或许有人会想:这戒难道不是修行者最上的庄严吗?正如古德所说:巴利
Tattha appamattakanti parittassa nāmaṃ. Oramattakanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Mattāti vuccati pamāṇaṃ. Appaṃ mattā etassāti appamattakaṃ. Oraṃ mattā etassāti oramattakaṃ. Sīlameva sīlamattakaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘appamattakaṃ kho, panetaṃ bhikkhave, oramattakaṃ sīlamattakaṃ’ nāma yena ‘‘tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadāmī’’ti ussāhaṃ katvāpi vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno puthujjano vadeyyāti. Tattha siyā – nanu idaṃ sīlaṃ nāma yogino aggavibhūsanaṃ? Yathāhu porāṇā –
戒是修行者的装饰,戒是修行者的打扮;
以戒德为庄严的修行者,达到了装饰中的至高境界。巴利
‘‘Sīlaṃ yogissa’laṅkāro, sīlaṃ yogissa maṇḍanaṃ; Sīlehi’laṅkato yogī, maṇḍane aggataṃ gato’’ti.
佛陀也在许多经典中,把戒律说成极其重要的事。就像他说的:比丘们,如果一位比丘希望同修们喜爱我、喜欢我、尊重我、敬重我,他就应当在戒律上圆满地实行。巴利
Bhagavatāpi ca anekesu suttasatesu sīlaṃ mahantameva katvā kathitaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ‘sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cā’ti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.65) ca.
就像母鸡护着蛋,就像牦牛护着尾巴;
就像疼爱亲生孩子,就像爱护唯一的眼睛。
同样地守护戒行,
你们要成为善巧可爱的人,始终怀有恭敬。
花的香气不逆风而行。
旃檀香、多揭罗香和茉莉花香,都不是这样的。
善人的香气能逆风飘送;
善士的香风遍吹一切方向。
栴檀、多伽罗,还有青莲和茉莉;
在这些香料当中,戒香才是最无上的。
这香是微细的,也就是多伽罗香和旃檀香;
而具戒者的香气,在诸天之中最为殊胜。
他们戒行圆满,安住于不放逸。
那些以正智解脱的人,魔罗找不到他们走过的路。
一个人站稳在戒上,有智慧,修习心与慧;
热诚又明察的比丘,他就能解开这个缠结。巴利
‘‘Kikīva aṇḍaṃ, camarīva vāladhiṃ; Piyaṃva puttaṃ, nayanaṃva ekakaṃ. Tatheva sīlaṃ, anurakkhamānā; Supesalā hotha, sadā sagāravā’’ti ca. ‘‘Na pupphagandho paṭivātameti; Na candanaṃ taggaramallikā vā. Satañca gandho paṭivātameti; Sabbā disā sappuriso pavāyati. Candanaṃ tagaraṃ vāpi, uppalaṃ atha vassikī; Etesaṃ gandhajātānaṃ, sīlagandho anuttaro. Appamatto ayaṃ gandho, yvāyaṃ tagaracandanaṃ; Yo ca sīlavataṃ gandho, vāti devesu uttamo. Tesaṃ sampannasīlānaṃ, appamādavihārinaṃ; Sammadaññā vimuttānaṃ, māro maggaṃ na vindatī’’ti ca. (dha. pa. 57); ‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāya naro sapañño, cittaṃ paññañca bhāvayaṃ; Ātāpī nipako bhikkhu, so imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭa’’nti ca. (saṃ. ni. 1.23);
比丘们,就像所有种子类和草木类,要生长、发育、壮大,全都依靠大地,立足在大地上;这些种子类和草木类才能生长、发育、壮大。同样地,比丘们,比丘依靠戒,立足在戒上,修习七觉支,反复修习七觉支,就能在诸法中达到生长、发育、壮大。
正如《相应部》5.150 中所说。应当看到,在许多其他经典中也有同样的例子。这样,在数百部经典中,戒都被说成是极其重要的。那么,为什么在这里把它说成是“微不足道”的呢?这是相对于更上位的功德来说的。因为戒达不到定,定达不到慧,所以相对于上位的功德,下位的就被称为“低下的”。
为什么说戒达不到定呢?世尊在成正觉后的第七年,在舍卫城城门外甘昙婆罗树下,坐在十二由旬的宝帐中、一由旬大的宝石座上,上方撑着三由旬的天白伞盖,在十二由旬的大众围绕中,为了显示自身的威德、摧破外道,而示现双神变——“从上半身出火聚,从下半身出水流……乃至从每一毛孔出火聚,从每一毛孔出水流,显现六种颜色……”等等。从他金色的身体,金色的光芒放射出去,一直到达有顶天;那景象就好像整个一万个世界都被庄严起来的时刻。第二道、第二道光芒,就像前一道、前一道那样,成双成对地,仿佛在同一刹那中涌现。巴利
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, ye keci bījagāmabhūtagāmā vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjanti, sabbe te pathaviṃ nissāya, pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya; evamete bījagāmabhūtagāmā vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ āpajjanti. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhu sīlaṃ nissāya sīle patiṭṭhāya sattabojjhaṅge bhāvento sattabojjhaṅge bahulīkaronto vuḍḍhiṃ virūḷhiṃ vepullaṃ pāpuṇāti dhammesū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.150) ca. Evaṃ aññānipi anekāni suttāni daṭṭhabbāni. Evamanekesu suttasatesu sīlaṃ mahantameva katvā kathitaṃ. Taṃ ‘‘kasmā imasmiṃ ṭhāne appamattaka’’nti āhāti? Upari guṇe upanidhāya. Sīlañhi samādhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, samādhi paññaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tasmā uparimaṃ upanidhāya heṭṭhimaṃ oramattakaṃ nāma hoti. Kathaṃ sīlaṃ samādhiṃ na pāpuṇāti? Bhagavā hi abhisambodhito sattame saṃvacchare sāvatthinagara – dvāre kaṇḍambarukkhamūle dvādasayojane ratanamaṇḍape yojanappamāṇe ratanapallaṅke nisīditvā tiyojanike dibbasetacchatte dhāriyamāne dvādasayojanāya parisāya attādānaparidīpanaṃ titthiyamaddanaṃ – ‘‘uparimakāyato aggikkhandho pavattati, heṭṭhimakāyato udakadhārā pavattati…pe… ekekalomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, ekekalomakūpato udakadhārā pavattati, channaṃ vaṇṇāna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dasseti. Tassa suvaṇṇavaṇṇasarīrato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo uggantvā yāva bhavaggā gacchanti, sakaladasasahassacakkavāḷassa alaṅkaraṇakālo viya hoti, dutiyā dutiyā rasmiyo purimāya purimāya yamakayamakā viya ekakkhaṇe viya pavattanti.
两个心不可能在同一刹那生起。但对诸佛世尊来说,因为他们的有分心停留得极为轻快,又通过五种方式反复熟练,那些光芒看起来就像在同一刹那一起出现。然而,每一道光芒的转向、遍作、决意等,其实都是各自分开的。巴利
Dvinnañca cittānaṃ ekakkhaṇe pavatti nāma natthi. Buddhānaṃ pana bhagavantānaṃ bhavaṅgaparivāsassa lahukatāya pañcahākārehi āciṇṇavasitāya ca, tā ekakkhaṇe viya pavattanti. Tassā tassā pana rasmiyā āvajjanaparikammādhiṭṭhānāni visuṃ visuṃyeva.
为了蓝光,世尊进入青遍处定;为了黄光,进入黄遍处定;为了红光和白光,进入红遍处定和白遍处定;为了火聚,进入火遍处定;为了水流,进入水遍处定。导师经行时,所化现的(身影)或站、或坐、或卧——这一切都应详细展开说明。在这里,连一丝戒的作用都没有,全部都是定的作用。就这样,戒到达不了定。巴利
Nīlarasmiatthāya hi bhagavā nīlakasiṇaṃ samāpajjati, pītarasmiatthāya pītakasiṇaṃ, lohitaodātarasmiatthāya lohitaodātakasiṇaṃ, aggikkhandhatthāya tejokasiṇaṃ, udakadhāratthāya āpokasiṇaṃ samāpajjati. Satthā caṅkamati, nimmito tiṭṭhati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappetīti sabbaṃ vitthāretabbaṃ. Ettha ekampi sīlassa kiccaṃ natthi, sabbaṃ samādhikiccameva. Evaṃ sīlaṃ samādhiṃ na pāpuṇāti.
世尊在百千劫再加四不可数劫那么长的时间里圆满诸波罗蜜,到二十九岁时,从如同转轮王福报所居的宫殿出离,在阿诺玛河边出家,六年精进修道。在毗舍佉月圆日,他接受了苏迦陀在乌汝韦喇村供养的、掺有天界食物的蜜粥。傍晚时分,他从南向北进入菩提道场,右绕阿说他树王三圈,站在东北方,铺好草座,结跏趺坐,以具足四支的慈心修习为先导,立下精进的决意,坐在十四肘高的殊胜跏趺座上,背靠五十肘高的菩提树干,就像安放在金台上的银柱一样;头顶上,菩提树枝如宝伞般遮护着他。金色的袈裟披在身上,珊瑚色的菩提新芽纷纷飘落。太阳落山时,他摧破魔军;初夜,忆念过去世;中夜,净化天眼;后夜,将智慧导入诸佛所惯行的缘起模式,生起入出息第四禅,再以此为依托,增长观慧,依照道的次第,以所证得的第四道断尽一切烦恼,通达一切佛陀功德。这就是慧的作用。如此,定达不到慧。巴利
Yaṃ pana bhagavā kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni pāramiyo pūretvā, ekūnatiṃsavassakāle cakkavattisirīnivāsabhūtā bhavanā nikkhamma anomānadītīre pabbajitvā, chabbassāni padhānayogaṃ katvā, visākhapuṇṇamāyaṃ uruvelagāme sujātāya dinnaṃ pakkhittadibbojaṃ madhupāyāsaṃ paribhuñjitvā, sāyanhasamaye dakkhiṇuttarena bodhimaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā assatthadumarājānaṃ tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā, pubbuttarabhāge ṭhito tiṇasanthāraṃ santharitvā, tisandhipallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā, caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā, vīriyādhiṭṭhānaṃ adhiṭṭhāya, cuddasahatthapallaṅkavaragato suvaṇṇapīṭhe ṭhapitaṃ rajatakkhandhaṃ viya paññāsahatthaṃ bodhikkhandhaṃ piṭṭhito katvā, upari maṇichattena viya bodhisākhāya dhāriyamāno, suvaṇṇavaṇṇe cīvare pavāḷasadisesu bodhiaṅkuresu patamānesu, sūriye atthaṃ upagacchante mārabalaṃ vidhamitvā, paṭhamayāme pubbenivāsaṃ anussaritvā, majjhimayāme dibbacakkhuṃ visodhetvā, paccūsakāle sabbabuddhānamāciṇṇe paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā, ānāpānacatutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā, tadeva pādakaṃ katvā vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā, maggapaṭipāṭiyā adhigatena catutthamaggena sabbakilese khepetvā sabbabuddhaguṇe paṭivijjhi, idamassa paññākiccaṃ. Evaṃ samādhi paññaṃ na pāpuṇāti.
在这里,就像手里的水比不上碗里的水,碗里的水比不上罐里的水,罐里的水比不上水瓶里的水,水瓶里的水比不上大缸里的水,大缸里的水比不上大瓮里的水,大瓮里的水比不上池塘里的水,池塘里的水比不上山涧里的水,山涧里的水比不上小溪里的水,小溪里的水比不上五大河里的水,五大河里的水比不上轮围海里的水,轮围海里的水比不上须弥山脚下大海里的水。跟碗里的水相比,手里的水是很少的……中略……跟须弥山脚下大海里的水相比,轮围海里的水也是很少的。就这样,越往上面,水越多;相比之下,越往下面,水就越少。巴利
Tattha yathā hatthe udakaṃ pātiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, pātiyaṃ udakaṃ ghaṭe udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, ghaṭe udakaṃ kolambe udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kolambe udakaṃ cāṭiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, cāṭiyaṃ udakaṃ mahākumbhiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, mahākumbhiyaṃ udakaṃ kusobbhe udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kusobbhe udakaṃ kandare udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kandare udakaṃ kunnadiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, kunnadiyaṃ udakaṃ pañcamahānadiyaṃ udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, pañcamahānadiyaṃ udakaṃ cakkavāḷamahāsamudde udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti, cakkavāḷamahāsamudde udakaṃ sinerupādake mahāsamudde udakaṃ na pāpuṇāti. Pātiyaṃ udakaṃ upanidhāya hatthe udakaṃ parittaṃ…pe… sinerupādakamahāsamudde udakaṃ upanidhāya cakkavāḷamahāsamudde udakaṃ parittaṃ. Iti uparūpari udakaṃ bahukaṃ upādāya heṭṭhā heṭṭhā udakaṃ parittaṃ hoti.
同样地,应当知道:以越来越上层的功德作为参照,越往下的戒就显得越微小、越微不足道。所以世尊说:比丘们,这确实是微小的、微不足道的、仅仅是一点点戒而已。巴利
Evameva upari upari guṇe upādāya heṭṭhā heṭṭhā sīlaṃ appamattakaṃ oramattakanti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, oramattakaṃ sīlamattaka’’nti.
在这里,关于“凡夫”一词——巴利
Yenaputhujjanoti, ettha –
佛陀,那位太阳的族亲,说过有两种凡夫。
有一种是盲目的凡夫,另一种是善的凡夫。巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti.
在这里,如果有人对蕴、界、处等没有学习、提问、听闻、记持和审察,这个人就是盲凡夫。如果有人具备这些,他就是善凡夫。而这两类凡夫——巴利
Tattha yassa khandhadhātuāyatanādīsu uggahaparipucchāsavanadhāraṇapaccavekkhaṇāni natthi, ayaṃ andhaputhujjano. Yassa tāni atthi, so kalyāṇaputhujjano. Duvidhopi panesa –
因为各种产生凡夫的原因,所以叫凡夫。
因为被包含在凡夫的范围内,所以称为“众人”。巴利
‘‘Puthūnaṃ jananādīhi, kāraṇehi puthujjano; Puthujjanantogadhattā, puthuvāyaṃ jano iti’’.
他确实是因为种种烦恼等法的生起等原因,才成为凡夫。正如所说的那样:巴利
So hi puthūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ jananādīhi kāraṇehi puthujjano. Yathāha –
他们产生种种烦恼,所以叫凡夫;他们有种种没有破除的有身见,所以叫凡夫;他们仰望着众多导师的面孔,所以叫凡夫;他们没有从一切趣中脱离出来,所以叫凡夫;他们造作种种不同的行,所以叫凡夫;他们被种种暴流冲走,被种种热恼烧灼,被种种炽热烤炙,所以叫凡夫;他们对五种欲乐贪染、贪求、系缚、迷醉、沉溺、执取、黏着、被障碍,所以叫凡夫;他们被五种盖覆盖、遮蔽、笼罩、封闭、掩盖、覆藏,所以叫凡夫。又因为他被包含在那些无法计数、背离圣法、行持卑劣法的众人之中,所以是凡夫;或者因为他作为众多的人,单独算作一类,不与具足戒、多闻等功德的圣者们共住、不相混杂,所以是凡夫。巴利
‘‘Puthu kilese janentīti puthujjanā, puthu avihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikāti puthujjanā, puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikāti puthujjanā, puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti puthujjanā, puthu nānābhisaṅkhāre abhisaṅkharontīti puthujjanā, puthu nānāoghehi vuyhanti, puthu santāpehi santappanti, puthu pariḷāhehi pariḍayhanti, puthu pañcasu kāmaguṇesu rattā giddhā gathitā mucchitā ajjhopannā laggā laggitā palibuddhāti puthujjanā, puthu pañcahi nīvaraṇehi āvutā nivutā ovutā pihitā paṭicchannā paṭikujjitāti puthujjanā’’ti. Puthūnaṃ gaṇanapathamatītānaṃ ariyadhammaparammukhānaṃ nīcadhammasamācārānaṃ janānaṃ antogadhattāpi puthujjano, puthuvāyaṃ visuṃyeva saṅkhyaṃ gato visaṃsaṭṭho sīlasutādiguṇayuttehi ariyehi janehīti puthujjanoti.
如来这个称呼,是因为八种原因,世尊才被称为如来。也就是:像那样而来,所以是如来;像那样而去,所以是如来;到达了真实相,所以是如来;如实彻证了真实法,所以是如来;有如实的见,所以是如来;有如实的说,所以是如来;有如实的行,所以是如来;以超越、降伏之义,所以是如来。巴利
Tathāgatassāti aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato. Tathā āgatoti tathāgato, tathā gatoti tathāgato, tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato, tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato, tathadassitāya tathāgato, tathavāditāya tathāgato, tathākāritāya tathāgato, abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgatoti.
世尊为什么是“如来”呢?因为他是“如此而来”的,所以叫如来。就像过去那些正自觉者,为了利益和安乐一切世间而精勤努力,他们是怎么来的——毗婆尸佛是这样来的,尸弃佛是这样来的,毗舍婆佛是这样来的,拘留孙佛是这样来的,拘那含佛是这样来的,迦叶佛是这样来的。这话说的是什么意思呢?就是说:那些世尊是以怎样的愿力而来的,我们的世尊也是以同样的愿力而来的。或者也可以说:就像毗婆尸佛……乃至……迦叶佛,他们圆满了布施波罗蜜、戒波罗蜜、出离波罗蜜、智慧波罗蜜、精进波罗蜜、忍耐波罗蜜、真实波罗蜜、决意波罗蜜、慈波罗蜜、舍波罗蜜——圆满了这十波罗蜜、十近波罗蜜、十最胜波罗蜜,一共三十种波罗蜜;又舍弃了五种大舍:舍弃肢体、舍弃眼目、舍弃财富、舍弃王国、舍弃儿女和妻子;圆满了前期的修行、前期的行持、说法、知义行、利益亲族行等等,到达佛行的顶点而来;我们的世尊也是这样而来的。或者也可以说:就像毗婆尸佛……乃至……迦叶佛,他们修习并充分开展四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五力、七觉支、八支圣道而来;我们的世尊也是这样而来的。就是像这样“如此而来”,所以叫如来。巴利
Kathaṃ bhagavā tathā āgatoti tathāgato? Yathā sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpannā purimakā sammāsambuddhā āgatā, yathā vipassī bhagavā āgato, yathā sikhī bhagavā, yathā vessabhū bhagavā, yathā kakusandho bhagavā, yathā koṇāgamano bhagavā, yathā kassapo bhagavā āgato . Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yena abhinīhārena ete bhagavanto āgatā, teneva amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā dānapāramiṃ pūretvā, sīlanekkhammapaññāvīriyakhantisaccaadhiṭṭhānamettāupekkhāpāramiṃ pūretvā, imā dasa pāramiyo, dasa upapāramiyo, dasa paramatthapāramiyoti samatiṃsapāramiyo pūretvā aṅgapariccāgaṃ, nayanadhanarajjaputtadārapariccāganti ime pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajitvā pubbayogapubbacariyadhammakkhānañātatthacariyādayo pūretvā buddhicariyāya koṭiṃ patvā āgato; tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… kassapo bhagavā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne, cattāro sammappadhāne, cattāro iddhipāde, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅge, ariyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgikaṃ maggaṃ bhāvetvā brūhetvā āgato, tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgato. Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
就像在这世间,毗婆尸等诸佛一样,
牟尼们来到这里,成就了一切知智。
同样,这位释迦牟尼也是这样来的,
因此,这位具眼者被称为如来。巴利
‘‘Yatheva lokamhi vipassiādayo, Sabbaññubhāvaṃ munayo idhāgatā; Tathā ayaṃ sakyamunīpi āgato, Tathāgato vuccati tena cakkhumā’’ti.
就这样,以“如实而来”的方式到来,所以称为如来。巴利
Evaṃ tathā āgatoti tathāgato.
怎样才是“如此而去故为如来”呢?像毗婆尸佛刚出生时那样去,……乃至像迦叶佛那样去。巴利
Kathaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato? Yathā sampatijāto vipassī bhagavā gato…pe… kassapo bhagavā gato.
那么,这位世尊是怎样去的呢?他刚一出生,就以双脚平稳地站在大地上,面朝北方,迈出七步。正如经中所说:“阿难,菩萨刚一出生,就以双脚平稳站立,面朝北方,迈出七步,白伞盖在头顶上方擎举着,他环视各方,说出如狮子般的话:‘我是世间最上者,我是世间最长者,我是世间最胜者,这是我最后一生,从此不再有来生。’”巴利
Kathañca so bhagavā gato ? So hi sampati jātova samehi pādehi pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhāya uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gato. Yathāha – ‘‘sampatijāto kho, ānanda, bodhisatto samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahitvā uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gacchati, setamhi chatte anudhāriyamāne sabbā ca disā anuviloketi, āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsati – ‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, ayamantimā jāti, natthidāni punabbhavo’ti’’ (dī. ni. 2.31).
他那一趟行走是真的吗?并非虚妄,因为它成了许多殊胜成就的前兆。因为他刚一出生,就以双脚平稳地站住了。这就是他将来获得四神足的前兆。巴利
Tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi? Avitathaṃ anekesaṃ visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena. Yañhi so sampatijātova samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahi. Idamassa caturiddhipādapaṭilābhassa pubbanimittaṃ.
而面朝北方,则是超越整个世间境界的前兆。巴利
Uttarābhimukhabhāvo pana sabbalokuttarabhāvassa pubbanimittaṃ.
走七步,是获得七觉支这一法宝的前兆。巴利
Sattapadavītihāro, sattabojjhaṅgaratanapaṭilābhassa.
金柄拂尘来回飘拂,在这里所说的拂尘挥动,是将来摧破一切外道的前兆。巴利
‘‘Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā’’ti, ettha vuttacāmarukkhepo pana sabbatitthiyanimmaddanassa.
手持白伞,是将来获得阿拉汉果解脱、那殊胜无染白伞的预兆。巴利
Setacchattadhāraṇaṃ, arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa.
站在第七步上环视四方,这是为了获得一切知无碍智的前兆。巴利
Sattamapadūpari ṭhatvā sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ, sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassa.
发出狮子吼般的宣说,是即将转动那不可逆转的殊胜法轮的前兆。巴利
Āsabhivācābhāsanaṃ appaṭivattiyavaradhammacakkappavattanassa pubbanimittaṃ.
同样地,这位世尊也是这样去的,而他那次前往是真实的、没有虚妄的,正是以它作为他们那些殊胜成就的前兆。巴利
Tathā ayaṃ bhagavāpi gato, tañcassa gamanaṃ tathaṃ ahosi, avitathaṃ, tesaṃyeva visesādhigamānaṃ pubbanimittabhāvena.
因此,古德们这样说:巴利
Tenāhu porāṇā –
就像牛王刚出生片刻那样,
他以平稳的双足触碰大地;
乔达摩迈出了七步。
天神们还举着一把白色的伞盖。
乔达摩走了七步,
他向四周环视,四面八方都看遍了。
他发出了具备八支的音声,
就像狮子站在山顶上。巴利
‘‘Muhuttajātova gavampatī yathā, Samehi pādehi phusī vasundharaṃ; So vikkamī satta padāni gotamo, Setañca chattaṃ anudhārayuṃ marū. Gantvāna so satta padāni gotamo, Disā vilokesi samā samantato; Aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giramabbhudīrayi, Sīho yathā pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito’’ti.
如来之所以称为如来,就是因为他这样地去了。巴利
Evaṃ tathā gatoti tathāgato.
或者,就像毗婆尸佛……乃至像迦叶佛那样,这位世尊也同样:以出离断除欲贪,以无嗔断除嗔恚,以光明想断除昏沉睡眠,以不散乱断除掉举恶作,以法的简择断除疑,以智慧破除无明,以喜悦消除不满,以初禅打开诸盖的门闩,以第二禅平息寻与伺,以第三禅去除喜,以第四禅断除乐与苦,以空无边处定超越色想、有对想和种种想,以识无边处定超越空无边处想,以无所有处定超越识无边处想,以非想非非想处定超越无所有处想,如此而去。巴利
Atha vā yathā vipassī bhagavā…pe… yathā kassapo bhagavā, ayampi bhagavā tatheva nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ pahāya gato , abyāpādena byāpādaṃ, ālokasaññāya thinamiddhaṃ, avikkhepena uddhaccakukkuccaṃ, dhammavavatthānena vicikicchaṃ pahāya ñāṇena avijjaṃ padāletvā, pāmojjena aratiṃ vinodetvā, paṭhamajjhānena nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā, dutiyajjhānena vitakkavicāraṃ vūpasametvā, tatiyajjhānena pītiṃ virājetvā, catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāya, ākāsānañcāyatanasamāpattiyā rūpasaññāpaṭighasaññānānattasaññāyo samatikkamitvā, viññāṇañcāyatanasamāpattiyā ākāsānañcāyatanasaññaṃ, ākiñcaññāyatanasamāpattiyā viññāṇañcāyatanasaññaṃ, nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā ākiñcaññāyatanasaññaṃ samatikkamitvā gato.
通过无常随观,断除了常想;通过苦随观,断除了乐想;通过无我随观,断除了我想;通过厌离随观,断除了欢喜贪着;通过离贪随观,断除了贪欲;通过灭随观,断除了集起;通过舍离随观,断除了执取;通过灭尽随观,断除了密集想;通过衰坏随观,断除了积聚;通过变易随观,断除了恒常想;通过无相随观,断除了相;通过无愿随观,断除了愿求;通过空随观,断除了执著;通过增上慧法观,断除了执取实有之执;通过如实智见,断除了愚痴执著;通过过患随观,断除了依恋执著;通过审察随观,断除了不审察;通过还灭随观,断除了结缚执著;以入流道粉碎了与邪见相应的烦恼,以一来道断除了粗重烦恼,以不来道根除了微细随眠,以阿拉汉道彻底斩断了一切烦恼而逝去。这样,也可以说他是如实而至,所以叫如来。巴利
Aniccānupassanāya niccasaññaṃ pahāya, dukkhānupassanāya sukhasaññaṃ, anattānupassanāya attasaññaṃ, nibbidānupassanāya nandiṃ, virāgānupassanāya rāgaṃ, nirodhānupassanāya samudayaṃ, paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānaṃ, khayānupassanāya ghanasaññaṃ, vayānupassanāya āyūhanaṃ, vipariṇāmānupassanāya dhuvasaññaṃ, animittānupassanāya nimittaṃ, appaṇihitānupassanāya paṇidhiṃ, suññatānupassanāya abhinivesaṃ, adhipaññādhammavipassanāya sārādānābhinivesaṃ, yathābhūtañāṇadassanena sammohābhinivesaṃ, ādīnavānupassanāya ālayābhinivesaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānupassanāya appaṭisaṅkhaṃ, vivaṭṭānupassanāya saṃyogābhinivesaṃ, sotāpattimaggena diṭṭhekaṭṭhe kilese bhañjitvā, sakadāgāmimaggena oḷārike kilese pahāya, anāgāmimaggena aṇusahagate kilese samugghāṭetvā, arahattamaggena sabbakilese samucchinditvā gato. Evampi tathā gatoti tathāgato.
“如来”是怎样如实契入真实之相的呢?地界的坚硬特性,是真实不虚的;水界的流动特性;火界的暖热特性;风界的支持特性;空界的无触对特性;识界的了知特性。巴利
Kathaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato?Pathavīdhātuyā kakkhaḷattalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Āpodhātuyā paggharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Tejodhātuyā uṇhattalakkhaṇaṃ. Vāyodhātuyā vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Ākāsadhātuyā asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇadhātuyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
色以变坏为特相。受以感受为特相。想以认知为特相。诸行以造作为特相。识以了知为特相。巴利
Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Saññāya sañjānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
寻的特相是把心投向所缘;伺的特相是反复审察;喜的特相是充满;乐的特相是愉悦;心一境性的特相是不散乱;触的特相是接触。巴利
Vitakkassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vicārassa anumajjanalakkhaṇaṃ pītiyā pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Sukhassa sātalakkhaṇaṃ. Cittekaggatāya avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信根的特相是决意。精进根的特相是策励。念根的特相是现前。定根的特相是不散乱。慧根的特相是了知。巴利
Saddhindriyassa adhimokkhalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyindriyassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Satindriyassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhindriyassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññindriyassa pajānanalakkhaṇaṃ.
信力的特相是不被无信动摇,精进力的特相是不被懈怠动摇,念力的特相是不被失念动摇,定力的特相是不被掉举动摇,慧力的特相是不被无明动摇。巴利
Saddhābalassa assaddhiye akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyabalassa kosajje, satibalassa muṭṭhassacce. Samādhibalassa uddhacce, paññābalassa avijjāya akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ.
念觉支的特征是现前安住。择法觉支的特征是简择。精进觉支的特征是策励。喜觉支的特征是遍满。轻安觉支的特征是寂止。定觉支的特征是不散乱。舍觉支的特征是省察。巴利
Satisambojjhaṅgassa upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa pavicayalakkhaṇaṃ. Vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgassa pharaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa vūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhisambojjhaṅgassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa paṭisaṅkhānalakkhaṇaṃ.
正见的特征是见。正思惟的特征是投向目标。正语的特征是摄持。正业的特征是生起。正命的特征是清净。正精进的特征是策励。正念的特征是现前安住。正定的特征是不散乱。巴利
Sammādiṭṭhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsaṅkappassa abhiniropanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvācāya pariggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammākammantassa samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāājīvassa vodānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāvāyāmassa paggahalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsatiyā upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammāsamādhissa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ.
无明的特征是不知道,行的特征是思愿,识的特征是了知,名的特征是倾向,色的特征是变坏,六处的特征是处,触的特征是接触,受的特征是感受,爱的特征是起因,取的特征是执取,有的特征是积聚,生的特征是出生,老的特征是衰老,死的特征是命终。巴利
Avijjāya aññāṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇaṃ. Viññāṇassa vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ. Nāmassa namanalakkhaṇaṃ. Rūpassa ruppanalakkhaṇaṃ. Saḷāyatanassa āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa phusanalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya vedayitalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ. Upādānassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Bhavassa āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Jātiyā nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ. Jarāya jīraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Maraṇassa cutilakkhaṇaṃ.
诸界的特相是空。诸处的特相是处。诸念处的特相是现前安住。诸正勤的特相是精勤努力。诸神足的特相是成就。诸根的特相是增上。诸力的特相是不可动摇。诸觉支的特相是出离。道的特相是因。巴利
Dhātūnaṃ suññatālakkhaṇaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ āyatanalakkhaṇaṃ. Satipaṭṭhānānaṃ upaṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Sammappadhānānaṃ padahanalakkhaṇaṃ. Iddhipādānaṃ ijjhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Indriyānaṃ adhipatilakkhaṇaṃ. Balānaṃ akampiyalakkhaṇaṃ. Bojjhaṅgānaṃ niyyānalakkhaṇaṃ. Maggassa hetulakkhaṇaṃ.
诸谛以真实为相。止以不散乱为相。观以随观为相。止观以一味为相。双运以不超越为相。巴利
Saccānaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ. Samathassa avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Vipassanāya anupassanālakkhaṇaṃ. Samathavipassanānaṃ ekarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Yuganaddhānaṃ anativattanalakkhaṇaṃ.
戒清净的特相是防护,心清净的特相是不散乱,见清净的特相是见。巴利
Sīlavisuddhiyā saṃvaralakkhaṇaṃ. Cittavisuddhiyā avikkhepalakkhaṇaṃ. Diṭṭhivisuddhiyā dassanalakkhaṇaṃ.
灭尽智的特征是彻底断除,无生智的特征是轻安。巴利
Khaye ñāṇassa samucchedanalakkhaṇaṃ. Anuppāde ñāṇassa passaddhilakkhaṇaṃ.
欲的根本特征是作为根。作意的特征是令其生起。触的特征是结合。受的特征是汇聚。定的特征是作为主导。念的特征是支配。慧的特征是更进一步。解脱的特征是精华……以不死为归宿的涅槃,其特征是终极,是真实不虚的。如此,以智的行进到达真实特征,没有偏离,已证得、已达成,所以称为如来。如此,因为到达了真实特征,所以称为如来。巴利
Chandassa mūlalakkhaṇaṃ. Manasikārassa samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇaṃ. Phassassa samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Vedanāya samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Samādhissa pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Satiyā ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññāya tatuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ. Vimuttiyā sāralakkhaṇaṃ… amatogadhassa nibbānassa pariyosānalakkhaṇaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ ñāṇagatiyā āgato avirajjhitvā patto anuppattoti tathāgato. Evaṃ tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti tathāgato.
为什么说如来是“如实彻证了真实法”呢?所谓真实法,就是指四圣谛。就像经里说的:“比丘们,有四种法是真实的、不虚妄的、不变异的。是哪四种呢?比丘们,‘这是苦’是真实的、不虚妄的、不变异的……”后面还有详细的展开。世尊已经彻底证悟了这些法,所以,因为彻证了这些真实法的缘故,就称为如来。这里“gata”这个词的意思就是“彻证”。巴利
Kathaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato? Tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccāni. Yathāha – ‘‘cattārimāni, bhikkhave, tathāni avitathāni anaññathāni. Katamāni cattāri? ‘Idaṃ dukkha’nti bhikkhave, tathametaṃ avitathametaṃ anaññathameta’’nti (saṃ. ni. 5.1090) vitthāro. Tāni ca bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmā tathānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Abhisambuddhattho hettha gatasaddo.
另外,老死以生为缘而生起、集起的道理是真实的、不虚妄、不变异的……诸行以无明为缘而生起、集起的道理是真实的、不虚妄、不变异的……同样地,无明是诸行的缘,诸行是识的缘……乃至生是老死的缘,这个道理也是真实的、不虚妄、不变异的。世尊已经完全证悟了这一切,正因为世尊完全证悟了这些真实法,所以被称为如来。也就是说,因为如实证悟了真实法,所以叫如来。巴利
Api ca jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe…, saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho…pe…, tathā avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho, saṅkhārānaṃ viññāṇassa paccayaṭṭho…pe…, jātiyā jarāmaraṇassa paccayaṭṭho tatho avitatho anaññatho. Taṃ sabbaṃ bhagavā abhisambuddho, tasmāpi tathānaṃ dhammānaṃ abhisambuddhattā tathāgatoti vuccati. Evaṃ tathadhamme yāthāvato abhisambuddhoti tathāgato.
如来为什么是“如实见者”呢?世尊对于有天神在内的世间……乃至有天神、人类在内的众生,在无量世界中、无量众生的眼门那里进入视野的色所缘,他全都以一切方式知道、看见。当他这样知道、看见时,对于那个色——无论按可爱、不可爱等分类,还是按在所见、所闻、所觉、所识中可得到的项目分类——依照“什么是色?什么是色处?就是依靠四大种而有的、有颜色有光显、可见、有对碍的色,青、黄……”这样的方式,用许多名称、十三种分类、五十二种方法加以分析,它都确实是那样,不是虚妄的。这个道理也适用于耳门等处在声音等进入视野时的情况。世尊也这样说过:“比丘们,凡是有天神在内的世间……乃至有天神、人类在内的众生所见的、所闻的、所觉的、所识的、所达到的、所寻求的、心中所游历的,我都知道。我已完全了知它,如来知道它,但如来不执著它。”如来就是这样成为“如实见者”的。在这里,应当知道“如来”这个词是从“如实见者”这个意思产生的。巴利
Kathaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato? Bhagavā yaṃ sadevake loke…pe…, sadevamanussāya pajāya aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ cakkhudvāre āpāthamāgacchantaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ sabbākārato jānāti passati. Evaṃ jānatā passatā ca, tena taṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasena vā diṭṭhasutamutaviññātesu labbhamānakapadavasena vā. ‘‘Katamaṃ taṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ? Yaṃ rūpaṃ catunnaṃ mahābhūtānaṃ upādāya vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītaka’’ntiādinā (dha. sa. 616) nayena anekehi nāmehi terasahi vārehi dvepaññāsāya nayehi vibhajjamānaṃ tathameva hoti, vitathaṃ natthi. Esa nayo sotadvārādīsupi āpāthaṃ āgacchantesu saddādīsu. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā – ‘‘yaṃ bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, tamahaṃ jānāmi. Tamahaṃ abbhaññāsiṃ, taṃ tathāgatassa viditaṃ, taṃ tathāgato na upaṭṭhāsī’’ti (a. ni. 4.24). Evaṃ tathadassitāya tathāgato. Tattha tathadassī atthe tathāgatoti padasambhavo veditabbo.
如来为什么是“如实语者”呢?从世尊坐在菩提道场那不可战胜的座位上,降伏了三魔,证得无上正等正觉的那一夜起,到他在双沙罗树之间,以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜为止,在这中间整整四十五年的时间里,世尊以最初正觉、中间正觉、最后正觉所说的一切——经、应颂……乃至方广——这一切在义理上和文句上都没有可指责的地方,不多不少,一切方面都圆满,能摧伏贪的醉、嗔的醉、痴的醉。这里面连一根毫毛尖那么小的偏差都没有,一切都像用同一枚印章盖出来的,用同一个量器量出来的,用同一杆秤称出来的一样,就是这样真实,不虚妄,不变异。所以经中说:“准陀,从如来证得无上正等正觉的那一夜起,到如来以无余涅槃界般涅槃的那一夜为止,在这中间如来所说的、所讲的、所开示的一切,全都是真实的,没有别的。因此称为‘如来’。”这里“gata”这个词的意思就是“说”。这样,由于如实语,所以是如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato? Yaṃ rattiṃ bhagavā bodhimaṇḍe aparājitapallaṅke nisinno tiṇṇaṃ mārānaṃ matthakaṃ madditvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho, yañca rattiṃ yamakasālānamantare anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi, etthantare pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇe kāle paṭhamabodhiyāpi majjhimabodhiyāpi pacchimabodhiyāpi yaṃ bhagavatā bhāsitaṃ – suttaṃ, geyyaṃ…pe… vedallaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ atthato ca byañjanato ca anupavajjaṃ, anūnamanadhikaṃ, sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ, rāgamadanimmadanaṃ, dosamohamadanimmadanaṃ. Natthi tattha vālaggamattampi avakkhalitaṃ, sabbaṃ taṃ ekamuddikāya lañchitaṃ viya, ekanāḷiyā mitaṃ viya, ekatulāya tulitaṃ viya ca, tathameva hoti avitathaṃ anaññathaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘yañca, cunda, rattiṃ tathāgato anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjhati, yañca rattiṃ anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyati, yaṃ etasmiṃ antare bhāsati lapati niddisati, sabbaṃ taṃ tatheva hoti, no aññathā. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Gadattho hettha gatasaddo. Evaṃ tathavāditāya tathāgato.
另外,āgadana 就是 āgada,意思是言语、言说。如来具有真实、不颠倒的言语,所以把 da 音变成 ta 音,就成了 tathāgata(如来)。应当这样理解这个词在这个意义上的成立方式。巴利
Api ca āgadanaṃ āgado, vacananti attho. Tayo aviparīto āgado assāti, da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti evametasmiṃ atthe padasiddhi veditabbā.
如来为什么是“如实行者”呢?因为世尊的身随顺于语,语也随顺于身,所以他说什么就做什么,做什么就说什么。他既然是这样的人,那么与语相应的身行也如语那样进行,这就是“如来”的意思。同样,与身相应的语行也如身那样进行,所以叫“如来”。正是因此经中说:“比丘们,如来是如语者、如行者,也是如行者、如语者。正因为如来是如语者、如行者,如行者、如语者,所以称为‘如来’。”这就是由“如实行”而称为如来。巴利
Kathaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato? Bhagavato hi vācāya kāyo anulometi, kāyassapi vācā, tasmā yathāvādī tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī ca hoti. Evaṃbhūtassa cassa yathāvācā, kāyopi tathā gato pavattoti attho. Yathā ca kāyo, vācāpi tathā gatā pavattāti tathāgato. Tenevāha – ‘‘yathāvādī, bhikkhave, tathāgato tathākārī, yathākārī tathāvādī . Iti yathāvādī tathākārī yathākārī tathāvādī. Tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23). Evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato.
如来怎么因为“征服”这一含义而称为如来呢?他把上面直到有顶天、下面直到无间地狱作为边界,横向遍及无量世界界,以戒、以定、以慧、以解脱、以解脱智见,征服一切众生,没有任何人能与他相等,也没有任何衡量的标准。他无可比拟、不可衡量、无有超越,是王中之王,是天中之天,胜过诸帝释,胜过诸梵天。因此经中说:“比丘们,在有天、魔、梵的世间……在有天与人的众生中,如来是征服者,不被征服,是一切处的见者,是自在主,所以称为‘如来’。”巴利
Kathaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato? Upari bhavaggaṃ heṭṭhā avīciṃ pariyantaṃ katvā tiriyaṃ aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu sabbasatte abhibhavati sīlenapi samādhināpi paññāyapi vimuttiyāpi, vimuttiñāṇadassanenapi na tassa tulā vā pamāṇaṃ vā atthi; atulo appameyyo anuttaro rājātirājā devadevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā. Tenāha – ‘‘sadevake, bhikkhave, loke…pe… sadevamanussāya pajāya tathāgato abhibhū anabhibhūto aññadatthudaso vasavattī, tasmā ‘tathāgato’ti vuccatī’’ti.
在这里,应当这样理解词义的成立:就像“神药”就是“神药”一样。那这个(词)又指什么呢?指的是说法的善巧方式以及福德的积聚。因为他依靠这个而具有大威力,像医师用天药对付毒蛇那样,能胜过一切外道以及包括天神在内的世间。因此,在胜过一切世间这件事上,真实而不颠倒地说,说法的善巧方式和福德的积聚就是“神药”。把 da 音变成 ta 音,就应当知道成为“如来”。这样,从“胜过”的含义来说,就是如来。巴利
Tatrevaṃ padasiddhi veditabbā. Agado viya agado. Ko panesa? Desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca. Tena hesa mahānubhāvo bhisakko dibbāgadena sappe viya sabbaparappavādino sadevakañca lokaṃ abhibhavati. Iti sabbālokābhibhavane tatho aviparīto desanāvilāsamayo ceva puññussayo ca agado assāti. Da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā tathāgatoti veditabbo. Evaṃ abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato.
另外,如来也可以从“这样去”来解释,也可以从“去往真实”来解释。“去”的意思是已经到达、已经超越、已经证得、已经修行。巴利
Api ca tathāya gatotipi tathāgato, tathaṃ gatotipi tathāgato. Gatoti avagato, atīto patto paṭipannoti attho.
在这里,他以遍知彻底了知整个世间,因此如实到达、完全通达,所以叫如来。他以舍断遍知断除世间的集起,因此如实到达、已经超越,所以叫如来。他以作证遍知现证世间的灭,因此如实到达、已经证得,所以叫如来。他如实到达、已经修行导向世间灭的道路,所以叫如来。因此,世尊这样说:巴利
Tattha sakalalokaṃ tīraṇapariññāya tathāya gato avagatoti tathāgato. Lokasamudayaṃ pahānapariññāya tathāya gato atītoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhaṃ sacchikiriyāya tathāya gato pattoti tathāgato. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadaṃ tathaṃ gato paṭipannoti tathāgato. Tena vuttaṃ bhagavatā –
比丘们,世间已经被如来彻底觉悟,如来已经脱离世间。比丘们,世间的集起已经被如来彻底觉悟,如来已经断除了世间的集起。比丘们,世间的灭尽已经被如来彻底觉悟,如来已经证得了世间的灭尽。比丘们,导向世间灭尽的道已经被如来彻底觉悟,如来已经修习了导向世间灭尽的道。比丘们,包括天神在内的整个世间……这一切,如来都已经彻底觉悟。因此,被称为如来。巴利
‘‘Loko, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto. Lokasamudayo, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokasamudayo tathāgatassa pahīno. Lokanirodho, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddho, lokanirodho tathāgatassa sacchikato. Lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā, bhikkhave, tathāgatena abhisambuddhā, lokanirodhagāminī paṭipadā tathāgatassa bhāvitā. Yaṃ bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa…pe… sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ. Tasmā, tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23).
这个意思也应该这样理解。而这也不过是说明如来之所以为如来的一个开头而已。如果要全面赞叹如来之所以为如来,只有如来自己才能做到。巴利
Tassapi evaṃ attho veditabbo. Idampi ca tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvadīpane mukhamattameva. Sabbākārena pana tathāgatova tathāgatassa tathāgatabhāvaṃ vaṇṇeyya.
“比丘们,那是哪一种呢?”——这里问的是:凡夫用那种微不足道、低等、仅仅属于戒律层面的东西来称赞如来时,说的到底是哪一种?在这里,提问一共有五种:未见而问、见后对照而问、断疑而问、征得同意而问、想说而问。巴利
Katamañca taṃ bhikkhaveti yena appamattakena oramattakena sīlamattakena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyya, taṃ katamanti pucchati? Tattha pucchā nāma adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā, diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā, vimaticchedanā pucchā, anumatipucchā, kathetukamyatā pucchāti pañcavidhā hoti.
在这里,什么是“未见而发问”?对于某个事物的特征,本来还不了解,没有见过、没有衡量过、没有审查过、不清楚、没有弄明白,为了知道它、看见它、衡量它、审查它、弄清楚它而提问,这就是“未见而发问”。巴利
Tattha katamā adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ aññātaṃ hoti, adiṭṭhaṃ atulitaṃ atīritaṃ avibhūtaṃ avibhāvitaṃ, tassa ñāṇāya dassanāya tulanāya tīraṇāya vibhāvanāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā.
什么样的提问算是“已见核对问”?对于自己本性上已经知道的相——已经见过、已经衡量过、已经审查过、已经明了、已经显明,为了和其他有智慧的人一起核对而提问,这就是“已见核对问”。巴利
Katamā diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā? Pakatiyā lakkhaṇaṃ ñātaṃ hoti, diṭṭhaṃ tulitaṃ tīritaṃ vibhūtaṃ vibhāvitaṃ, tassa aññehi paṇḍitehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati, ayaṃ diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchā.
什么是断除疑惑的提问?一个人本性上就处在疑惑的状态里,陷入犹豫,心生两难:“是这样吗?不是这样吗?到底是什么?究竟是怎么回事?”为了断除这些疑惑,他提出问题。这就是断除疑惑的提问。巴利
Katamā vimaticchedanā pucchā? Pakatiyā saṃsayapakkhando hoti, vimatipakkhando, dveḷhakajāto, ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho, kinnu kho, kathaṃ nu kho’’ti. So vimaticchedanatthāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ vimaticchedanā pucchā.
什么是征询同意而问?世尊征得比丘们同意后才提问,比如:“比丘们,你们怎么看?色是常还是无常?”“尊者,是无常。”“那无常的东西是苦还是乐?”“尊者,是苦。”(《大品》21)像这样的一整套问法都应当这样理解,这就是征询同意而问。巴利
Katamā anumatipucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ anumatiyā pañhaṃ pucchati – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti. Aniccaṃ, bhante. Yaṃ panāniccaṃ , dukkhaṃ vā taṃ sukhaṃ vāti? Dukkhaṃ bhanteti (mahāva. 21) sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ, ayaṃ anumatipucchā.
什么是“想说而问”?世尊出于自己想对比丘们宣说的意愿而提问。比如:“比丘们,有四种念处。是哪四种?”……“比丘们,有八支道。是哪八支?”这就是“想说而问”。巴利
Katamā kathetukamyatā pucchā? Bhagavā bhikkhūnaṃ kathetukamyatāya pañhaṃ pucchati. Cattārome, bhikkhave, satipaṭṭhānā. Katame cattāro?…Pe… aṭṭhime bhikkhave maggaṅgā. Katame aṭṭhāti, ayaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchā.
在这五种提问当中,由于如来对任何法都不存在“未见”的情况,所以没有“未见阐明问”。如来也绝不会生起这样的念头:“我应当和其他有智慧的沙门、婆罗门共同商讨之后再宣讲此法”,所以也没有“见已核对问”。又因为佛陀对哪怕一个法都没有渴爱与踌躇,一切疑惑都在菩提树下彻底断除,因此也没有“断疑问”。其余两种问,佛陀是有的,这里要说的就是“想说而问”。巴利
Iti imāsu pañcasu pucchāsu adiṭṭhassa tāva kassaci dhammassa abhāvato tathāgatassa adiṭṭhajotanā pucchā natthi. ‘‘Idaṃ nāma aññehi paṇḍitehi samaṇabrāhmaṇehi saddhiṃ saṃsanditvā desessāmī’’ti samannāhārasseva anuppajjanato diṭṭhasaṃsandanā pucchāpi natthi. Yasmā pana buddhānaṃ ekadhammepi āsappanā parisappanā natthi, bodhimaṇḍeyeva sabbā kaṅkhā chinnā; tasmā vimaticchedanā pucchāpi natthiyeva. Avasesā pana dve pucchā buddhānaṃ atthi, tāsu ayaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchā nāma.
8 现在,为了说明那个想说而问的问题,他接着说了“断除杀生”等话。巴利
8. Idāni taṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchāya pucchitamatthaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“杀生”就是对生命的杀害,也叫杀害生命、杀死生命。这里说的“生命”,从世俗习惯来说是指众生,从究竟意义来说是指命根。当一个人对那个生命有“这是生命”的认知,通过身体或语言这两种门径中的任何一种,生起以断绝命根为目的的加行所引发的杀心,这就是杀生。对于没有德行的生命,比如畜生等,杀小的生命罪过轻,杀大的身体罪过重。为什么?因为付出的加行大。即使加行程度相同,也因为对象身体大而罪过重。对于有德行的生命,比如人等,德行小的生命罪过轻,德行大的生命罪过重。如果身体大小和德行相当,那么烦恼轻微、加行柔和就罪过轻,烦恼猛烈、加行粗暴就罪过重,应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto, pāṇavadho, pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hoti. Pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ, tasmiṃ pana pāṇe pāṇasaññino jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā kāyavacīdvārānaṃ aññataradvārappavattā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. So guṇavirahitesu tiracchānagatādīsu pāṇesu khuddake pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāsarīre mahāsāvajjo, kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Payogasamattepi vatthumahantatāya. Guṇavantesu manussādīsu appaguṇe pāṇe appasāvajjo, mahāguṇe mahāsāvajjo. Sarīraguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānaṃ upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjo, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjoti veditabbo.
杀生具备五个条件:有生命、知道有生命、有杀心、有加行、由此而死。有六种加行手段:亲手、教令、投掷、设陷阱、咒术、神通。如果对这个义理详细展开,就会非常繁琐,所以我们不在这里详细说明,其他类似的地方也一样。有需要的人可以查阅《普端严律注》来了解详细内容。巴利
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – pāṇo, pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena maraṇanti . Cha payogā – sāhatthiko, āṇattiko, nissaggiyo, thāvaro, vijjāmayo, iddhimayoti. Imasmiṃ panatthe vitthāriyamāne ativiya papañco hoti, tasmā taṃ na vitthārayāma, aññañca evarūpaṃ. Atthikehi pana samantapāsādikaṃ vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ oloketvā gahetabbaṃ.
“断除”是指舍弃了这种被称为杀生思的恶戒。“已远离”是指从舍弃的那一刻开始,就已经从那种恶戒中退离、远离了。既然他连“我会违犯”的念头都没有,那么对于眼、耳所能识知的法尚且如此,更何况身体的行为呢?在其他类似的地方,也应依照同样的方式来理解其义理。巴利
Pahāyāti imaṃ pāṇātipātacetanāsaṅkhātaṃ dussīlyaṃ pajahitvā. Paṭiviratoti pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya tato dussīlyato orato viratova. Natthi tassa vītikkamissāmīti cakkhusotaviññeyyā dhammā pageva kāyikāti imināva nayena aññesupi evarūpesu padesu attho veditabbo.
“沙门”是世尊因为止息了罪恶而得到的称号。“乔达摩”是按姓氏来称呼的。不只是世尊远离杀生,比丘僧团也远离杀生。不过,开示从最初起就是这样传下来的,而在解释义理时,也可以依比丘僧团来说明。巴利
Samaṇoti bhagavā samitapāpatāya laddhavohāro. Gotamoti gottavasena. Na kevalañca bhagavāyeva pāṇātipātā paṭivirato, bhikkhusaṅghopi paṭivirato, desanā pana ādito paṭṭhāya evaṃ āgatā, atthaṃ pana dīpentena bhikkhusaṅghavasenāpi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭati.
“放下棍棒、放下刀杖”的意思是:不会为了伤害别人而拿起棍棒或刀杖,因此就是已经放下了棍棒、已经放下了刀杖。这里要知道,除了棍棒以外,其余一切会伤害众生的器具,都应当理解为“刀杖”。不过,比丘们拿着裁截用的棍子、齿木、剃刀或胡椒研磨器之类的东西走动时,并不是为了伤害别人。所以,他们仍然算得上是“放下棍棒、放下刀杖”。巴利
Nihitadaṇḍo nihitasatthoti parūpaghātatthāya daṇḍaṃ vā satthaṃ vā ādāya avattanato nikkhittadaṇḍo ceva nikkhittasattho cāti attho. Ettha ca ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇaṃ sattānaṃ viheṭhanabhāvato satthanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana bhikkhū kattaradaṇḍaṃ vā dantakaṭṭhaṃ vā vāsiṃ pipphalikaṃ vā gahetvā vicaranti, na taṃ parūpaghātatthāya. Tasmā nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho tveva saṅkhyaṃ gacchati.
有惭:具备以厌恶恶行为特征的惭。具悲悯:已生起悲悯与慈心。怜悯一切众生的利益:以利益怜悯一切众生。意思是,由于那种悲悯的状态,他对一切众生都怀有利益之心。住:即行动、生活、维持、保护。或者,诸比丘,也可以这样说。这里的“vā”(或)字,是参照后面“断除不与取”等语句,表示选择的意思。如此,在所有地方,都应参照前文或后文,理解为具有选择关系。巴利
Lajjīti pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāya lajjāya samannāgato. Dayāpannoti dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno. Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti; sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako. Tāya dayāpannatāya sabbesaṃ pāṇabhūtānaṃ hitacittakoti attho. Viharatīti iriyati yapeti yāpeti pāleti . Iti vā hi, bhikkhaveti evaṃ vā bhikkhave. Vā saddo upari ‘‘adinnādānaṃ pahāyā’’tiādīni apekkhitvā vikappattho vutto, evaṃ sabbattha purimaṃ vā pacchimaṃ vā apekkhitvā vikappabhāvo veditabbo.
这里先做一个简要说明。比丘们,凡夫称赞如来时,会这样说:“沙门乔达摩不杀生,不让人杀生,也不赞同杀生,他远离了这种恶戒。啊,佛陀的功德真是广大!”他即使怀着极大的热忱想要称赞,也只能说出一点点、很有限、仅仅属于行为戒律方面的内容。他没办法依据那些不共的功德来称赞。不只是凡夫,就连入流者、一来者、不来者、阿罗汉,甚至独觉佛,也都做不到;只有如来能做到,接下来我就为你们解说。这就是这里的意思和要点。从这里往后,我们只解释前面还没解释过的词句。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepo – bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno evaṃ vadeyya – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo pāṇaṃ na hanati, na ghāteti, na tattha samanuñño hoti, virato imasmā dussīlyā; aho, vata re buddhaguṇā mahantā’’ti, iti mahantaṃ ussāhaṃ katvā vaṇṇaṃ vattukāmopi appamattakaṃ oramattakaṃ ācārasīlamattakameva vakkhati. Upari asādhāraṇabhāvaṃ nissāya vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ na sakkhissati. Na kevalañca puthujjanova sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmiarahantopi paccekabuddhāpi na sakkontiyeva; tathāgatoyeva pana sakkoti, taṃ vo upari vakkhāmīti, ayamettha sādhippāyā atthavaṇṇanā. Ito paraṃ pana apubbapadameva vaṇṇayissāma.
“断除不与取”这句话里,“不与取”就是取走没有给予的东西,也就是占用他人的财物、偷盗、盗窃。这里说的“没有给予”,是指属于他人所有、他人可以随意使用、如果有人侵犯就应受惩罚且无法推脱的东西。对于这种他人所有之物,心里认定“这是他人所有的”,然后生起以偷盗方式去拿的念头,这种偷盗的思,就叫“不与取”。如果对象是低劣的他人财物,罪过就轻;如果对象是殊胜的财物,罪过就重。为什么?因为物品本身殊胜。当物品相同的时候,偷有德行者的东西,罪过就重;偷德行较浅者的东西,罪过就轻。巴利
Adinnādānaṃ pahāyāti ettha adinnassa ādānaṃ adinnādānaṃ, parasaṃharaṇaṃ, theyyaṃ, corikāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha adinnanti parapariggahitaṃ, yattha paro yathākāmakāritaṃ āpajjanto adaṇḍāraho anupavajjo ca hoti. Tasmiṃ parapariggahite parapariggahitasaññino, tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā theyyacetanā adinnādānaṃ. Taṃ hīne parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, paṇīte mahāsāvajjaṃ, kasmā? Vatthupaṇītatāya. Vatthusamatte sati guṇādhikānaṃ santake vatthusmiṃ mahāsāvajjaṃ . Taṃ taṃ guṇādhikaṃ upādāya tato tato hīnaguṇassa santake vatthusmiṃ appasāvajjaṃ.
这种不与取有五个构成条件:属于他人所有、知道是他人所有、有偷盗的心、采取了行动、依此而拿走。六种加行,就是亲手取等那些。而这些加行,则随着情况,按照偷取、强夺、暗中取、算计取、巧取这些不与取的方式而发生。这就是这里的简要说明。详细的解说则在《一切善见》中已经讲过。巴利
Tassa pañca sambhārā honti – parapariggahitaṃ, parapariggahitasaññitā, theyyacittaṃ, upakkamo, tena haraṇanti. Cha payogā – sāhatthikādayova. Te ca kho yathānurūpaṃ theyyāvahāro, pasayhāvahāro, paṭicchannāvahāro, parikappāvahāro, kusāvahāroti imesaṃ avahārānaṃ vasena pavattā, ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.
只拿别人给的东西,就是“取所施之物者”。心里也只想要别人给的东西,就是“期待所施之物者”。偷取,就是贼。没有偷盗,就是无贼。正因为没有偷盗,所以是清净的。以自身,就是指以自己的身心。意思是说,他安住于自身已经变得清净的状态。其余内容,应当依照第一条学处所说的方式套用理解。就像这里一样,其他地方也都如此。巴利
Dinnameva ādiyatīti dinnādāyī. Cittenapi dinnameva paṭikaṅkhatīti dinnapāṭikaṅkhī. Thenetīti theno. Na thenena athenena. Athenattāyeva sucibhūtena. Attanāti attabhāvena. Athenaṃ sucibhūtaṃ attānaṃ katvā viharatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sesaṃ paṭhamasikkhāpade vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ. Yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha.
非梵行,就是不是最殊胜的行为。行持梵天最殊胜之行的人,就叫梵行者。远离行者,就是远离非梵行的人。淫欲法:因为贪欲缠缚而彼此相似的众生,被称为行淫欲者;由于这是他们所从事的,所以这类不善法就被称为淫欲法。村法,就是村里人的法。巴利
Abrahmacariyanti aseṭṭhacariyaṃ. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāraṃ caratīti brahmacārī. Ārācārīti abrahmacariyato dūracārī. Methunāti rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasena sadisattā methunakāti laddhavohārehi paṭisevitabbato methunāti saṅkhyaṃ gatā asaddhammā. Gāmadhammāti gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammā.
9 “断除妄语”这一句里,“妄”指的是:以欺骗为先行心态,破坏他人利益的身业或语业;或者,怀着欺骗他人的意图,能引发欺骗他人的身业和语业的那个思,就叫妄语。巴利
9.Musāvādaṃ pahāyāti ettha musāti visaṃvādanapurekkhārassa atthabhañjanako vacīpayogo kāyapayogo, vā visaṃvādanādhippāyena panassa paravisaṃvādakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo.
还有一种解释:“妄”是指不真实、不正确的对象。“语”是把那对象当作真实、正确来告知。从特相上说,对于不真实的对象,想要让别人把它当作真实,由此生起那种告知的思,就是妄语。这个妄语所破坏的利益小,罪过就轻;所破坏的利益大,罪过就重。巴利
Aparo nayo, ‘musā’ti abhūtaṃ atacchaṃ vatthu. ‘Vādo’ti tassa bhūtato tacchato viññāpanaṃ. Lakkhaṇato pana atathaṃ vatthuṃ tathato paraṃ viññāpetukāmassa tathāviññattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā musāvādo. So yamatthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appatāya appasāvajjo, mahantatāya mahāsāvajjo.
不过,在家人因为不愿把自己的财物送人而说“没有”之类的话,按这种方式说妄语,过失比较轻;但如果作为证人,为了破坏别人的利益而说,过失就很重。出家人得到一点点油或酥油后,出于开玩笑的心态说“今天村里的油简直像河水一样流吧”,用这种夸张的说法来讲,过失比较轻;但要是把没看见的说成看见了,按这种方式说,过失就很重。巴利
Api ca gahaṭṭhānaṃ attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāya natthītiādinayappavatto appasāvajjo, sakkhinā hutvā atthabhañjanatthaṃ vutto mahāsāvajjo, pabbajitānaṃ appakampi telaṃ vā sappiṃ vā labhitvā hasādhippāyena – ‘‘ajja gāme telaṃ nadī maññe sandatī’’ti pūraṇakathānayena pavatto appasāvajjo, adiṭṭhaṃyeva pana diṭṭhantiādinā nayena vadantānaṃ mahāsāvajjo.
妄语有四个构成条件:事情不真实、有欺骗的心、为此付出努力、对方知道了这件事。实行方式只有一种,就是亲自去做。应当理解为:通过身体、身体所系之物或言语,做出欺骗对方的行为。如果通过这个行为,对方知道了那件事,那么在发动行为的思心所生起的那一刹那,就已经被妄语业所系缚了。巴利
Tassa cattāro sambhārā honti – atathaṃ vatthu, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti. Eko payogo sāhatthikova. So kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā vācāya vā paravisaṃvādanakiriyākaraṇena daṭṭhabbo. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānāti, ayaṃ kiriyasamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyeva musāvādakammunā bajjhati.
就像有人用身体、身体所系之物或言语去欺骗别人一样,指使别人说“你去对他说这个”,或者写好文书放在别人面前,或者在墙壁等处写上“这个意思应该这样理解”并留在那里,也是同样的道理。所以在这里,教令、留置、固定等方式的加行也都成立;不过,因为注释书里没有提到这些,所以要先考察之后再采纳。巴利
Yasmā pana yathā kāyakāyapaṭibaddhavācāhi paraṃ visaṃvādeti, tathā ‘‘idamassa bhaṇāhī’’ti āṇāpentopi paṇṇaṃ likhitvā purato nissajjantopi, ‘‘ayamattho evaṃ daṭṭhabbo’’ti kuḍḍādīsu likhitvā ṭhapentopi. Tasmā ettha āṇattikanissaggiyathāvarāpi payogā yujjanti, aṭṭhakathāsu pana anāgatattā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbā.
说真实语,所以叫“谛语者”。用真实与真实相连、相合,所以叫“谛连接者”。意思是:他中间不夹杂说妄语。如果有人有时说妄语、有时说真实,因为被妄语隔断,真实就不能与真实相接,所以这个人不是“谛连接者”。但这位比丘不是那样,即使为了活命也不说妄语,只用真实与真实相连,所以是“谛连接者”。巴利
Saccaṃ vadatīti saccavādī. Saccena saccaṃ sandahati ghaṭetīti saccasandho. Na antarantarā musā vadatīti attho. Yo hi puriso kadāci musā vadati, kadāci saccaṃ, tassa musāvādena antaritattā saccaṃ saccena na ghaṭīyati; tasmā so na saccasandho. Ayaṃ pana na tādiso, jīvitahetupi musā avatvā saccena saccaṃ sandahati yevāti saccasandho.
“坚定者”是指坚固、言语坚定的人。确实,有一种人说话不坚定:就像姜黄的颜色容易褪掉,像插在谷壳堆里的木桩,像放在马背上的葫芦;另一种人说话坚定,像刻在石头上的字,像城门柱一样,就算有人拿刀砍他的头,他也不会说两种话。这种人就叫作“坚定者”。巴利
Thetoti thiro thirakathoti attho. Eko hi puggalo haliddirāgo viya, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇu viya, assapiṭṭhe ṭhapitakumbhaṇḍamiva ca na thirakatho hoti, eko pāsāṇalekhā viya, indakhīlo viya ca thirakatho hoti, asinā sīsaṃ chindantepi dve kathā na katheti, ayaṃ vuccati theto.
“可信赖的”是指值得信任、值得相信,意思就是可以信得过。确实有这样一种人,他并不可信赖:当有人说“这话是谁说的?是某某说的”时,别人就会说“别信他的话”。而另一种人是可信赖的:当有人说“这话是谁说的?是某某说的”时,就会说“如果是他说的,那这本身就足以作为依据,现在根本不需要再进一步审查,事实就是这样”。这种人称为可信赖者。“不欺骗世间者”:意思是,凭着他所说真实语这一点,他不会欺骗世间。巴利
Paccayikoti pattiyāyitabbako, saddhāyitabbakoti attho. Ekacco hi puggalo na paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte ‘‘mā tassa vacanaṃ saddahathā’’ti vattabbataṃ āpajjati. Eko paccayiko hoti, ‘‘idaṃ kena vuttaṃ, asukenā’’ti vutte ‘‘yadi tena vuttaṃ, idameva pamāṇaṃ, idāni upaparikkhitabbaṃ natthi, evameva ida’’nti vattabbataṃ āpajjati, ayaṃ vuccati paccayiko. Avisaṃvādako lokassāti tāya saccavāditāya lokaṃ na visaṃvādetīti attho.
在“舍弃离间语”等教导中,所谓离间语,就是有人用某种话对某人说,使听者心里对自己产生好感,同时却对另一个人产生疏远、空落的感觉,这样的话就是离间语。巴利
Pisuṇaṃvācaṃ pahāyātiādīsu yāya vācāya yassa taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa hadaye attano piyabhāvaṃ, parassa ca suññabhāvaṃ karoti, sā pisuṇā vācā.
如果一个人用某种话把自己和别人都弄得粗鲁,或者这话本身就是粗鲁的,既不让耳朵舒服,也进不了人心,这就是粗恶语。巴利
Yāya pana attānampi parampi pharusaṃ karoti, yā vācā sayampi pharusā, neva kaṇṇasukhā na hadayaṅgamā, ayaṃ pharusā vācā.
用杂乱无意义的话来胡说,那就是绮语。巴利
Yena samphaṃ palapati niratthakaṃ, so samphappalāpo.
那些言语的根本——思,也被称为离间语等,而这里所指的正是那个思。巴利
Tesaṃ mūlabhūtā cetanāpi pisuṇavācādināmeva labhati, sā eva ca idhādhippetāti.
在这里,对于被污染的心,为了分裂他人,或者出于希望自己受人喜爱的愿望,由身业和语业所生起的思,就是离间语。它对谁造成分裂,如果那人德行微小,罪过就轻;如果德行广大,罪过就重。巴利
Tattha saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa paresaṃ vā bhedāya attano piyakamyatāya vā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pisuṇavācā. Sā yassa bhedaṃ karoti, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā.
离间语有四个组成部分:所要离间的对方;以“这样他们就会分裂、就会分离”为先导的离间心态,或者以“这样我就会被人喜爱、被人信任”为动机的讨好心态;与此相应的努力;以及对这件事的意义的了知。所谓“为了离间他们”,就是为了让前面所说的那些人,在听闻之后彼此分裂。巴利
Tassā cattāro sambhārā – bhinditabbo paro, ‘‘iti ime nānā bhavissanti, vinā bhavissantī’’ti bhedapurekkhāratā vā, ‘‘iti ahaṃ piyo bhavissāmi vissāsiko’’ti piyakamyatā vā, tajjo vāyāmo, tassa tadatthavijānananti. Imesaṃ bhedāyāti, yesaṃ itoti vuttānaṃ santike sutaṃ tesaṃ bhedāya.
对已经分裂的人,他去做和合者:比如两位朋友,或者同一位亲教师门下的同门等人,因为某种原因而分裂了,他就一个一个地走到他们那里,说:“像你们这样出生在这么好的人家、又这么博学多闻的人,这样做是不合适的”等等,然后去做让他们和合的事,并且一再推动这件事。“随附者”:就是随附和合、促成和合的人。看到两个人已经和合了,就说:“像你们这样出生在这么好的人家、具备这样的德行,这样做才合适”等等,也就是去做让他们关系更加牢固的事,这就是这里的意思。“以和合为乐住”:就是把和合当作自己安住的地方。意思是,在没有和合的地方,他连住都不愿意住。巴利原文也有“和合乐住”的写法,意思完全一样。“乐于和合”:就是喜欢和合,不愿意离开他们到别处去,这就是意思。“见到和合、听到和合就欢喜”:因此成为见和合而欢喜的人。“说和合的话”:凡是能让众生成就和合的话,他就只说那些体现和合功德的话,不说别的。巴利
Bhinnānaṃ vā sandhātāti dvinnaṃ mittānaṃ vā samānupajjhāyakādīnaṃ vā kenacideva kāraṇena bhinnānaṃ ekamekaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘tumhākaṃ īdise kule jātānaṃ evaṃ bahussutānaṃ idaṃ na yutta’’ntiādīni vatvā sandhānaṃ kattā anukattā. Anuppadātāti sandhānānuppadātā. Dve jane samagge disvā – ‘‘tumhākaṃ evarūpe kule jātānaṃ evarūpehi guṇehi samannāgatānaṃ anucchavikameta’’ntiādīni vatvā daḷhīkammaṃ kattāti attho. Samaggo ārāmo assāti samaggārāmo. Yattha samaggā natthi, tattha vasitumpi na icchatīti attho. Samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho. Samaggaratoti samaggesu rato, te pahāya aññattha gantumpi na icchatīti attho. Samagge disvāpi sutvāpi nandatīti samagganandī,samaggakaraṇiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti yā vācā satte samaggeyeva karoti , taṃ sāmaggiguṇaparidīpikameva vācaṃ bhāsati, na itaranti.
对他人的要害进行切割,由身业和语业所引发的、完全粗暴的思,就是粗恶语。为了说明这一点,有这样一个事例:据说有个男孩不听母亲的话,跑到森林里去。母亲拦不住他,就骂了一句:“愿一头凶暴的母水牛去追你!”结果,森林里真的出现了一头母水牛。男孩于是做了真实誓言:“愿我母亲嘴上说的话不要发生,愿她心里想的事发生。”那头母水牛就当场像被绑住一样停在那里不动。可见,即使行为看起来是在伤害要害,但因为心是柔软的,也不算粗恶语。父母有时会对孩子说:“愿强盗把你们剁成碎块!”可他们心里连一片青莲花瓣落在孩子身上都不愿意。戒师和老师们有时也会对依止自己的人说:“这些无惭无愧的人到处晃什么?把他们赶出去!”可心里却盼着他们获得教法和证悟的成就。就像心柔软时,粗鲁的话也不算粗恶语一样,言语柔和时,也不一定就不是粗恶语。比如有人想杀人,说“让他舒舒服服地躺着吧”,这句话因为心的粗暴,仍然是粗恶语。这种粗恶语,针对的对象功德小,罪过就小;功德大,罪过就大。它有三个构成条件:被辱骂的对象、忿怒的心、辱骂的话。巴利
Parassa mammacchedakakāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā ekantapharusacetanā pharusāvācā. Tassā āvibhāvatthamidaṃ vatthu – eko kira dārako mātuvacanaṃ anādiyitvā araññaṃ gacchati, taṃ mātā nivattetumasakkontī – ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti akkosi. Athassa tatheva araññe mahiṃsī uṭṭhāsi. Dārako ‘‘yaṃ mama mātā mukhena kathesi, taṃ mā hotu, yaṃ cittena cintesi taṃ hotū’’ti, saccakiriyamakāsi. Mahiṃsī tattheva baddhā viya aṭṭhāsi. Evaṃ mammacchedakopi payogo cittasaṇhatāya na pharusā vācā hoti. Mātāpitaro hi kadāci puttake evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘corā vo khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ karontū’’ti, uppalapattampi ca nesaṃ upari patantaṃ na icchanti. Ācariyupajjhāyā ca kadāci nissitake evaṃ vadanti – ‘‘kiṃ ime ahirīkā anottappino caranti, niddhamatha ne’’ti, atha ca nesaṃ āgamādhigamasampattiṃ icchanti. Yathā ca cittasaṇhatāya pharusā vācā na hoti, evaṃ vacanasaṇhatāya apharusā vācā na hoti. Na hi mārāpetukāmassa – ‘‘imaṃ sukhaṃ sayāpethā’’ti vacanaṃ apharusā vācā hoti, cittapharusatāya panesā pharusā vācāva. Sā yaṃ sandhāya pavattitā, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjā, mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjā. Tassā tayo sambhārā – akkositabbo paro, kupitacittaṃ, akkosanāti.
“无秽的”:ela 这个词指的是嗔恚。没有这种 ela,所以叫无秽(nelā),意思是没有过失。就像《优陀那》里“无秽支、白覆盖”所说的那个“无秽”一样。“耳悦的”:因为文辞甜美,让耳朵听着舒服,不会像针刺那样造成耳朵的刺痛。“可爱的”:因为意义甜美,不会让全身生起恼怒,反而能生起喜爱,所以叫可爱。“入心的”:能进入心脏,毫无阻碍、舒适地进入心。“都城语的”:因为功德圆满,属于都城所有,所以叫都城语;又因为像在都城里长大的女子那样柔和,所以也叫都城语。或者说,这是属于都城的,也就是都城居民的语言。都城居民说话确实很得体:他们把像父亲一样的人称为父亲,把像兄弟一样的人称为兄弟,把像母亲一样的人称为母亲。这样的语言被许许多多人所喜爱,所以叫“众所喜爱”;正因为如此被喜爱,对许多人来说是悦意的、能令心增长的,所以叫“众所悦意”。巴利
Nelāti elaṃ vuccati doso, nāssā elanti nelā, niddosāti attho. ‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo’’ti, (udā. 65) ettha vuttanelaṃ viya. Kaṇṇasukhāti byañjanamadhuratāya kaṇṇānaṃ sukhā, sūcivijjhanaṃ viya kaṇṇasūlaṃ na janeti. Atthamadhuratāya sakalasarīre kopaṃ ajanetvā pemaṃ janetīti pemanīyā. Hadayaṃ gacchati, appaṭihaññamānā sukhena cittaṃ pavisatīti hadayaṅgamā. Guṇaparipuṇṇatāya pure bhavāti porī pure saṃvaḍḍhanārī viya sukumārātipi porī. Purassa esātipi porī. Nagaravāsīnaṃ kathāti attho. Nagaravāsino hi yuttakathā honti. Pitimattaṃ pitāti vadanti, bhātimattaṃ bhātāti vadanti, mātimattaṃ mātāti vadanti. Evarūpī kathā bahuno janassa kantā hotīti bahujanakantā. Kantabhāveneva bahuno janassa manāpā cittavuḍḍhikarāti bahujanamanāpā.
绮语就是能表达无意义之事、能引发身业和语业的不善思。它因为串习得少,罪过就轻;因为串习得多,罪过就重。它有两种构成条件:一是以讲“婆罗多战争”“抢走悉多”等无意义的故事为先导;二是实际说出那样的话。巴利
Anatthaviññāpikā kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā akusalacetanā samphappalāpo. So āsevanamandatāya appasāvajjo, āsevanamahantatāya mahāsāvajjo, tassa dve sambhārā – bhāratayuddhasītāharaṇādiniratthakakathāpurekkhāratā, tathārūpī kathā kathanañca.
在合适的时间说话,所以叫“适时语者”;意思是,先看清什么话该在什么时候说,然后才说。说的都是真实、如实、不错乱、符合事物本来面目的话,所以叫“实语者”。只以现世利益和后世利益为出发点来说,所以叫“义利语者”。只依据九种出世间法来说,所以叫“法语者”;只依据律制以及律的断除来指导而说,所以叫“律语者”。巴利
Kālena vadatīti kālavādī vattabbayuttakālaṃ sallakkhetvā vadatīti attho. Bhūtaṃ tathaṃ tacchaṃ sabhāvameva vadatīti bhūtavādī. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthasannissitameva katvā vadatīti atthavādī. Navalokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti dhammavādī saṃvaravinayapahānavinayasannissitaṃ katvā vadatīti vinayavādī.
“存放处”指的是安放东西的地方。有这种存放处,就叫“有存放处的言语”,意思是说应当记在心里的那些话。“适时”是说:即使要说这样的话,也不会在不合适的时候说“我要说有分量的话”,而是看准恰当的时机才说。“有譬喻”就是带有比喻,也就是有理由的意思。“有边际”是说先划出范围,让人清楚它的界限,然后才这样说。“与义利相应”是说:用各种方式去分析也难以穷尽,所以话语具足圆满的义利;或者说,那位说义利之语的人,在说某个义利时,话语与那个义利相应,所以叫与义利相应之语——也就是说,不会丢掉一个意思又去说另一个意思。巴利
Nidhānaṃ vuccati ṭhapanokāso, nidhānamassā atthīti nidhānavatī. Hadaye nidhātabbayuttakaṃ vācaṃ bhāsitāti attho. Kālenāti evarūpiṃ bhāsamānopi ca – ‘‘ahaṃ nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsissāmī’’ti na akālena bhāsati, yuttakālaṃ pana apekkhitvāva bhāsatīti attho. Sāpadesanti saupamaṃ, sakāraṇanti attho. Pariyantavatinti paricchedaṃ dassetvā yathāssā paricchedo paññāyati, evaṃ bhāsatīti attho. Atthasaṃhitanti anekehipi nayehi vibhajantena pariyādātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya atthasampannaṃ bhāsati. Yaṃ vā so atthavādī atthaṃ vadati, tena atthena sahitattā atthasaṃhitaṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, na aññaṃ nikkhipitvā aññaṃ bhāsatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
10 破坏种子类和植物类,指的是对五种种子类——根种子、茎种子、节种子、芽种子、种子种子——以及任何青色草、树木等植物类,以砍、劈、煮等方式加以毁坏。它的意思是:远离这种毁坏行为。巴利
10.Bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhāti mūlabījaṃ khandhabījaṃ phaḷubījaṃ aggabījaṃ bījabījanti pañcavidhassa bījagāmassa ceva, yassa kassaci nīlatiṇarukkhādikassa bhūtagāmassa ca samārambhā, chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvena vikopanā paṭiviratoti attho.
“一食者”:早餐和晚餐这两种饭食当中,早餐是以正午为界限,另一种则是在正午之后到天亮之前。所以,即使有人在正午之前吃十次,也仍然算是一食者。这句话就是针对这种情况说的:“一食者”。巴利
Ekabhattikoti pātarāsabhattaṃ sāyamāsabhattanti dve bhattāni, tesu pātarāsabhattaṃ antomajjhanhikena paricchinnaṃ, itaraṃ majjhanhikato uddhaṃ anto aruṇena. Tasmā antomajjhanhike dasakkhattuṃ bhuñjamānopi ekabhattikova hoti. Taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘ekabhattiko’’ti.
夜间吃东西叫“夜食”,因为已经远离了夜食,所以叫“离夜食”。过了正午直到日落这段时间吃东西,就叫“非时食”。因为远离了非时食,所以叫“离非时食”。从什么时候开始远离的呢?从在阿诺玛河边出家那天起。巴利
Rattiyā bhojanaṃ ratti, tato uparatoti rattūparato. Atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāma. Tato viratattā virato vikālabhojanā. Kadā virato? Anomānadītīre pabbajitadivasato paṭṭhāya.
因为与教法不相应,所以那是像荆棘一样、已经变成障碍的观看,就叫“障碍见”。自己跳舞、让别人跳舞等,以及舞蹈、歌唱、奏乐,甚至孔雀舞等,这些舞蹈等类事情已经成了障碍,而观看它们,就叫“舞蹈、歌唱、奏乐等障碍见”。因为舞蹈等这些事情,不管自己去参与、让别人去参与,还是去看别人参与,对比丘和比丘尼来说都不合适。巴利
Sāsanassa ananulomattā visūkaṃ paṭāṇībhūtaṃ dassananti visūkadassanaṃ. Attanā naccananaccāpanādivasena naccā ca gītā ca vāditā ca antamaso mayūranaccādivasenapi pavattānaṃ naccādīnaṃ visūkabhūtā dassanā cāti naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā. Naccādīni hi attanā payojetuṃ vā parehi payojāpetuṃ vā payuttāni passituṃ vā neva bhikkhūnaṃ na bhikkhunīnañca vaṭṭanti.
在花鬘等物品当中,“花鬘”指的是任何一种花。“香”指的是任何一种香料。“涂香”指的是能让皮肤变好的东西。在这里,戴在身上叫“持”,补上不足的地方叫“庄严”,因为香气和肤色而享受它叫“装饰”。“处”说的是原因、理由。所以意思是:远离在家人出于下劣的思心而做戴花鬘等事情的那个原因。巴利
Mālādīsu mālāti yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhanti yaṃ kiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vilepananti chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Tattha piḷandhanto dhāreti nāma, ūnaṭṭhānaṃ pūrento maṇḍeti nāma, gandhavasena chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanto vibhūseti nāma. Ṭhānaṃ vuccati kāraṇaṃ. Tasmā yāya dussīlyacetanāya tāni mālādhāraṇādīni mahājano karoti, tato paṭiviratoti attho.
所谓“高床”,是指超过规定尺寸的床座;“大床”,是指不合法的铺陈之物。这句话的意思是:远离这些。巴利
Uccāsayanaṃ vuccati pamāṇātikkantaṃ. Mahāsayananti akappiyapaccattharaṇaṃ. Tato viratoti attho.
“生金”就是黄金。“银”是指钱币、铜钱、树胶钱、木钱等流通使用的东西。远离接受这两种东西,意思是:他自己既不拿,也不让别人拿,也不接受别人放在旁边的东西。巴利
Jātarūpanti suvaṇṇaṃ. Rajatanti kahāpaṇo, lohamāsako, jatumāsako, dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchanti. Tassa ubhayassāpi paṭiggahaṇā paṭivirato, neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatīti attho.
接受生谷,是指接受七种生谷:稻谷、小米、大麦、小麦、黍、稗子和䅟子。比丘不仅不能接受这些生谷,连碰都不能碰。接受生肉,在这里是指:除了个别开许的情况外,比丘不能接受生肉和生鱼,但碰一碰没关系。巴利
Āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇāti, sālivīhiyavagodhūmakaṅguvarakakudrūsakasaṅkhātassa sattavidhassāpi āmakadhaññassa paṭiggahaṇā. Na kevalañca etesaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva, āmasanampi bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Āmakamaṃsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha aññatra odissa anuññātā āmakamaṃsamacchānaṃ paṭiggahaṇameva bhikkhūnaṃ na vaṭṭati, no āmasanaṃ.
这里说“接受女人和少女”:“女人”是指已经和男人有过交往的女性,其他的就叫“少女”。对她们,不管是接受还是触碰,都是不合戒律的。巴利
Itthikumārikapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha itthīti purisantaragatā, itarā kumārikā nāma, tāsaṃ paṭiggahaṇampi āmasanampi akappiyameva.
说到接受奴婢,这里如果是以奴婢的身份来接受他们,那是不允许的。但如果有人说“我供养一位作净者,我供养一位寺男”,这样说则是允许的。巴利
Dāsidāsapaṭiggahaṇāti ettha dāsidāsavaseneva tesaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Kappiyakārakaṃ dammi, ārāmikaṃ dammī’’ti evaṃ vutte pana vaṭṭati.
关于羊等牲畜,乃至田地这类事情,哪些是允许的、哪些是不允许的,应该按照律藏来判断。其中,“田”是指种谷类等早熟作物的地方;“地”是指种豆类等晚熟作物的地方。如果某个地方两种都能种,那就算是田。为了这些田地而准备、但还没开垦的地块,就是地。这里以田和地作为代表,其实也已经把水池、池塘之类都包括在内了。巴利
Ajeḷakādīsu khettavatthupariyosānesu kappiyākappiyanayo vinayavasena upaparikkhitabbo. Tattha khettaṃ nāma yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Vatthu nāma yasmiṃ aparaṇṇaṃ ruhati. Yattha vā ubhayampi ruhati, taṃ khettaṃ. Tadatthāya akatabhūmibhāgo vatthu. Khettavatthusīsena cettha vāpitaḷākādīnipi saṅgahitāneva.
所谓“信使差事”,就是指做信使的工作,也就是拿着在家人托付的书信或口信,到处奔走传递。所谓“受派遣奔走”,是指被派出去、挨家挨户办些零碎差事。“从事”则是指做这两类事情。因此,这句话的意思就是“不从事信使差事和受派遣奔走”。这里的含义应当这样理解。巴利
Dūteyyaṃ vuccati dūtakammaṃ, gihīnaṃ pahitaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Pahiṇagamanaṃ vuccati gharā gharaṃ pesitassa khuddakagamanaṃ. Anuyogo nāma tadubhayakaraṇaṃ. Tasmā dūteyyapahiṇagamanānaṃ anuyogāti. Evamettha attho veditabbo.
买卖就是买和卖。在“秤上作弊”等说法里,“作弊”指的是欺骗。其中,秤上作弊有四种:改外形、动手脚、换提绳、藏机关。所谓改外形,就是做两杆看起来一样的秤,收货时用大的那杆,付货时用小的那杆。所谓动手脚,就是收货时用手从后面压秤杆,付货时从前面压。所谓换提绳,就是收货时抓绳子的根部,付货时抓绳子的末端。所谓藏机关,就是把秤杆挖空,里面塞进铁粉,收货时让藏铁粉的那头朝后,付货时让它朝前。巴利
Kayavikkayāti kayā ca vikkayā ca. Tulākūṭādīsu kūṭanti vañcanaṃ. Tattha tulākūṭaṃ nāma rūpakūṭaṃ aṅgakūṭaṃ, gahaṇakūṭaṃ, paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha rūpakūṭaṃ nāma dve tulā samarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti. Aṅgakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ nāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge.
所谓“金钵”,是指黄金做的钵。用它来行骗,就叫“金钵欺诈”。怎么骗呢?先做一个真金钵,再把另外两三个铜钵做成金色的样子,然后到别的地区去,走进某户有钱人家,说:“买些金器吧。”对方问价时,他们就想报一个尽量高的价钱。于是对方说:“怎么知道这些是金的呢?”他们就回答:“您先检验一下再买。”说完便用石头去擦那个真金钵,然后把所有的钵都交给对方,自己走了。巴利
Kaṃso vuccati suvaṇṇapāti, tāya vañcanaṃ kaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇe karoti, tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva aḍḍhaṃ kulaṃ pavisitvā – ‘‘suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi – ‘‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vutte, ‘‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbā pātiyo datvā gacchati.
所谓“量器欺诈”有三种:底部穿孔、削平尖顶、拉绳作弊。其中,底部穿孔是在称量酥油等液体时用的手段。收进时,他用底部穿孔的量器,嘴上说“慢慢倒”,实际上让大量液体从孔里漏进自己的容器再收下;付出时,却把孔堵住,迅速灌满后交给对方。巴利
Mānakūṭaṃ nāma hadayabhedasikhābhedarajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha hadayabhedo sappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhāchiddena mānena – ‘‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’’ti vatvā antobhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti.
刮平尖顶这种做法,是在称量芝麻、大米等颗粒物的时候出现的。收进来的时候,他慢慢把量器里的谷物堆出高高的尖顶,然后收下;付出去的时候,却迅速装满,再把尖顶刮平了才交给对方。巴利
Sikhābhedo tilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti.
丈量田地时,会发生“拉绳作弊”。那些收不到贿赂的人,明明田不大,却把它量成很大。巴利
Rajjubhedo khettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Lañjaṃ alabhantā hi khettaṃ amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti.
在“强行索回”等条目中,“强行索回”是指收受贿赂,把没有主人的东西说成有主人的。“欺骗”是指用各种手段欺骗他人。所谓“诈骗”,是指利用手段或幻术,把不是首饰的说成首饰,不是宝石的说成宝石,不是黄金的说成黄金,以假乱真而行骗。所谓“诡计结合”,是指弯曲不直的结合,实则正是对上述“强行索回”等种种手段的总称。因此,“强行索回之诡计结合、欺骗之诡计结合、诈骗之诡计结合”,这里应当这样理解其含义。有些人则说,把一物展示之后又换成另一物,就是“诡计结合”。但那其实已被“欺骗”所涵盖。这里有一个事例:据说有个猎人捉了一只鹿和一只小鹿回来。一个骗子问他:“喂,鹿值多少钱,小鹿值多少钱?”猎人回答说:“鹿值两个咖哈巴那,小鹿值一个。”骗子就交了一个咖哈巴那,把小鹿拿走,走了一段路又折回来,说:“朋友,我不要小鹿了,把鹿给我吧。”猎人说:“那就给两个咖哈巴那。”骗子说:“朋友,我不是先前已经给过你一个咖哈巴那了吗?”猎人说:“是的,给过了。”骗子说:“你把这小鹿拿回去,这样加上那个咖哈巴那,而这只小鹿也值一个咖哈巴那,那就等于两个咖哈巴那了。”猎人思量“他说得有道理”,便收下小鹿,把鹿给了他。所谓“诈骗”,是指通过诡计或幻术,把没有耳饰的说成有耳饰,没有宝石的说成有宝石,不是黄金的说成黄金,以相似之物行骗。所谓“诡计结合”,是指弯曲的结合,这正是上述“强行索回”等的名称。因此,“强行索回之诡计结合、欺骗之诡计结合、诈骗之诡计结合”,这里应当这样理解其含义。有些人则说,把一物展示之后又换成另一物,就是“诡计结合”。但那其实已被“欺骗”所涵盖。巴利
Ukkoṭanādīsu ukkoṭananti assāmike sāmike kātuṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ. Vañcananti tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati , tameko dhutto – ‘‘kiṃ bho, migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe, migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte ekaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto – ‘‘na me bho, migapotakena attho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi – dve kahāpaṇe dehīti. So āha – ‘‘nanu te bho, mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti? ‘‘Āma, dinno’’ti. ‘‘Idaṃ migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo, ayañca kahāpaṇagghanako migapotakoti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantī’’ti. So ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti. Nikatīti yogavasena vā māyāvasena vā apāmaṅgaṃ pāmaṅganti, amaṇiṃ maṇinti, asuvaṇṇaṃ suvaṇṇanti katvā patirūpakena vañcanaṃ. Sāciyogoti kuṭilayogo, etesaṃyeva ukkoṭanādīnametaṃ nāmaṃ. Tasmā – ukkoṭanasāciyogo, vañcanasāciyogo, nikatisāciyogoti, evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Keci aññaṃ dassetvā aññassa parivattanaṃ sāciyogoti vadanti. Taṃ pana vañcaneneva saṅgahitaṃ.
在“砍断”这一类里,“砍断”指的是砍断手等等。“杀害”就是杀死。“捆绑”就是用绳子之类把人绑起来。“抢劫”有两种:雪中抢劫和树丛中抢劫。下雪的时候,用雪把自己盖住,然后抢走路过的人,这叫雪中抢劫;躲在树丛之类的地方抢东西,这叫树丛中抢劫。“掠夺”说的是对村庄、城镇等进行洗劫。“暴力行为”就是行凶逞暴,也就是闯进别人家里,把刀架在人胸口上,抢走想要的东西。从这样的“砍断”……一直到“暴力行为”都远离了,就是乔达摩沙门。比丘们,凡夫称赞如来的时候,确实可能会这样说。巴利
Chedanādīsu chedananti hatthacchedanādi. Vadhoti māraṇaṃ. Bandhoti rajjubandhanādīhi bandhanaṃ. Viparāmosoti himaviparāmoso, gumbaviparāmosoti duvidho. Yaṃ himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggappaṭipannaṃ janaṃ musanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gumbādīhi paṭicchannā musanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso. Ālopo vuccati gāmanigamādīnaṃ vilopakaraṇaṃ. Sahasākāroti sāhasikakiriyā. Gehaṃ pavisitvā manussānaṃ ure satthaṃ ṭhapetvā icchitabhaṇḍānaṃ gahaṇaṃ. Evametasmā chedana…pe… sahasākārā paṭivirato samaṇo gotamoti. Iti vā hi, bhikkhave, puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyāti.
中戒的注释巴利
Majjhimasīlavaṇṇanā
11 11. 现在为了详细展开中戒,说了“然而,正如某些尊敬的……”等话。这里对其中不容易理解的词句作注释。“信施之物”是指因为相信业、相信果报、相信此世、相信他世而布施出去的东西。如果心想“这是我的亲戚”,或者“这是我的朋友”,或者“他将来会回报我”,或者“他以前曾为我做过这个”,像这样布施出去的,就不是信施之物。因为这样布施出去的东西,并不叫作信施。“食物”只是说法上的引子,从实际含义来说,受用信施的食物、穿上信施的衣服、使用信施的坐卧处、服用信施的医药,这一切都已经被说到了。巴利
11. Idāni majjhimasīlaṃ vitthārento ‘‘yathā vā paneke bhonto’’tiādimāha. Tatrāyaṃ anuttānapadavaṇṇanā. Saddhādeyyānīti kammañca phalañca idhalokañca paralokañca saddahitvā dinnāni. ‘Ayaṃ me ñātī’ti vā, ‘mitto’ti vā, idaṃ paṭikarissati, idaṃ vā tena katapubbanti vā, evaṃ na dinnānīti attho. Evaṃ dinnāni hi na saddhādeyyāni nāma honti . Bhojanānīti desanāsīsamattametaṃ, atthato pana saddhādeyyāni bhojanāni bhuñjitvā cīvarāni pārupitvā senāsanāni sevamānā gilānabhesajjaṃ paribhuñjamānāti sabbametaṃ vuttameva hoti.
“就像这样”是一个不变词。它的意思是:哪些是种子类和草木类呢?就是那些以伤害它们为生的人所伤害的。接着,为了说明这些,说了“根种子”等。其中,“根种子”是指姜黄、生姜、菖蒲、白菖蒲、阿提毗萨、苦味胡黄连、香根草、极妙豆等。“茎种子”是指菩提树、榕树、波罗叉树、乌敦跋罗树、卡恰卡树、木苹果树等。“节种子”是指甘蔗、竹、芦苇等。“插枝种子”是指阿迦草、法尼迦草、希利维拉草等。“种子种子”是指最初的谷物和后来的谷物等。凡是这一切从树上分离下来、仍然能够生长的,就称为“种子类”;而还长在树上、没有分离、没有干枯的,就称为“草木类”。在这里应当知道:伤害草木类犯波逸提,伤害种子类犯恶作。巴利
Seyyathidanti nipāto. Tassattho katamo so bījagāmabhūtagāmo, yassa samārambhaṃ anuyuttā viharantīti. Tato taṃ dassento mūlabījantiādimāha. Tattha mūlabījaṃ nāma haliddi, siṅgiveraṃ, vacā, vacattaṃ, ativisā, kaṭukarohiṇī, usīraṃ, bhaddamuttakanti evamādi. Khandhabījaṃ nāma assattho, nigrodho, pilakkho, udumbaro, kacchako, kapitthanoti evamādi. Phaḷubījaṃ nāma ucchu, naḷo, veḷūti evamādi. Aggabījaṃ nāma ajjakaṃ, phaṇijjakaṃ, hiriveranti evamādi. Bījabījaṃ nāma pubbaṇṇaṃ aparaṇṇanti evamādi. Sabbañhetaṃ rukkhato viyojitaṃ viruhanasamatthameva ‘‘bījagāmo’’ti vuccati. Rukkhato pana aviyojitaṃ asukkhaṃ ‘‘bhūtagāmo’’ti vuccati. Tattha bhūtagāmasamārambho pācittiyavatthu, bījagāmasamārambho dukkaṭavatthūti veditabbo.
12 12. “储存物之受用”是指受用已储存起来的东西。对此有两种说法:依律来说,以及依少欲来说。先依律来说:凡是今天接受的食物,到了第二天就成了储存物,受用它就犯波逸提。不过,自己得到的东西交给沙弥,他们拿到后把它存放起来,第二天再吃,这是可以的,但这不算少欲。巴利
12.Sannidhikāraparibhoganti sannidhikatassa paribhogaṃ. Tattha duvidhā kathā, vinayavasena ca sallekhavasena ca. Vinayavasena tāva yaṃ kiñci annaṃ ajja paṭiggahitaṃ aparajju sannidhikārakaṃ hoti, tassa paribhoge pācittiyaṃ . Attanā laddhaṃ pana sāmaṇerānaṃ datvā, tehi laddhaṃ ṭhapāpetvā dutiyadivase bhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati, sallekho pana na hoti.
饮料的储存也是同样的道理。这里说的饮料,是指芒果饮料等八种饮料,以及随顺这八种的饮料。对它们的详细辨析,在《一切善见》中已经说过。巴利
Pānasannidhimhipi eseva nayo. Tattha pānaṃ nāma ambapānādīni aṭṭha pānāni, yāni ca tesaṃ anulomāni. Tesaṃ vinicchayo samantapāsādikāyaṃ vutto.
关于存放衣物的规定:如果对衣物没有决意、没有作净施就存放着,这就成了储存,也会破坏少欲知足。这是方便的说法。从严格的意义上说,比丘应当满足于三衣;如果得到了第四件衣,就应该布施给别人。如果没法布施给任何人,而心里想布施给某位比丘,但那人为了诵经或请教问题出去了,那么等他回来时就应当立刻布施给他,不布施是不允许的。如果衣服不够用,心里有所期待,那可以在允许的期限内存放。如果因为找不到针、线或做衣的人,经过僧团如法的羯磨后,也可以存放超过那个期限。但如果这样想:“等这件衣服破了,我从哪里还能得到这样一件衣服呢?”而存放着,那是不允许的;这就成了储存,也会破坏少欲知足。巴利
Vatthasannidhimhi anadhiṭṭhitaṃ avikappitaṃ sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti, ayaṃ pariyāyakathā. Nippariyāyato pana ticīvarasantuṭṭhena bhavitabbaṃ, catutthaṃ labhitvā aññassa dātabbaṃ. Sace yassa kassaci dātuṃ na sakkoti, yassa pana dātukāmo hoti, so uddesatthāya vā paripucchatthāya vā gato, āgatamatte dātabbaṃ, adātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Cīvare pana appahonte satiyā paccāsāya anuññātakālaṃ ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sūcisuttacīvarakārakānaṃ alābhena tato parampi vinayakammaṃ katvā ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Imasmiṃ jiṇṇe puna īdisaṃ kuto labhissāmī’’ti pana ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
在“车乘的储存”这一条里,所谓“车乘”,指的是轿子、马车、牛车、沙地车、床舆、板舆这些;这些都不是出家人该用的车乘。不过,凉鞋才是出家人真正的车乘。因为一位比丘可以有一双凉鞋用来去阿兰若,另一双用来洗脚后穿,所以最多允许有两双凉鞋。如果得到第三双,就应该送给别人。要是想:“等这双穿坏了,我从哪里再弄到一双呢?”而把它存起来,那是不允许的;这既成了储存,也损害了少欲。巴利
Yānasannidhimhi yānaṃ nāma vayhaṃ, ratho, sakaṭaṃ, sandamānikā, sivikā, pāṭaṅkīti; netaṃ pabbajitassa yānaṃ. Upāhanā pana pabbajitassa yānaṃyeva. Ekabhikkhussa hi eko araññatthāya, eko dhotapādakatthāyāti, ukkaṃsato dve upāhanasaṅghāṭā vaṭṭanti. Tatiyaṃ labhitvā aññassa dātabbo. ‘‘Imasmiṃ jiṇṇe aññaṃ kuto labhissāmī’’ti hi ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
关于床铺的储存:所谓“床”,就是卧具。一位比丘在一间房里放一张,在白天待的地方放一张,最多可以有两张床。如果又得到更多的床,就应该送给别的比丘或僧团;不送出去是不行的。这样就成了储存,也会破坏少欲知足的修行。巴利
Sayanasannidhimhi sayananti mañco. Ekassa bhikkhuno eko gabbhe, eko divāṭhāneti ukkaṃsato dve mañcā vaṭṭanti. Tato uttari labhitvā aññassa bhikkhuno vā gaṇassa vā dātabbo; adātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
比丘储存香的情况是这样的:当比丘患有疥疮、皮肤病等疾病时,用香是允许的。把香取来之后,等病好了,应该送给其他患病的人,或者用在门口等处,比如做五指屋的熏香之类。但如果想着“以后再生病时还能用”而把它留着,那就不允许了,这样就成了储存,也会破坏少欲知足的修行。巴利
Gandhasannidhimhi bhikkhuno kaṇḍukacchuchavidosādiābādhe sati gandhā vaṭṭanti. Te gandhe āharāpetvā tasmiṃ roge vūpasante aññesaṃ vā ābādhikānaṃ dātabbā, dvāre pañcaṅguligharadhūpanādīsu vā upanetabbā. ‘‘Puna roge sati bhavissantī’’ti pana ṭhapetuṃ na vaṭṭati, sannidhi ca hoti, sallekhañca kopeti.
所谓“食物”,应当理解为前面说过的其余内容。比如:这里有个比丘,心想“到那时候会用得上”,就让人拿来芝麻、米、绿豆、黄豆、椰子、盐、鱼、肉、肉干、酥油、油、糖蜜和容器等物,存放起来。到了雨季,他一大早就让沙弥们煮粥,自己吃完后,打发沙弥说:“沙弥啊,踩着泥水进村太辛苦了,你去某家告诉他们,我正坐在精舍里;再从某家拿些酸奶之类的东西回来。”比丘们问他:“尊者,您要进村吗?”他就说:“贤友,现在进村很难。”比丘们就说:“好吧,尊者,您待着,我们去乞食回来。”说完就走了。然后沙弥拿回酸奶等物,把饭菜做好端上来。他正吃着,施主们又送来饭菜,他就从中挑合口味的吃。后来比丘们拿着乞来的食物回来,他又从中挑喜欢的,伸着脖子吃个不停。就这样过了四个月。这种人就叫作:“比丘过着剃头在家人那样的活法,不是沙门的活法。”像这样的,就叫食物储存。巴利
Āmisanti vuttāvasesaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Seyyathidaṃ, idhekacco bhikkhu – ‘‘tathārūpe kāle upakārāya bhavissatī’’ti tilataṇḍulamuggamāsanāḷikeraloṇamacchamaṃsavallūrasappitelaguḷabhājanādīni āharāpetvā ṭhapeti. So vassakāle kālasseva sāmaṇerehi yāguṃ pacāpetvā paribhuñjitvā ‘‘sāmaṇera, udakakaddame dukkhaṃ gāmaṃ pavisituṃ, gaccha asukaṃ kulaṃ gantvā mayhaṃ vihāre nisinnabhāvaṃ ārocehi; asukakulato dadhiādīni āharā’’ti peseti. Bhikkhūhi – ‘‘kiṃ, bhante, gāmaṃ pavisissathā’’ti vuttepi, ‘‘duppaveso, āvuso, idāni gāmo’’ti vadati. Te – ‘‘hotu, bhante, acchatha tumhe, mayaṃ bhikkhaṃ pariyesitvā āharissāmā’’ti gacchanti. Atha sāmaṇeropi dadhiādīni āharitvā bhattañca byañjanañca sampādetvā upaneti, taṃ bhuñjantasseva upaṭṭhākā bhattaṃ pahiṇanti, tatopi manāpaṃ manāpaṃ bhuñjati. Atha bhikkhū piṇḍapātaṃ gahetvā āgacchanti, tatopi manāpaṃ manāpaṃ gīvāyāmakaṃ bhuñjatiyeva. Evaṃ catumāsampi vītināmeti. Ayaṃ vuccati – ‘‘bhikkhu muṇḍakuṭumbikajīvikaṃ jīvati, na samaṇajīvika’’nti. Evarūpo āmisasannidhi nāma hoti.
比丘在自己的住处,可以存放一升米、一块糖蜜、大约四分之一份的酥油,这是允许的,目的是应付不时之需——比如盗贼突然来了。因为那些盗贼如果连这一点食物上的招待都得不到,甚至可能杀人。所以,如果没有这点储备,让人取来存放也是允许的。身体不舒服的时候,这里面凡是合乎戒律的东西,自己拿来用也是允许的。但在如法的小屋里,即使存放了很多东西,也不算“储存”。至于如来,无论是一升米之类的物品,还是一块四肘长的布片,都不会想着“这个我今天或明天要用”而把它存放起来。巴利
Bhikkhuno pana vasanaṭṭhāne ekā taṇḍulanāḷi, eko guḷapiṇḍo, catubhāgamattaṃ sappīti ettakaṃ nidhetuṃ vaṭṭati, akāle sampattacorānaṃ atthāya. Te hi ettakampi āmisapaṭisanthāraṃ alabhantā jīvitāpi voropeyyuṃ, tasmā sace ettakaṃ natthi, āharāpetvāpi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Aphāsukakāle ca yadettha kappiyaṃ, taṃ attanāpi paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Kappiyakuṭiyaṃ pana bahuṃ ṭhapentassāpi sannidhi nāma natthi. Tathāgatassa pana taṇḍulanāḷiādīsu vā yaṃ kiñci caturatanamattaṃ vā pilotikakhaṇḍaṃ ‘‘idaṃ me ajja vā sve vā bhavissatī’’ti ṭhapitaṃ nāma natthi.
13 13. 在观看表演这件事上,“舞蹈”指的是任何一种舞蹈,就算是在走路的时候,也不该伸长脖子去看。至于这里详细的判定,应当依照《一切善见》里所说的方式去理解。就像在这里一样,一切与学处相关的经文句子也都应当这样理解。从这以后,我不再一一多说,只在各处说明其实际用意而已。巴利
13. Visūkadassanesu naccaṃ nāma yaṃ kiñci naccaṃ, taṃ maggaṃ gacchantenāpi gīvaṃ pasāretvā daṭṭhuṃ na vaṭṭati. Vitthāravinicchayo panettha samantapāsādikāyaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Yathā cettha, evaṃ sabbesu sikkhāpadapaṭisaṃyuttesu suttapadesu. Ito parañhi ettakampi avatvā tattha tattha payojanamattameva vaṇṇayissāmāti.
看表演是指去看舞剧演员的集会。说书是指讲婆罗多大战之类的故事,凡是有人讲这些的地方,都不该去。手乐是指铙钹,也有人叫它掌乐。韦塔尔是指铜钹鼓乐,也有人说是用咒术让死尸站起来。罐鼓是指四方形水罐式的鼓乐,也有人说是罐子发出的声响。庄严是指向演员抛撒物品,或者是指能带来庄严的表演,也就是即兴表演。旃陀罗是指铁球游戏,也有人说是旃陀罗阶层洗麻布的游戏。竹是指把竹子竖起来玩的游戏。巴利
Pekkhanti naṭasamajjaṃ. Akkhānanti bhāratayujjhanādikaṃ. Yasmiṃ ṭhāne kathīyati, tattha gantumpi na vaṭṭati. Pāṇissaranti kaṃsatāḷaṃ, pāṇitāḷantipi vadanti. Vetāḷanti ghanatāḷaṃ, mantena matasarīruṭṭhāpanantipi eke. Kumbhathūṇanti caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃ, kumbhasaddantipi eke. Sobhanakanti naṭānaṃ abbhokkiraṇaṃ, sobhanakaraṃ vā, paṭibhānacittanti vuttaṃ hoti. Caṇḍālanti ayoguḷakīḷā, caṇḍālānaṃ sāṇadhovanakīḷātipi vadanti. Vaṃsanti veḷuṃ ussāpetvā kīḷanaṃ.
“洗骨”是指清洗骸骨。据说在某些地方,亲属去世后并不火化,而是埋下去放着。后来知道尸体已经腐烂,就挖出来,把骨头洗净,涂上香料,再存放起来。到了星宿节的时候,他们把骨头放在一个地方,把酒等东西放在另一个地方,一边哭一边哀叹,一边喝酒。经里也这样说:“诸比丘,在南方一些地方,有一种叫‘洗骨’的做法。那里有饭、有饮、有嚼食、有啖食、有舔食、有饮料,还有舞蹈、歌唱、音乐。诸比丘,这种‘洗’是存在的,我不会说它不存在。”也有人把用幻术洗骨也算作“洗骨”。巴利
Dhovananti aṭṭhidhovanaṃ, ekaccesu kira janapadesu kālaṅkate ñātake na jhāpenti, nikhaṇitvā ṭhapenti. Atha nesaṃ pūtibhūtaṃ kāyaṃ ñatvā nīharitvā aṭṭhīni dhovitvā gandhehi makkhetvā ṭhapenti. Te nakkhattakāle ekasmiṃ ṭhāne aṭṭhīni ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ ṭhāne surādīni ṭhapetvā rodantā paridevantā suraṃ pivanti. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave , dakkhiṇesu janapadesu aṭṭhidhovanaṃ nāma, tattha hoti annampi pānampi khajjampi bhojjampi leyyampi peyyampi naccampi gītampi vāditampi. Atthetaṃ, bhikkhave, dhovanaṃ, netaṃ natthīti vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 10.107). Ekacce pana indajālena aṭṭhidhovanaṃ dhovanantipi vadanti.
比丘不应该和象等一起打斗,也不应该让别人驱使它们去打斗,也不应该去看它们打斗。“搏斗”是指力士之间的打斗。“战阵”是指能看到互相砍杀的地方。“军营”是指清点兵力的地方。“军阵”是指军队驻扎的布局,比如用车阵等方式布置军队。“观军”是指按照“三头象是后面的象军”这样的方式所说的观看军队列阵。巴利
Hatthiyuddhādīsu bhikkhuno neva hatthiādīhi saddhiṃ yujjhituṃ, na te yujjhāpetuṃ, na yujjhante daṭṭhuṃ vaṭṭati. Nibbuddhanti mallayuddhaṃ. Uyyodhikanti yattha sampahāro dissati. Balagganti balagaṇanaṭṭhānaṃ. Senābyūhanti senāniveso, sakaṭabyūhādivasena senāya nivesanaṃ. Anīkadassananti – ‘‘tayo hatthī pacchimaṃ hatthānīka’’ntiādinā (pāci. 324) nayena vuttassa anīkassa dassanaṃ.
14 放逸之处,就是放逸停留的地方。它既是赌博,又是放逸之处,所以叫“赌博放逸处”。每一行有八个格子,所以叫“八格戏”;十格戏也是同样的说法。“空中戏”:就像八格戏、十格戏那样,纯粹在空中玩耍。“绕道戏”:在地上画出各种路线圆圈,要在各处移动棋子,是沿着路线走动玩耍的游戏。“近取戏”:就是靠近取物的游戏。把摆好的棋子或小石子,不用手直接移动,只用指甲拨开或拨近;如果其中有一颗动了,就算输,这种游戏就叫这个名字。“骰戏”:是在赌博板上掷骰子的游戏。“击棍戏”:是用长棍击打短棍的游戏。“掌印戏”:用虫胶、紫矿汁或面粉水把手掌浸湿,然后拍在地上或墙上,看印迹显出象、马等形象的游戏。“骰子”:指滚珠游戏。“叶哨”:指叶笛,吹着它玩。“曲犁”:指村童玩的小玩具犁。“翻腾戏”:就是翻转游戏——或者在空中拿着棍子,或者用头撑地,上下翻转着玩,说的就是这个。“旋轮”:指用棕榈叶等做成、靠风吹而旋转的轮子。“叶量”:指叶笛,用它来量沙子等东西玩。“小车”:指小玩具车。“小弓”:指小玩具弓。“猜字”:指在空中或背上写字让人猜的游戏。“猜心”:指猜别人心里所想之事的游戏。“学人短处”:指针对盲人、跛子、驼背等各类有缺陷的人,模仿他们各自的缺陷来取笑的游戏。巴利
14. Pamādo ettha tiṭṭhatīti pamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Jūtañca taṃ pamādaṭṭhānañcāti jūtappamādaṭṭhānaṃ. Ekekāya pantiyā aṭṭha aṭṭha padāni assāti aṭṭhapadaṃ dasapadepi eseva nayo. Ākāsanti aṭṭhapadadasapadesu viya ākāseyeva kīḷanaṃ. Parihārapathanti bhūmiyaṃ nānāpathamaṇḍalaṃ katvā tattha tattha pariharitabbaṃ, pathaṃ pariharantānaṃ kīḷanaṃ. Santikanti santikakīḷanaṃ. Ekajjhaṃ ṭhapitā sāriyo vā sakkharāyo vā acālentā nakheneva apanenti ca upanenti ca, sace tattha kāci calati, parājayo hoti, evarūpāya kīḷāyetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Khalikanti jūtaphalake pāsakakīḷanaṃ. Ghaṭikā vuccati dīghadaṇḍakena rassadaṇḍakaṃ paharaṇakīḷanaṃ. Salākahatthanti lākhāya vā mañjiṭṭhikāya vā piṭṭhodakena vā salākahatthaṃ temetvā – ‘‘kiṃ hotū’’ti bhūmiyaṃ vā bhittiyaṃ vā taṃ paharitvā hatthiassādirūpadassanakīḷanaṃ. Akkhanti guḷakīḷā. Paṅgacīraṃ vuccati paṇṇanāḷikaṃ, taṃ dhamantā kīḷanti. Vaṅkakanti gāmadārakānaṃ kīḷanakaṃ khuddakanaṅgalaṃ. Mokkhacikā vuccati samparivattanakīḷā, ākāse vā daṇḍakaṃ gahetvā bhūmiyaṃ vā sīsaṃ ṭhapetvā heṭṭhupariyabhāvena parivattanakīḷāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ciṅgulikaṃ vuccati tālapaṇṇādīhi kataṃ vātappahārena paribbhamanacakkaṃ. Pattāḷhakaṃ vuccati paṇṇanāḷikā. Tāya vālukādīni minantā kīḷanti. Rathakanti khuddakarathaṃ. Dhanukanti khuddakadhanumeva. Akkharikā vuccati ākāse vā piṭṭhiyaṃ vā akkharajānanakīḷā. Manesikā nāma manasā cintitajānanakīḷā. Yathāvajjaṃ nāma kāṇakuṇikhujjādīnaṃ yaṃ yaṃ vajjaṃ, taṃ taṃ payojetvā dassanakīḷā.
15 15.“高床”是指超过规定尺寸的床座。说到“持续地沉溺于”,是考虑到这一点,才在所有相关语句里都用受格。“长凳”是指把脚部雕刻成猛兽形象的凳子。“毛毯”是指长毛的大毯子,据说它的毛超过四指长。“彩绘毯”是指杂色羊毛织成的铺敷物。“白毯”是指纯白羊毛织成的铺敷物。“花毯”是指有厚实花纹的羊毛铺敷物,也叫“余甘子叶”。“棉垫”是指用三种棉花中任意一种填满的垫子。“兽纹毯”是指装饰有狮子、老虎等图案的羊毛铺敷物。“双面毛毯”是指两面都有毛的羊毛铺敷物,有些人说这是“一面有凸起花纹”的意思。“单面毛毯”是指只有一面有毛的羊毛铺敷物,有些人说这是“两面有凸起花纹”的意思。“绣锦”是指用珠宝镶边缝制的丝绣锦铺敷物。“丝毯”是指同样用珠宝镶边缝制的丝线织成的铺敷物。不过,《律藏》中说,纯粹的丝绸是允许的。但《长部注》中说:“除了棉垫之外,上述所有毛毯等物,一旦用珠宝镶嵌,就都不适宜了。”巴利
15.Āsandinti pamāṇātikkantāsanaṃ. Anuyuttā viharantīti idaṃ apekkhitvā pana sabbapadesu upayogavacanaṃ kataṃ. Pallaṅkoti pādesu vāḷarūpāni ṭhapetvā kato. Gonakoti dīghalomako mahākojavo, caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomāni. Cittakanti vānavicittaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Paṭikāti uṇṇāmayo setattharaṇo. Paṭalikāti ghanapupphako uṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Yo āmalakapattotipi vuccati. Tūlikāti tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ aññatarapuṇṇā tūlikā. Vikatikāti sīhabyagghādirūpavicitro uṇṇāmayattharaṇo. Uddalomīti ubhayatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ, keci ‘‘ekatouggatapuppha’’nti vadanti. Ekantalomīti ekatodasaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Keci ‘‘ubhatouggatapuppha’’nti vadanti. Kaṭṭissanti ratanaparisibbitaṃ koseyyakaṭṭissamayapaccattharaṇaṃ. Koseyyanti ratanaparisibbitameva kosiyasuttamayapaccattharaṇaṃ. Suddhakoseyyaṃ pana vaṭṭatīti vinaye vuttaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni na vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“裁剪毯”是指供十六个舞女站在上面跳舞的羊毛铺毯。“手敷物”和“马敷物”就是铺在象背和马背上的敷具;车上的敷具也是同样的道理。“羚羊皮毡”是用羚羊皮按床的尺寸缝制而成的毡垫。“迦达利鹿皮最上敷物”是说有一种叫迦达利鹿的皮,用它做成的最上等敷物,也就是最上等的铺敷物。据说那是把迦达利鹿皮铺在白布上面再缝制而成的。“带顶帐”是说带有上面的帷帐,也就是上方系着红色天帐的意思。如果下面有不许可的铺敷物,即使上面挂的是白色天帐,也不可以;如果下面没有,就可以。“两端有红枕”是指床头枕和床脚枕,也就是床两端有红色的枕头,这是不允许的。但如果只是一个枕头,两端是红色,或者呈莲花色,或者是杂色的,只要尺寸合适,就可以。不过过大的枕头是被禁止的。不是红色的两个枕头都可以用。如果得到多余的,应当分给他人。如果没法分给别人,就可以把它横铺在床中间,上面再铺一层铺敷物,然后躺上去,这也是可以的。对于长椅等,也应当按同样的方法处理。确实这样说过:“诸比丘,我允许把长椅的腿砍掉后使用,把长凳上的猛兽装饰弄坏后使用,把棉垫拆开做成坐垫,剩下的做地上铺敷物。”巴利
Kuttakanti soḷasannaṃ nāṭakitthīnaṃ ṭhatvā naccanayoggaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. Hatthattharaṃ assattharanti hatthiassapiṭṭhīsu attharaṇaattharakāyeva. Rathattharepi eseva nayo. Ajinappaveṇīti ajinacammehi mañcappamāṇena sibbitvā katā paveṇī. Kadalīmigapavarapaccattharaṇanti kadalīmigacammaṃ nāma atthi, tena kataṃ pavarapaccattharaṇaṃ; uttamapaccattharaṇanti attho. Taṃ kira setavatthassa upari kadalīmigacammaṃ pattharitvā sibbetvā karonti. Sauttaracchadanti saha uttaracchadena, uparibaddhena rattavitānena saddhinti attho. Setavitānampi heṭṭhā akappiyapaccattharaṇe sati na vaṭṭati, asati pana vaṭṭati. Ubhatolohitakūpadhānanti sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti mañcassa ubhatolohitakaṃ upadhānaṃ, etaṃ na kappati. Yaṃ pana ekameva upadhānaṃ ubhosu passesu rattaṃ vā hoti padumavaṇṇaṃ vā vicitraṃ vā, sace pamāṇayuttaṃ, vaṭṭati. Mahāupadhānaṃ pana paṭikkhittaṃ. Alohitakāni dvepi vaṭṭantiyeva. Tato uttari labhitvā aññesaṃ dātabbāni. Dātuṃ asakkonto mañce tiriyaṃ attharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ datvā nipajjitumpi labhati. Āsandīādīsu pana vuttanayeneva paṭipajjitabbaṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, āsandiyā pāde chinditvā paribhuñjituṃ, pallaṅkassa vāḷe bhinditvā paribhuñjituṃ, tūlikaṃ vijaṭetvā bimbohanaṃ kātuṃ, avasesaṃ bhummattharaṇaṃ kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 297).
16 关于涂香等:从母胎生出来的孩子,身上的气味到十二岁时才消失。为了去掉他们身上的臭味,人们用香粉等给他们涂擦,这样的涂擦是不允许的。不过,对于有福报的孩子,让他趴在大腿上,用油涂抹,然后揉按他的手、脚、大腿、肚脐等部位,为的是让体形长得端正,这样的揉按也是不允许的。巴利
16. Ucchādanādīsu mātukucchito nikkhantadārakānaṃ sarīragandho dvādasavassapattakāle nassati, tesaṃ sarīraduggandhaharaṇatthāya gandhacuṇṇādīhi ucchādenti, evarūpaṃ ucchādanaṃ na vaṭṭati. Puññavante pana dārake ūrūsu nipajjāpetvā telena makkhetvā hatthapādaūrunābhiādīnaṃ saṇṭhānasampādanatthaṃ parimaddanti, evarūpaṃ parimaddanaṃ na vaṭṭati.
“沐浴”是指用香料等给那些孩子洗澡。“捶打揉捏”是指像对待大力士那样,用手槌等敲打他们的手脚,来让手臂长得更壮。“镜子”是指任何镜子都不可以拿来用。“眼药涂彩”就是指装饰性的眼部涂彩。“花鬘”是指编好的花环或者没编成环的散花。“涂香”是指任何能改变肤色的涂香。为了去掉脸上的黑斑等,他们给涂泥浆;血气紊乱时,给涂芥子浆;病气侵蚀时,给涂芝麻浆;血气平复时,给涂姜黄浆;等肤色恢复后,再用面粉末擦脸。这一切都不允许。巴利
Nhāpananti tesaṃyeva dārakānaṃ gandhādīhi nhāpanaṃ. Sambāhananti mahāmallānaṃ viya hatthapāde muggarādīhi paharitvā bāhuvaḍḍhanaṃ. Ādāsanti yaṃ kiñci ādāsaṃ pariharituṃ na vaṭṭati. Añjananti alaṅkārañjanameva. Mālāti baddhamālā vā abaddhamālā vā. Vilepananti yaṃ kiñci chavirāgakaraṇaṃ. Mukhacuṇṇaṃ mukhalepananti mukhe kāḷapīḷakādīnaṃ haraṇatthāya mattikakakkaṃ denti, tena lohite calite sāsapakakkaṃ denti, tena dose khādite tilakakkaṃ denti, tena lohite sannisinne haliddikakkaṃ denti, tena chavivaṇṇe ārūḷhe mukhacuṇṇakena mukhaṃ cuṇṇenti, taṃ sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati.
有人把手腕等部位装饰起来,在手上绑各种彩色的螺贝壳之类的东西到处走动,那种手饰或者其他任何手饰都不可以。另一些人把头发扎成顶髻到处走动。他们用金线布、珍珠串等缠绕顶髻,这一切都不可以。还有些人拿着一根四肘长的棍子,或者别的装饰过的短杖到处走动;同样,有人把画着男女形象等各种图案的药筒好好装饰后挂在左边;有人佩带一把镶着耳饰宝石、极其锋利的剑;有人撑着用五色线缝制、缀有鳄鱼牙等装饰的伞;有人穿金银等各色装饰、镶着孔雀尾羽等的凉鞋;有些人在额头上留出像宝石那么长、四指宽的一条发际,露出来给人看,然后在额头上绑一条像乌云中闪电一样的头巾带,佩戴顶髻宝珠,拿着拂尘尾做的扇子。这一切都不可以。巴利
Hatthabandhādīsu hatthe vicitrasaṅkhakapālādīni bandhitvā vicaranti, taṃ vā aññaṃ vā sabbampi hatthābharaṇaṃ na vaṭṭati, apare sikhaṃ bandhitvā vicaranti. Suvaṇṇacīrakamuttalatādīhi ca taṃ parikkhipanti; taṃ sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati. Apare catuhatthadaṇḍaṃ vā aññaṃ vā pana alaṅkatadaṇḍakaṃ gahetvā vicaranti, tathā itthipurisarūpādivicittaṃ bhesajjanāḷikaṃ suparikkhittaṃ vāmapasse olaggitaṃ; apare kaṇṇikaratanaparikkhittakosaṃ atitikhiṇaṃ asiṃ, pañcavaṇṇasuttasibbitaṃ makaradantakādivicittaṃ chattaṃ, suvaṇṇarajatādivicitrā morapiñchādiparikkhittā upāhanā, keci ratanamattāyāmaṃ caturaṅgulavitthataṃ kesantaparicchedaṃ dassetvā meghamukhe vijjulataṃ viya nalāṭe uṇhīsapaṭṭaṃ bandhanti, cūḷāmaṇiṃ dhārenti, cāmaravālabījaniṃ dhārenti, taṃ sabbaṃ na vaṭṭati.
17 17. 因为不能导向天界和解脱之道,所以这类谈论本质上属于畜生论,称为畜生论。其中,以国王为话题,说“大选出王、曼陀多王、法阿育王有这样大的威神力”等等,按这种方式进行的谈论,就是国王论。盗贼论等等也是同样的道理。在这些话题中,如果按“某某国王容貌端正、好看”这种方式来说,那就是执着于世俗生活的谈论,属于畜生论。但如果这样说:“就连他那样有大威神力的人,也终究归于毁灭了”,这样展开的谈论,就属于禅修业处。关于盗贼,如果说“根本天有这样大的威神力,雨云鬟有这样大的威神力”,因为他们的行为而感叹“啊,真勇敢”,这种执着于世俗生活的谈论就是畜生论。关于战争,比如在婆罗多大战等里面,说“某人被某人这样杀死,这样被射中”,纯粹是顺着感官享乐来说的谈论,就是畜生论。但如果这样说:“就连他们也终究归于毁灭了”,这样展开的谈论,在任何情况下都属于禅修业处。另外,关于食物等,不可以用贪著感官享乐的心态来说:“我们吃过、享用过这样颜色好、香气好、味道好、触感好的东西。”但如果赋予意义来说:“以前我们把这样颜色等各方面都好的食物、饮料、衣服、卧具、花鬘、香,布施给了有戒德的人,在佛塔作了供养”,这样说是可以的。关于亲族论等,也不可以顺着贪著来说:“我们的亲族勇敢、有能力”,或者“以前我们乘坐各种华丽的车乘到处游玩”。但如果赋予意义来说:“那些亲族也终究归于毁灭了”,或者“以前我们把这样的鞋子布施给了僧团”,这样说是可以的。村论也一样,不可以按“地基好或不好、物产丰饶或饥荒”等方式来说,也不可以顺着贪著说“某某村的居民勇敢、有能力”。但如果赋予意义来说:“他们有信心、有净信”,或者“已经归于毁灭了”,这样说是可以的。市镇论、都城论、国土论等,也是同样的道理。巴利
17. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā kathāti tiracchānakathā. Tattha rājānaṃ ārabbha mahāsammato mandhātā dhammāsoko evaṃ mahānubhāvotiādinā nayena pavattā kathā rājakathā. Esa nayo corakathādīsu. Tesu asuko rājā abhirūpo dassanīyotiādinā nayena gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā hoti. Sopi nāma evaṃ mahānubhāvo khayaṃ gatoti evaṃ pavattā pana kammaṭṭhānabhāve tiṭṭhati. Coresu mūladevo evaṃ mahānubhāvo, meghamālo evaṃ mahānubhāvoti tesaṃ kammaṃ paṭicca aho sūrāti gehassitakathāva tiracchānakathā. Yuddhepi bhāratayuddhādīsu asukena asuko evaṃ mārito, evaṃ viddhoti kāmassādavaseneva kathā tiracchānakathā. Tepi nāma khayaṃ gatāti evaṃ pavattā pana sabbattha kammaṭṭhānameva hoti. Api ca annādīsu evaṃ vaṇṇavantaṃ gandhavantaṃ rasavantaṃ phassasampannaṃ khādimha bhuñjimhāti kāmassādavasena kathetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sātthakaṃ pana katvā pubbe evaṃ vaṇṇādisampannaṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ sayanaṃ mālaṃ gandhaṃ sīlavantānaṃ adamha, cetiye pūjaṃ karimhāti kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Ñātikathādīsu pana ‘‘amhākaṃ ñātakā sūrā samatthā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evaṃ vicitrehi yānehi vicarimhā’’ti vā assādavasena vattuṃ na vaṭṭati. Sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘tepi no ñātakā khayaṃ gatā’’ti vā ‘‘pubbe mayaṃ evarūpā upāhanā saṅghassa adamhā’’ti vā kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Gāmakathāpi suniviṭṭhadunniviṭṭhasubhikkhadubbhikkhādivasena vā ‘‘asukagāmavāsino sūrā samatthā’’ti vā evaṃ assādavasena na vaṭṭati. Sātthakaṃ pana katvā ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’ti vā ‘‘khayavayaṃ gatā’’ti vā vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nigamanagarajanapadakathādīsupi eseva nayo.
谈论女人时,如果是因为贪恋容貌、身材等而觉得享受,那就不可以;如果说“她们有信心、有净信,已经归于灭尽”,这样就可以。谈论英雄时,如果是因为觉得享受而说“有个叫欢喜友的战士真英勇”,那就不可以;如果说“他有信心,已经归于灭尽”,这样就可以。谈论街道时,如果是因为觉得享受而说“某某街道布局好、布局差,那里的人英勇能干”,那就不可以;如果说“他们有信心、有净信,已经归于灭尽”,这样就可以。巴利
Itthikathāpi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādīni paṭicca assādavasena na vaṭṭati, saddhā pasannā khayavayaṃ gatāti evameva vaṭṭati. Sūrakathāpi ‘nandimitto nāma yodho sūro ahosī’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati. Saddho ahosi khayaṃ gatoti evameva vaṭṭati. Visikhākathāpi ‘‘asukā visikhā suniviṭṭhā dunniviṭṭhā sūrā samatthā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati. Saddhā pasannā khayavayaṃ gatāti evameva vaṭṭati.
“瓶处论”是指谈论取水的地方,也叫谈论水边的渡口,或者叫谈论取水的女仆。如果以“她们长得好看、能歌善舞”这类带着贪著享受的方式来说,那就不合适;只有以“有信、净信”这样的方式来说,才合适。“已故亡者论”是指谈论已经去世的亲属。在这里,判定方式和谈论在世亲属是一样的。巴利
Kumbhaṭṭhānakathāti udakaṭṭhānakathā, udakatitthakathātipi vuccati, kumbhadāsikathā vā, sāpi ‘‘pāsādikā naccituṃ gāyituṃ chekā’’ti assādavasena na vaṭṭati; saddhā pasannātiādinā nayeneva vaṭṭati. Pubbapetakathāti atītañātikathā. Tattha vattamānañātikathāsadiso vinicchayo.
“杂论”是指除了前面和后面那些谈论之外,其余各种性质不同、没有意义的谈论。“世间传说”是指像这样的话:这个世界是谁造出来的?是某某造出来的。乌鸦是白的,因为骨头是白的;鹭是红的,因为血是红的——诸如此类属于顺世外道争辩对谈的谈论。巴利
Nānattakathāti purimapacchimakathāhi vimuttā avasesā nānāsabhāvā niratthakakathā. Lokakkhāyikāti ayaṃ loko kena nimmito, asukena nāma nimmito. Kāko seto, aṭṭhīnaṃ setattā; balākā rattā. Lohitassa rattattāti evamādikā lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā.
所谓“大海传说”是这样的:有人问,大海为什么叫“沙伽罗”?因为是被沙伽罗天王挖出来的,所以叫沙伽罗;又因为用手印自己表示“是我挖的”,所以叫“海”——诸如此类关于大海的传说,都是毫无意义的话。“有无论”呢,“有”就是增长,“无”就是减损;也就是说,随便搬出“这样就有增长,这样就有减损”之类毫无意义的理由来展开的谈论,就叫“有无论”。巴利
Samuddakkhāyikā nāma kasmā samuddo sāgaro? Sāgaradevena khato, tasmā sāgaro. Khato meti hatthamuddāya sayaṃ niveditattā ‘‘samuddo’’ti evamādikā niratthakā samuddakkhāyanakathā. Bhavoti vuḍḍhi. Abhavoti hāni. Iti bhavo, iti abhavoti yaṃ vā taṃ vā niratthakakāraṇaṃ vatvā pavattitakathā itibhavābhavakathā.
18 “诤论”就是争执性的谈论,是带着敌意和火气的谈论。其中,“我的话说得有条理”,意思是我的话组织得好、衔接顺畅、有意义、有道理。“你的话没有条理”,意思是你的话没有组织好、不顺畅。“你长久以来熟悉的东西被一句话推翻了”,意思是:你长期以来反复练习、非常精通的东西,被我仅仅一句话就彻底翻转过来,你什么都不知道了。巴利
18.Viggāhikakathāti viggahakathā, sārambhakathā. Tattha sahitaṃ meti mayhaṃ vacanaṃ sahitaṃ siliṭṭhaṃ atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttanti attho. Asahitaṃ teti tuyhaṃ vacanaṃ asahitaṃ asiliṭṭhaṃ. Adhiciṇṇaṃ te viparāvattanti yaṃ tuyhaṃ dīgharattāciṇṇavasena suppaguṇaṃ, taṃ mayhaṃ ekavacaneneva viparāvattaṃ parivattitvā ṭhitaṃ, na kiñci jānāsīti attho.
“你被指出过失了”意思是:我已经指出了你的过失。“去摆脱这个指责吧”意思是:为了摆脱过失而四处走动、游历,也就是到各处去学习。“如果你有能力,就把它解开吧”意思是:如果你自己有这个能力,现在就把这个问题解决掉。巴利
Āropitote vādoti mayā tava doso āropito. Cara vādappamokkhāyāti dosamocanatthaṃ cara, vicara; tattha tattha gantvā sikkhāti attho. Nibbeṭhehi vā sace pahosīti atha sayaṃ pahosi, idānimeva nibbeṭhehīti.
19 19. 在关于信使的讨论中,“从这里去”意思是:从这儿去某个地方。“从那里来”意思是:从某个地方来到这儿。“把这个拿去”意思是:把这东西拿到那里去。“从那里把这个拿来”意思是:从某个地方把这东西拿到这里来。简而言之,除了为五种同法者、为与三宝利益相关的事,以及为在家人作教示之外,这种信使的事对其他人是不合适的。巴利
19. Dūteyyakathāyaṃ idha gacchāti ito asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gaccha. Amutrāgacchāti tato asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ āgaccha. Idaṃ harāti ito idaṃ nāma hara. Amutra idaṃ āharāti asukaṭṭhānato idaṃ nāma idha āhara. Saṅkhepato pana idaṃ dūteyyaṃ nāma ṭhapetvā pañca sahadhammike ratanattayassa upakārapaṭisaṃyuttañca gihīsāsanaṃ aññesaṃ na vaṭṭati.
20 20. “骗人者”等当中,用三种骗人的手段欺骗、迷惑世人,所以叫骗人者。为了利养和恭敬而喋喋不休,所以叫饶舌者。把占相当作自己的修行,所以叫占相者。把强索当作自己的修行,所以叫强索者。用利养去追逐利养,到处寻找、四处求取,所以叫以利求利者。骗人、饶舌、占相、强索、以利求利,这些就是具备这类行为之人的称呼。这里只是简略说明。详细来说,这些骗人等内容,在《清净道论》讲戒的部分里,已经引了巴利原文和注释加以说明了。巴利
20.Kuhakātiādīsu tividhena kuhanavatthunā lokaṃ kuhayanti, vimhāpayantīti kuhakā. Lābhasakkāratthikā hutvā lapantīti lapakā. Nimittaṃ sīlametesanti nemittikā. Nippeso sīlametesanti nippesikā. Lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanti magganti pariyesanttīti lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsitāro. Kuhanā, lapanā, nemittikatā, nippesikatā, lābhena lābhaṃ nijigīsanatāti etāhi samannāgatānaṃ puggalānaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthārena panetā kuhanādikā visuddhimagge sīlaniddeseyeva pāḷiñca aṭṭhakathañca āharitvā pakāsitāti.
21 从此之后是大戒。“肢体”说的是:无论具备手脚等哪一种这样的肢体特征,就能长寿、有名望等等,按这种方式流传下来的就是肢体明。“相”就是相明。据说盘荼王把三颗珍珠攥在拳头里,问占相师:“我手里是什么?”那人东张西望,正好那时一只壁虎抓住了一只苍蝇,他就说:“珍珠。”又问:“几颗?”他听到公鸡连叫三声,就说:“三颗。”就这样,他们靠占卜各种征兆来维持生活。巴利
21. Ito paraṃ mahāsīlaṃ hoti. Aṅganti hatthapādādīsu yena kenaci evarūpena aṅgena samannāgato dīghāyu yasavā hotītiādinayappavattaṃ aṅgasatthaṃ. Nimittanti nimittasatthaṃ. Paṇḍurājā kira tisso muttāyo muṭṭhiyaṃ katvā nemittikaṃ pucchi – ‘‘kiṃ me hatthe’’ti? So ito cito ca vilokesi, tasmiñca samaye gharagolikāya makkhikā gayhantī muttā, so ‘‘muttā’’ti āha. Puna ‘‘katī’’ti puṭṭho kukkuṭassa tikkhattuṃ ravantassa saddaṃ sutvā ‘‘tisso’’ti āha. Evaṃ taṃ taṃ ādisitvā nimittamanuyuttā viharanti.
“灾兆”是指雷击之类大灾难的发生,人们看到这种现象后就说“将会发生这个,将会变成那样”,以此作预言。“梦”是指有人在上午做梦,会有什么样的果报;梦见这个就代表那个,等等。他们就这样按这类方式,专门靠解梦过活。“相”是指具备这种相的人会成为国王,具备那种相的人会成为副王等等。“鼠咬”是指被老鼠咬坏的东西。人们也凭这个来说:无论是没裁剪过的布还是裁剪好的布,从被咬成这样开始,就代表会发生某某事。“火供”是指用某种木头以某种方式祭祀,就会发生某某事情,这就是祭火。勺供等也是火供,但由于是用这种勺子以这种糠等祭祀就会发生某事这样进行,所以分别说明。巴利
Uppātanti asanipātādīnaṃ mahantānaṃ uppatitaṃ, tañhi disvā ‘‘idaṃ bhavissati, evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti ādisanti. Supinanti yo pubbaṇhasamaye supinaṃ passati, evaṃ vipāko hoti; yo idaṃ nāma passati, tassa idaṃ nāma hotītiādinā nayena supinakaṃ anuyuttā viharanti. Lakkhaṇanti iminā lakkhaṇena samannāgato rājā hoti, iminā uparājātiādikaṃ. Mūsikacchinnanti undūrakhāyitaṃ. Tenāpi hi ahate vā vatthe anahate vā vatthe ito paṭṭhāya evaṃ chinne idaṃ nāma hotīti ādisanti. Aggihomanti evarūpena dārunā evaṃ hute idaṃ nāma hotīti aggijuhanaṃ. Dabbihomādīnipi aggihomāneva, evarūpāya dabbiyā īdisehi kaṇādīhi hute idaṃ nāma hotīti evaṃ pavattivasena pana visuṃ vuttāni.
这里,“糠”指米糠。“米”指稻米等谷物的米粒,也包括各种草的籽实。“酥油”指牛酥油之类。“油”指芝麻油之类。至于把芥子等含在口中投入火里,或者念诵咒语之后献供,这叫“口供”。用右腋窝的血、膝盖的血等来献供,叫“血供”。“肢明”:以前只是观察肢体来预言,所以叫肢明;这里则是观察指骨后,念诵咒语,然后判断“这个人是良家子弟或不是”“具足祥瑞或不具足”等等,这就是肢明。“宅地明”:是审察住宅、园林等宅地的功德与过失的明。因为人们观察土质等差别后,念诵咒语,就能在地下三十由旬处、空中八十由旬处看到功德与过失。“刹帝利明”:是咒杀阿修罗、刹帝利、王军等的咒术。“吉祥明”:是进入坟场后修习令安隐的明,也有人称它为豺声明。“鬼明”:是鬼神的咒术。“地明”:是在地居处所住者应当学习的咒术。“蛇明”:既是治疗蛇咬伤的明,也是召唤蛇的明。“毒明”:指的是能防护陈旧毒、制造新毒,或者单纯用于对付毒害的那些术。“蝎明”:是治疗蝎咬伤的明。“鼠明”也是如此。“鸟明”:是以有翼、无翼、两足、四足等鸟类的叫声等方式而得的鸟智。“乌鸦明”:是乌鸦叫声之智,那是单独的一部论书,所以单独列出。巴利
Tattha kaṇoti kuṇḍako. Taṇḍulāti sāliādīnañceva tiṇajātīnañca taṇḍulā. Sappīti gosappiādikaṃ. Telanti tilatelādikaṃ. Sāsapādīni pana mukhena gahetvā aggimhi pakkhipanaṃ, vijjaṃ parijappitvā juhanaṃ vā mukhahomaṃ. Dakkhiṇakkhakajaṇṇulohitādīhi juhanaṃ lohitahomaṃ. Aṅgavijjāti pubbe aṅgameva disvā byākaraṇavasena aṅgaṃ vuttaṃ, idha aṅgulaṭṭhiṃ disvā vijjaṃ parijappitvā ayaṃ kulaputto vā no vā, sirīsampanno vā no vātiādibyākaraṇavasena aṅgavijjā vuttā. Vatthuvijjāti gharavatthuārāmavatthādīnaṃ guṇadosasallakkhaṇavijjā. Mattikādivisesaṃ disvāpi hi vijjaṃ parijappitvā heṭṭhā pathaviyaṃ tiṃsaratanamatte, ākāse ca asītiratanamatte padese guṇadosaṃ passanti. Khattavijjāti abbheyyamāsurakkharājasatthādisatthaṃ. Sivavijjāti susāne pavisitvā santikaraṇavijjā, siṅgālarutavijjātipi vadanti. Bhūtavijjāti bhūtavejjamanto. Bhūrivijjāti bhūrighare vasantena uggahetabbamanto. Ahivijjāti sappadaṭṭhatikicchanavijjā ceva sappāvhāyanavijjā ca. Visavijjāti yāya, purāṇavisaṃ vā rakkhanti, navavisaṃ vā karonti visavantameva vā. Vicchikavijjāti vicchikadaṭṭhatikicchanavijjā. Mūsikavijjāyapi eseva nayo. Sakuṇavijjāti sapakkhakaapakkhakadvipadacatuppadānaṃ rutagatādivasena sakuṇañāṇaṃ. Vāyasavijjāti kākarutañāṇaṃ, taṃ visuññeva satthaṃ, tasmā visuṃ vuttaṃ.
熟虑禅那是指已经成熟的思考。现在意思是说,像“这个人能活这么久,那个人能活这么久”这样生起的预见之智。护箭是指保护自己不被箭射中,让箭不会落到自己身上,这样的法术。兽轮这是总括性的说法,是依据一切鸟类和四足兽的叫声而获得的智慧。巴利
Pakkajjhānanti paripākagatacintā. Idāni ‘‘ayaṃ ettakaṃ jīvissati, ayaṃ ettaka’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ ādiṭṭhañāṇanti attho. Saraparittāṇanti sararakkhaṇaṃ, yathā attano upari na āgacchati, evaṃ karaṇavijjā. Migacakkanti idaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ sabbasakuṇacatuppadānaṃ rutañāṇavasena vuttaṃ.
22 在珠宝相等相术里,这样的珠宝是受称赞的,那样的珠宝是不受称赞的;它能成为主人获得健康、权势等的因,或者不能。意思是,他们就那样依据颜色、形状等,安住于修习珠宝等的相。其中,“武器”是指除了刀剑等以外其余的武器。女相等也应当依据那些男女等所居住家族的兴衰来理解。而在羊相等当中,则要知道:这样的羊等,它的肉可以吃;那样的,不可以吃——这是应当了解的差别。巴利
22.Maṇilakkhaṇādīsu evarūpo maṇi pasattho, evarūpo apasattho, sāmino ārogyaissariyādīnaṃ hetu hoti, na hotīti, evaṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena maṇiādīnaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ anuyuttā viharantīti attho. Tattha āvudhanti ṭhapetvā asiādīni avasesaṃ āvudhaṃ. Itthilakkhaṇādīnipi yamhi kule te itthipurisādayo vasanti, tassa vuḍḍhihānivaseneva veditabbāni. Ajalakkhaṇādīsu pana evarūpānaṃ ajādīnaṃ maṃsaṃ khāditabbaṃ, evarūpānaṃ na khāditabbanti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo.
在这里,关于蜥蜴相,也要知道有这样的差别:在壁画、装饰品等上面,如果有这样的蜥蜴,就会预示某种事情。这里还有一则事例:据说在某座精舍里,有人在壁画上画了一只正在吹火的蜥蜴。从那时起,比丘们之间就发生了大争执。一位客比丘看到后,把那幅画抹掉了。从那时起,争执就渐渐平息了。椽端相也要从装饰用的椽端和房屋的椽端这两方面来理解。龟相和蜥蜴相相同。兽相则是总括性的,是就所有四足动物的相来说的。巴利
Api cettha godhāya lakkhaṇe cittakammapiḷandhanādīsupi evarūpāya godhāya sati idaṃ nāma hotīti ayaṃ viseso veditabbo. Idañcettha vatthu – ekasmiṃ kira vihāre cittakamme godhaṃ aggiṃ dhamamānaṃ akaṃsu. Tato paṭṭhāya bhikkhūnaṃ mahāvivādo jāto. Eko āgantukabhikkhu taṃ disvā makkhesi. Tato paṭṭhāya vivādo mandībhūto hoti. Kaṇṇikalakkhaṇaṃ piḷandhanakaṇṇikāyapi gehakaṇṇikāyapi vasena veditabbaṃ. Kacchapalakkhaṇaṃ godhālakkhaṇasadisameva. Migalakkhaṇaṃ sabbasaṅgāhikaṃ sabbacatuppadānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena vuttaṃ.
23 “国王们将会出发”这句话的意思是:在某一天、某个星宿下,某某国王将会外出——就这样预言国王们的远行。这个道理适用于所有情况。不过这里有一个特别之处:“不出发”指的是已经外出的人再次回来。“内部国王将会前来,外部国王将会离去”是说:我们城内的国王会去迎击外面的国王,然后那个外来的国王就会撤退——就这样预言国王们的前来与离去。第二句也是同样的道理。至于胜利与失败,那是不言自明的。巴利
23.Raññaṃ niyyānaṃ bhavissatīti asukadivase asukanakkhattena asukassa nāma rañño niggamanaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ rājūnaṃ pavāsagamanaṃ byākaroti. Esa nayo sabbattha. Kevalaṃ panettha aniyyānanti vippavutthānaṃ puna āgamanaṃ. Abbhantarānaṃ raññaṃ upayānaṃ bhavissati, bāhirānaṃ raññaṃ apayānanti antonagare amhākaṃ rājā paṭiviruddhaṃ bahirājānaṃ upasaṅkamissati, tato tassa paṭikkamanaṃ bhavissatīti evaṃ raññaṃ upayānāpayānaṃ byākaroti. Dutiyapadepi eseva nayo. Jayaparājayā pākaṭāyeva.
24 月食等应当依照“某日罗睺将抓取月亮”这种预言的方式来理解。另外,星宿与火星等交会,也属于星食。流星,指火光从天空坠落。天空燃烧,指天空昏暗,像被火焰、烟焰等搅乱一样。天鸣,指干云的轰鸣。上升,指升起。下沉,指沉没。杂染,指不清净。清净,指洁净。如是果报,指世间由此带来种种苦乐。巴利
24.Candaggāhādayo asukadivase rāhu candaṃ gahessatīti byākaraṇavaseneva veditabbā. Api ca nakkhattassa aṅgārakādigāhasamāyogopi nakkhattagāhoyeva. Ukkāpātoti ākāsato ukkānaṃ patanaṃ. Disāḍāhoti disākālusiyaṃ aggisikhadhūmasikhādīhi ākulabhāvo viya. Devadudrabhīti sukkhavalāhakagajjanaṃ. Uggamananti udayanaṃ. Okkamananti atthaṅgamanaṃ. Saṃkilesanti avisuddhatā. Vodānanti visuddhatā. Evaṃ vipākoti lokassa evaṃ vividhasukhadukkhāvaho.
25 好雨,是指天及时降雨。坏雨,是指不下雨,也就是雨水受阻。手印,是指手上的印记。计算,是指没有差错的计算。数,是指通过合计、做成百等而得出的总数。对这种方法熟练的人,即使看到一棵树,也知道这棵树上有多少片叶子。诗歌:世尊说过:“比丘们,有四种诗人。哪四种?思诗人、闻诗人、义诗人、辩才诗人。”这四种诗人,或者凭自己的思考作诗;或者听了“从前有位叫须大拏的国王”等之后,凭所闻作诗;或者凭义理作诗:“这是这个意思,我要这样把它连起来”;或者看到某样东西后,凭当场生起的辩才作诗:“我要创作与它相似的东西”——像这样,为了谋生而作诗。顺世论,前面已经说过了。巴利
25.Suvuṭṭhikāti devassa sammādhārānuppavecchanaṃ. Dubbuṭṭhikāti avaggāho, vassavibandhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Muddāti hatthamuddā. Gaṇanā vuccati acchiddakagaṇanā. Saṅkhānanti saṅkalanasaṭuppādanādivasena piṇḍagaṇanā. Yassa sā paguṇā hoti, so rukkhampi disvā ettakāni ettha paṇṇānīti jānāti. Kāveyyanti ‘‘cattārome, bhikkhave, kavī. Katame cattāro? Cintākavi, sutakavi, atthakavi, paṭibhānakavī’’ti (a. ni. 4.231). Imesaṃ catunnaṃ kavīnaṃ attano cintāvasena vā; ‘‘vessantaro nāma rājā ahosī’’tiādīni sutvā sutavasena vā; imassa ayaṃ attho, evaṃ taṃ yojessāmīti evaṃ atthavasena vā; kiñcideva disvā tappaṭibhāgaṃ kattabbaṃ karissāmīti evaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānavasena vā; jīvikatthāya kabyakaraṇaṃ. Lokāyataṃ vuttameva.
26 26. “召请”是指:按照某个星宿,从某个家族把女孩带来给这个男孩,这就是做召请。“嫁娶”是指:按照某个星宿,把这个女孩嫁给某个男孩,说“这样她就会兴旺”,这就是做嫁娶。“和合”是指:做和合的事,说“今天星宿好,今天就和合吧,这样你们就不会分离”。“分离”是指:做分离的事,说“如果你们想分开,今天就分开吧,这样你们就不会再合在一起”。“收财”是指:说“今天把他人所欠或所施与的钱财聚集起来,今天聚集之后,它就成为稳固的”,这样聚集财富。“散财”是指:说“若欲以投资或放贷等运用财富,今日所运用者当得二倍、四倍”,这样运用财富。“作吉祥”是指:行令人喜爱之事,或作具足荣光之事。“作不吉祥”是指:与上述相反者。“作死胎”是指:为已受对抗、已衰弱、不稳固、已死之胎儿作治疗,意为为令其不再毁坏而施药。因为胎儿由风、虫、业三种原因而毁坏。其中,因风而毁坏者,则施以能息灭的清凉药;因虫而毁坏者,则为虫作对治;因业而毁坏者,则连诸佛也无法阻止。巴利
26.Āvāhanaṃ nāma imassa dārakassa asukakulato asukanakkhattena dārikaṃ ānethāti āvāhakaraṇaṃ. Vivāhananti imaṃ dārikaṃ asukassa nāma dārakassa asukanakkhattena detha, evamassā vuḍḍhi bhavissatīti vivāhakaraṇaṃ. Saṃvaraṇanti saṃvaraṇaṃ nāma ‘ajja nakkhattaṃ sundaraṃ, ajjeva samaggā hotha, iti vo viyogo na bhavissatī’ti evaṃ samaggakaraṇaṃ. Vivaraṇaṃ nāma ‘sace viyujjitukāmattha, ajjeva viyujjatha , iti vo puna saṃyogo na bhavissatī’ti evaṃ visaṃyogakaraṇaṃ. Saṅkiraṇanti ‘uṭṭhānaṃ vā iṇaṃ vā dinnaṃ dhanaṃ ajja saṅkaḍḍhatha, ajja saṅkaḍḍhitañhi taṃ thāvaraṃ hotī’ti evaṃ dhanapiṇḍāpanaṃ. Vikiraṇanti ‘sace payogauddhārādivasena dhanaṃ payojitukāmattha, ajja payojitaṃ diguṇacatugguṇaṃ hotī’ti evaṃ dhanapayojāpanaṃ. Subhagakaraṇanti piyamanāpakaraṇaṃ vā sassirīkakaraṇaṃ vā. Dubbhagakaraṇanti tabbiparītaṃ. Viruddhagabbhakaraṇanti viruddhassa vilīnassa aṭṭhitassa matassa gabbhassa karaṇaṃ. Puna avināsāya bhesajjadānanti attho. Gabbho hi vātena, pāṇakehi, kammunā cāti tīhi kāraṇehi vinassati. Tattha vātena vinassante nibbāpanīyaṃ sītalaṃ bhesajjaṃ deti, pāṇakehi vinassante pāṇakānaṃ paṭikammaṃ karoti, kammunā vinassante pana buddhāpi paṭibāhituṃ na sakkonti.
舌缚:用咒语把舌头绑住。颚缚:用口缚咒把颚骨绑住,使他们无法活动下巴。手咒:为了让手翻转而念的咒语。据说,念这个咒语的人站在七步之外,对方就会翻动手把东西扔出去。耳咒:为了让耳朵听不到声音而念的咒语。据说,念了这个咒语之后,在裁判的地方想说什么就说什么,对手听不到,也就无法回应。镜问:把天神请到镜中然后提问。童女问:把天神请到童女身上然后提问。天问:把天神请到女仆身上然后提问。侍奉太阳:为了谋生而侍奉太阳。侍奉大天:同样,为了谋生而侍奉大梵天。喷焰:用咒语从口中喷出火焰。迎请吉祥天:用“来吧,吉祥天,请安住在我头上”这样的话,用头来迎请吉祥天。巴利
Jivhānibandhananti mantena jivhāya bandhakaraṇaṃ. Hanusaṃhanananti mukhabandhamantena yathā hanukaṃ cāletuṃ na sakkonti, evaṃ bandhakaraṇaṃ. Hatthābhijappananti hatthānaṃ parivattanatthaṃ mantajappanaṃ. Tasmiṃ kira mante sattapadantare ṭhatvā jappite itaro hatthe parivattetvā khipati. Kaṇṇajappananti kaṇṇehi saddaṃ assavanatthāya vijjāya jappanaṃ. Taṃ kira jappitvā vinicchayaṭṭhāne yaṃ icchati, taṃ bhaṇati, paccatthiko taṃ na suṇāti, tato paṭivacanaṃ sampādetuṃ na sakkoti. Ādāsapañhanti ādāse devataṃ otāretvā pañhapucchanaṃ. Kumārikapañhanti kumārikāya sarīre devataṃ otāretvā pañhapucchanaṃ. Devapañhanti dāsiyā sarīre devataṃ otāretvā pañhapucchanaṃ. Ādiccupaṭṭhānanti jīvikatthāya ādiccapāricariyā. Mahatupaṭṭhānanti tatheva mahābrahmapāricariyā. Abbhujjalananti mantena mukhato aggijālānīharaṇaṃ. Sirivhāyananti ‘‘ehi siri, mayhaṃ sire patiṭṭhāhī’’ti evaṃ sirena siriyā avhāyanaṃ.
27 27. 「安抚业」:去天神所在的地方,如果我这件事情能成功,我就会用这样那样的供品来供养你们——这是事情成功时应当做的承诺安抚之事。等那件事成功之后再去履行,就叫「誓愿业」。「地屋业」:住在地屋里,然后使用所持的咒语。「男术」和「黄门术」:这里,男指男人,黄门指黄门。把黄门变成男人的做法叫「男术」,把男人变成黄门的做法叫「黄门术」。不过做这种事只能让他变得没有欲望,并不能让性别特征消失。「地基业」:在还没建地基的地方盖房子。「地基遍作」:说“把这些那些拿来”,然后做地基祭祀。「漱口」:用水清洁口腔。「沐浴」:替别人洗澡。「火供」:为他们烧火供养。「催吐」:给药之后让他吐出来。「泻下」也是同样的道理。「上泻」:把体内的污秽从上面排出去。「下泻」:把体内的污秽从下面排出去。「头泻」:从头部排出。「耳油」:为了绑耳朵或者治伤口而熬的药油。「眼药油」:点在眼睛上的油。「鼻药」:用油调好之后滴鼻子。「药墨」:能去掉两三层膜的眼药墨。「清凉药墨」:用来消炎清凉的药墨。「杆茅术」:用杆茅治病的医术。「手术」:外科手术。「小儿科」:叫做小儿科的治疗。「施用根药」:这里说的是身体方面的治疗。「撤药」:给了碱剂之类的药,等对应的疮口好了之后,再把那些药撤掉。巴利
27.Santikammanti devaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā sace me idaṃ nāma samijjhissati, tumhākaṃ iminā ca iminā ca upahāraṃ karissāmīti samiddhikāle kattabbaṃ santipaṭissavakammaṃ. Tasmiṃ pana samiddhe tassa karaṇaṃ paṇidhikammaṃ nāma. Bhūrikammanti bhūrighare vasitvā gahitamantassa payogakaraṇaṃ. Vassakammaṃ vossakammanti ettha vassoti puriso, vossoti paṇḍako . Iti vossassa vassakaraṇaṃ vassakammaṃ, vassassa vossakaraṇaṃ vossakammaṃ. Taṃ pana karonto acchandikabhāvamattaṃ pāpeti, na liṅgaṃ antaradhāpetuṃ sakkoti. Vatthukammanti akatavatthusmiṃ gehapatiṭṭhāpanaṃ. Vatthuparikammanti ‘‘idañcidañcāharathā’’ti vatvā vatthubalikammakaraṇaṃ. Ācamananti udakena mukhasuddhikaraṇaṃ. Nhāpananti aññesaṃ nhāpanaṃ. Juhananti tesaṃ atthāya aggijuhanaṃ. Vamananti yogaṃ datvā vamanakaraṇaṃ. Virecanepi eseva nayo. Uddhaṃvirecananti uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ. Adhovirecananti adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇaṃ. Sīsavirecananti sirovirecanaṃ. Kaṇṇatelanti kaṇṇānaṃ bandhanatthaṃ vā vaṇaharaṇatthaṃ vā bhesajjatelapacanaṃ. Nettatappananti akkhitappanatelaṃ. Natthukammanti telena yojetvā natthukaraṇaṃ. Añjananti dve vā tīṇi vā paṭalāni nīharaṇasamatthaṃ khārañjanaṃ. Paccañjananti nibbāpanīyaṃ sītalabhesajjañjanaṃ. Sālākiyanti salākavejjakammaṃ. Sallakattiyanti sallakattavejjakammaṃ. Dārakatikicchā vuccati komārabhaccavejjakammaṃ. Mūlabhesajjānaṃ anuppādananti iminā kāyatikicchanaṃ dasseti. Osadhīnaṃ paṭimokkhoti khārādīni datvā tadanurūpe vaṇe gate tesaṃ apanayanaṃ.
关于过去际的常见论者的解说巴利
Pubbantakappikasassatavādavaṇṇanā
28 28. 这样,按照梵天授所说的称赞,依着义理脉络详细解释了三种戒之后,现在按照比丘僧所说的称赞,依着义理脉络,以“比丘们,还有别的甚深、难见的法”等这样的方式,开始阐明空性。其中,“法”这个词,在功德、教说、经教、无众生等这些用法中都适用。巴利
28. Evaṃ brahmadattena vuttavaṇṇassa anusandhivasena tividhaṃ sīlaṃ vitthāretvā idāni bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇassa anusandhivasena – ‘‘atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā duddasā’’tiādinā nayena suññatāpakāsanaṃ ārabhi. Tattha dhammāti guṇe, desanāyaṃ, pariyattiyaṃ, nissatteti evamādīsu dhammasaddo vattati.
法确实不会和非法有相同的果报。
非法把人带向地狱,正法让人到达善趣。巴利
‘‘Na hi dhammo adhammo ca, ubho samavipākino; Adhammo nirayaṃ neti, dhammo pāpeti suggati’’nti. (theragā. 304);
在“非法导向地狱,正法导向善趣”这类句子里,“法”指的是功德。在“诸比丘,我要为你们讲说初善之法”这类句子里,指的是教说。在“比丘在这里学习法——契经、应颂”这类句子里,指的是圣典。在“那时有诸法,有诸蕴”这类句子里,指的是非众生。而在这里,“法”指的是功德。所以,“诸比丘,如来确实有其他功德”这句话的意思应当这样理解。巴利
Ādīsu hi guṇe dhammasaddo. ‘‘Dhammaṃ, vo bhikkhave, desessāmi ādikalyāṇa’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.420) desanāyaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇāti suttaṃ , geyya’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pariyattiyaṃ. ‘‘Tasmiṃ kho pana samaye dhammā honti, khandhā hontī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 121) nissatte. Idha pana guṇe vattati. Tasmā atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva tathāgatassa guṇāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
甚深:就像大海一样,除了如来以外,其他人的智慧就像蚊子的嘴尖,根本无法触及、无法立足,所以是难见的。正因为难见,所以难以觉悟。因为一切热恼都已寂灭,所以是寂静的;也因为行于寂静的所缘,所以也是寂静的。因为具有不令人餍足的意义,所以是殊胜的,就像味道美妙的食物一样。因为是最高智慧的行境,所以不是思辨所能触及的,即非思辨所行境。微妙:因为其本质细密。因为不是愚者的行境,唯有智者才能了知,所以是唯智者所能了知的。巴利
Gambhīrāti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra tathāgatā aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā, gambhīrattāyeva duddasā. Duddasattāyeva duranubodhā. Nibbutasabbapariḷāhattā santā, santārammaṇesu pavattanatopi santā. Atittikaraṇaṭṭhena paṇītā, sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Uttamañāṇavisayattā na takkena avacaritabbāti atakkāvacarā. Nipuṇāti saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā. Bālānaṃ avisayattā, paṇḍitehiyeva veditabbāti paṇḍitavedanīyā.
如来亲自以神通证悟之后所宣说的那些法:意思是,如来不依赖他人,自己以殊胜的智慧亲自现证之后,宣说、阐明、讲说、开示这些法。“由于那些”:是由于哪些功德法。“如实”:就是按照真实的样子。“正在正确地赞叹的人会宣说”:想要赞叹如来功德的人会正确地宣说,能够毫无遗漏地宣说,这就是意思。那么,被世尊如此赞叹的法到底是什么呢?是一切知智。如果是这样,为什么用复数来表达呢?因为此智与多种心相应,也因为具有多种所缘。此智是在四种与智相应的大唯作心中获得的,对它来说,没有任何一法不是所缘。正如所说:“能知过去的一切,所以是一切知智;于彼没有障碍,所以是无障智”等等。因此,由于与多种心相应、由于一再生起,也由于有多种所缘,所以用了复数的表述。巴利
Ye tathāgato sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetīti ye dhamme tathāgato anaññaneyyo hutvā sayameva abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ katvā pavedeti, dīpeti, katheti, pakāsetīti attho. Yehīti yehi guṇadhammehi. Yathābhuccanti yathābhūtaṃ. Vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamānā vadeyyunti tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vattukāmā sammā vadeyyuṃ, ahāpetvā vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyunti attho. Katame ca pana te dhammā bhagavatā evaṃ thomitāti? Sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Yadi evaṃ, kasmā bahuvacananiddeso katoti? Puthucittasamāyogato ceva, puthuārammaṇato ca. Tañhi catūsu ñāṇasampayuttamahākiriyacittesu labbhati, na cassa koci dhammo ārammaṇaṃ nāma na hoti. Yathāha – ‘‘atītaṃ sabbaṃ jānātīti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, tattha āvaraṇaṃ natthīti anāvaraṇañāṇa’’ntiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.120). Iti puthucittasamāyogato punappunaṃ uppattivasena puthuārammaṇato ca bahuvacananiddeso katoti.
“是另外的”这句话在这里是用来作界定区分的,应当把它和每一个词结合起来理解:“是另外的,不同于离杀生等学处;是甚深的,而非浅显的。”因为声闻波罗蜜智虽然是甚深的,但辟支菩提智比它更深——在这里并没有作这种区分;而一切知智又比辟支菩提智更深——在那里也没有作这种区分;可是再也没有比一切知智更深的东西了,所以“是甚深的”这一区分才成立。同样,“是难见的”“是难觉悟的”也应当这样理解。巴利
‘‘Aññevā’’ti idaṃ panettha vavatthāpanavacanaṃ, ‘‘aññeva, na pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo. Gambhīrāva na uttānā’’ti evaṃ sabbapadehi yojetabbaṃ. Sāvakapāramīñāṇañhi gambhīraṃ, paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ pana tato gambhīrataranti tattha vavatthānaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇañca tatopi gambhīrataranti tatthāpi vavatthānaṃ natthi, ito panaññaṃ gambhīrataraṃ natthi; tasmā gambhīrā vāti vavatthānaṃ labbhati. Tathā duddasāva duranubodhā vāti sabbaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“比丘们,哪些是这些呢?”——这是想问出那些法而提出的问题。“比丘们,有一些沙门、婆罗门……”等等,则是问题的回答。那么,为什么要这样开头呢?因为诸佛一旦触及四个领域,他们的狮子吼就会变得极其宏大,智慧得以深入,佛陀智慧的广大得以显现,开示变得甚深,贯穿三相,与空相应。是哪四个领域呢?戒律的制定、范畴的界定、缘起的方式、教理的分类。因此,当事情发生时,对于“这是轻的,这是重的,这是可治的,这是不可治的,这是犯,这是无犯,这是断头罪,这是可出罪,这是可忏悔罪,这是世间所呵责的,这是施设所呵责的,对此事应这样制定”这样的学处制立,其他人没有力量或能力;这不是其他人的领域,唯是如来的领域。这样,当触及戒律的制定时,诸佛的狮子吼变得宏大,智慧深入……乃至与空相应。巴利
Katameca te bhikkhaveti ayaṃ pana tesaṃ dhammānaṃ kathetukamyatā pucchā. Santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇātiādi pucchāvissajjanaṃ. Kasmā panetaṃ evaṃ āraddhanti ce? Buddhānañhi cattāri ṭhānāni patvā gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati, buddhañāṇassa mahantabhāvo paññāyati, desanā gambhīrā hoti, tilakkhaṇāhatā, suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttā. Katamāni cattāri? Vinayapaññattiṃ, bhūmantaraṃ, paccayākāraṃ, samayantaranti. Tasmā – ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garukaṃ, idaṃ satekicchaṃ, idaṃ atekicchaṃ, ayaṃ āpatti, ayaṃ anāpatti, ayaṃ chejjagāminī, ayaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminī, ayaṃ desanāgāminī, ayaṃ lokavajjā, ayaṃ paṇṇattivajjā, imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ idaṃ paññapetabba’’nti yaṃ evaṃ otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ nāma, tattha aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi; avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo. Iti vinayapaññattiṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati…pe… suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
同样地,这些被称为四念处……中略……被称为圣八支道,被称为五蕴,被称为十二处,被称为十八界,被称为四圣谛,被称为二十二根,被称为九因,被称为四食,被称为七触,被称为七受,被称为七想,被称为七思,被称为七心。在这些法当中,有这么多是欲界法,有这么多是属于色界、无色界的法,有这么多是世间法,有这么多是出世间法——像这样,要把义理无穷、以二十四缘全面分别的阿毗达摩藏加以分别解说,其他人没有这个胆量或能力;这不是其他人能触及的范围,只有如来才能触及。就这样,当触及范畴的界定时,诸佛的狮子吼就变得广大,智慧随之深入……中略……与空相应。巴利
Tathā ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā nāma…pe… ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo nāma, pañca khandhā nāma, dvādasa āyatanāni nāma, aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo nāma, cattāri ariyasaccāni nāma, bāvīsatindriyāni nāma, nava hetū nāma, cattāro āhārā nāma, satta phassā nāma, satta vedanā nāma, satta saññā nāma, satta cetanā nāma, satta cittāni nāma. Etesu ettakā kāmāvacarā dhammā nāma, ettakā rūpāvacaraarūpāvacarapariyāpannā dhammā nāma, ettakā lokiyā dhammā nāma, ettakā lokuttarā dhammā nāmāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānaṃ anantanayaṃ abhidhammapiṭakaṃ vibhajitvā kathetuṃ aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi, avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo. Iti bhūmantaraparicchedaṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati…pe… suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
同样地,这个无明以九种方式成为行的缘:它作为生起而成为缘,作为转起而成为缘,作为相而成为缘,作为造作而成为缘,作为结合而成为缘,作为障碍而成为缘,作为集起而成为缘,作为因而成为缘,作为缘而成为缘。行等对识等也是如此。正如经中所说:“在把握缘的时候,慧如何成为法住智?无明对于行,有生起住立、转起住立、相住立、造作住立、结合住立、障碍住立、集起住立、因住立、缘住立——以这九种方式,无明是缘,行是缘所生;这两者都是缘所生,这样在把握缘的时候,慧就是法住智。无论过去时还是未来时,无明对于行都有生起住立……乃至……缘住立。生对于老死,有生起住立……乃至……缘住立——以这九种方式,生是缘,老死是缘所生;这两者都是缘所生,这样在把握缘的时候,慧就是法住智。”像这样,把随每一种法各自的缘性而转起的三轮、三时、三连结、四摄、二十行相的缘起加以分别解说,其他人没有这个力量或能力;这不是其他人的领域,只有如来的领域。因此,当触及缘起的方式时,诸佛的狮子吼就变得宏大,智慧深入……乃至与空相应。巴利
Tathā ayaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ navahākārehi paccayo hoti, uppādo hutvā paccayo hoti, pavattaṃ hutvā, nimittaṃ, āyūhanaṃ, saṃyogo, palibodho, samudayo, hetu, paccayo hutvā paccayo hoti, tathā saṅkhārādayo viññāṇādīnaṃ. Yathāha – ‘‘kathaṃ paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ? Avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhiti ca pavattaṭṭhiti ca, nimittaṭṭhiti ca, āyūhanaṭṭhiti ca, saṃyogaṭṭhiti ca, palibodhaṭṭhiti ca, samudayaṭṭhiti ca, hetuṭṭhiti ca, paccayaṭṭhiti ca, imehi navahākārehi avijjā paccayo, saṅkhārā paccayasamuppannā, ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ. Atītampi addhānaṃ, anāgatampi addhānaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādaṭṭhiti ca…pe… jāti jarāmaraṇassa uppādaṭṭhiti ca…pe… paccayaṭṭhiti ca, imehi navahākārehi jāti paccayo, jarāmaraṇaṃ paccayasamuppannaṃ, ubhopete dhammā paccayasamuppannāti paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.45). Evamimaṃ tassa tassa dhammassa tathā tathā paccayabhāvena pavattaṃ tivaṭṭaṃ tiyaddhaṃ tisandhiṃ catusaṅkhepaṃ vīsatākāraṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ vibhajitvā kathetuṃ aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi, avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo, iti paccayākāraṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati…pe… suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
同样地,有四种被称为常住论者的人,四种一分常住论者,四种有边无边论者,四种诡辩论者,两种无因生论者,十六种有想论者,八种无想论者,八种非想非非想论者,七种断灭论者,五种现法涅槃论者。他们依这个而执取这个——要把这六十二种邪见拆解开来、解开缠结、毫无混乱地宣说,其他人没有这个胆量或能力,这不是其他人的领域,只有如来的领域。这样,当遇到异宗见解时,诸佛的狮子吼就变得广大,智慧得以深入,佛陀智慧的广大就显现出来,说法变得深奥,贯穿着三相,与空相应。巴利
Tathā cattāro janā sassatavādā nāma, cattāro ekaccasassatavādā, cattāro antānantikā, cattāro amarāvikkhepikā, dve adhiccasamuppannikā, soḷasa saññīvādā, aṭṭha asaññīvādā, aṭṭha nevasaññīnāsaññīvādā, satta ucchedavādā, pañca diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā nāma. Te idaṃ nissāya idaṃ gaṇhantīti dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni bhinditvā nijjaṭaṃ niggumbaṃ katvā kathetuṃ aññesaṃ thāmo vā balaṃ vā natthi, avisayo esa aññesaṃ, tathāgatasseva visayo. Iti samayantaraṃ patvā buddhānaṃ gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hoti, ñāṇaṃ anupavisati, buddhañāṇassa mahantatā paññāyati, desanā gambhīrā hoti, tilakkhaṇāhatā, suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttāti.
不过在这里,另一种异宗见解出现了。因此,为了显示一切知智的广大,也为了通过说法来揭示和阐明空性,法王进入这个异宗见解,以“诸比丘,有一些沙门婆罗门……”这样开始了问答。巴利
Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne samayantaraṃ labbhati, tasmā sabbaññutaññāṇassa mahantabhāvadassanatthaṃ desanāya ca suññatāpakāsanavibhāvanatthaṃ samayantaraṃ anupavisanto dhammarājā – ‘‘santi, bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā’’ti evaṃ pucchāvissajjanaṃ ārabhi.
29 在这里,“有”就是存在、出现、可找到。“诸比丘”是称呼语。“有些”指一部分人。“沙门婆罗门”:因为出家修行而成为沙门,因为出身种姓而成为婆罗门;或者被世间普遍认可为沙门和婆罗门。构想过去、分别过去而执取的人,就是“前际论者”;或者他们持有对前际的构想,所以叫“前际论者”。在这里,“际”这个字出现在边际、内部、界限、低劣、终点、部分等意思中。比如在“肠满腹满”这类说法里,“际”指边际。在“他们游走于世间,被随从覆盖,内里不净而外表光鲜”这类说法里,指内部。在“腰带的内侧磨损”里也是这样。在“她到了绿地之边、道路之边、山岩之边、水之边”这类说法里,指界限。在“诸比丘,谋生方式中最低劣的,就是乞食”这类说法里,指低劣。在“这就是苦的终点”这类说法里,指最终的部分。因为一切因缘的灭尽,就是苦的最终部分,称为尽头。在“贤友,有身是一边”这类说法里,指部分。而在这里,“际”也是用在“部分”这个意思上。巴利
29. Tattha santīti atthi saṃvijjanti upalabbhanti. Bhikkhaveti ālapanavacanaṃ. Eketi ekacce. Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti pabbajjūpagatabhāvena samaṇā, jātiyā brāhmaṇā. Lokena vā samaṇāti ca brāhmaṇāti ca evaṃ sammatā. Pubbantaṃ kappetvā vikappetvā gaṇhantīti pubbantakappikā. Pubbantakappo vā etesaṃ atthīti pubbantakappikā. Tattha antoti ayaṃ saddo antaabbhantaramariyādalāmakaparabhāgakoṭṭhāsesu dissati. ‘‘Antapūro udarapūro’’tiādīsu hi ante antasaddo. ‘‘Caranti loke parivārachannā anto asuddhā bahi sobhamānā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.122) abbhantare. ‘‘Kāyabandhanassa anto jīrati (cūḷava. 278). ‘‘Sā haritantaṃ vā panthantaṃ vā selantaṃ vā udakantaṃ vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.304) mariyādāyaṃ. ‘‘Antamidaṃ, bhikkhave, jīvikānaṃ yadidaṃ piṇḍolya’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.80) lāmake. ‘‘Esevanto dukkhassā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.51) parabhāge. Sabbapaccayasaṅkhayo hi dukkhassa parabhāgo koṭīti vuccati. ‘‘Sakkāyo kho, āvuso, eko anto’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 6.61) koṭṭhāse. Svāyaṃ idhāpi koṭṭhāse vattati.
“劫”这个词也出现在很多不同的含义里,比如“请世尊住世一劫”(《长部》2.167)、“有时间躺下”(《增支部》8.80)、“用已作净的布缝补未作净的布”(《波逸提》371),像这样在寿量劫、小劫、律劫等多种含义中使用。在这里应当知道,它指的是渴爱和见。也有这样的说法:“劫有两种,就是渴爱劫和见劫。”(《大义释》28)因此,基于渴爱和见,构想、分别过去的诸蕴而安住的人,就称为“前际执想者”,这里的含义应当这样理解。对于这些如此构想前际而安住的人,由于一次又一次生起随顺前际的见,所以称为“前际随见者”。他们持有这样的见,依止、缘于那个前际,也让其他人成为持见者,并以十八种事由宣说种种胜解语句。巴利
Kappasaddopi – ‘‘tiṭṭhatu, bhante bhagavā kappaṃ’’ (dī. ni. 2.167), ‘‘atthi kappo nipajjituṃ’’ (a. ni. 8.80), ‘‘kappakatena akappakataṃ saṃsibbitaṃ hotī’’ti, (pāci. 371) evaṃ āyukappalesakappavinayakappādīsu sambahulesu atthesu vattati. Idha taṇhādiṭṭhīsu vattatīti veditabbo. Vuttampi cetaṃ – ‘‘kappāti dve kappā, taṇhākappo ca diṭṭhikappo cā’’ti (mahāni. 28). Tasmā taṇhādiṭṭhivasena atītaṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsaṃ kappetvā pakappetvā ṭhitāti pubbantakappikāti evamettha attho veditabbo. Tesaṃ evaṃ pubbantaṃ kappetvā ṭhitānaṃ punappunaṃ uppajjanavasena pubbantameva anugatā diṭṭhīti pubbantānudiṭṭhino. Te evaṃdiṭṭhino taṃ pubbantaṃ ārabbha āgamma paṭicca aññampi janaṃ diṭṭhigatikaṃ karontā anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadanti aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi.
在这里,“种种”指多种多样。“论调”指各种说法、言辞。或者,因为诸见超越真实之义、不按如实本性去把握,而是执取后生起,所以称为“胜解”。胜解的说法就是“论调”,意思是表达见地的言辞。“以十八种事由”就是以十八种原因。巴利
Tattha anekavihitānīti anekavidhāni. Adhimuttipadānīti adhivacanapadāni. Atha vā bhūtaṃ atthaṃ abhibhavitvā yathāsabhāvato aggahetvā pavattanato adhimuttiyoti diṭṭhiyo vuccanti. Adhimuttīnaṃ padāni adhimuttipadāni, diṭṭhidīpakāni vacanānīti attho. Aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhīti aṭṭhārasahi kāraṇehi.
30 现在,为了说明他们以哪十八种事由宣说,针对他们想问的提问,以“那些尊敬的……”这样的方式提问后,为了分别显示那些事由,而说“诸比丘,有……”等。其中,他们依此而说,所以叫“说”,这是恶见的同义词。持有“常”之说的人们,就是“常住论者”,意思是执持常见的人。依照同样的方式,此后其他类似词语的含义也应这样理解。“常住的我和世间”:他们执取色等当中的某一种为“我”和“世间”,然后把它安立为常住、不死、恒常、稳固。正如所说:“他们安立‘色是我,也是世间,而且是常’为我及世间;同样地,安立受、想、行、识是我,也是世间,而且是常,为我及世间。”巴利
30. Idāni yehi aṭṭhārasahi vatthūhi abhivadanti, tesaṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchāya ‘‘te ca kho bhonto’’tiādinā nayena pucchitvā tāni vatthūni vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘santi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha vadanti etenāti vādo, diṭṭhigatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sassato vādo etesanti sassatavādā, sassatadiṭṭhinoti attho. Eteneva nayena ito paresampi evarūpānaṃ padānaṃ attho veditabbo. Sassataṃ attānañca lokañcāti rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā taṃ sassataṃ amaraṃ niccaṃ dhuvaṃ paññapenti. Yathāha – ‘‘rūpaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapenti tathā vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ attā ceva loko ca sassato cāti attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti.
31 在“热勤”等说法里,精进因为能烧灼烦恼,所以叫“热勤”;这精进因为能策励,所以叫“策励”;因为反复投入,所以叫“专修”。这样,依止、依靠、缘于这三种精进,就是这里的意思。“不放逸”说的是不离开念。“如理作意”说的是方法作意、根本作意,从意义上说就是智。因为安住在这样的作意中时,宿命通就能成就,所以这里指的就是这种作意。因此,依止精进、念和智,就是这里简要的含义。“如是类”就是这样的种类。“心定”就是心定。触及就是获得、证得。对于“当心定之时”等语,也就是以那种定而善加安立、妥善安住之心,关于“种种宿命”等义,在《清净道论》中已有说明。巴利
31.Ātappamanvāyātiādīsu vīriyaṃ kilesānaṃ ātāpanabhāvena ātappanti vuttaṃ. Tadeva padahanavasena padhānaṃ. Punappunaṃ yuttavasena anuyogoti. Evaṃ tippabhedaṃ vīriyaṃ anvāya āgamma paṭiccāti attho. Appamādo vuccati satiyā avippavāso. Sammā manasikāroti upāyamanasikāro, pathamanasikāro, atthato ñāṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yasmiñhi manasikāre ṭhitassa pubbenivāsānussati ñāṇaṃ ijjhati, ayaṃ imasmiṃ ṭhāne manasikāroti adhippeto. Tasmā vīriyañca satiñca ñāṇañca āgammāti ayamettha saṅkhepattho. Tathārūpanti tathājātikaṃ. Cetosamādhinti cittasamādhiṃ. Phusatīti vindati paṭilabhati. Yathā samāhite citteti yena samādhinā sammā āhite suṭṭhu ṭhapite cittamhi anekavihitaṃpubbenivāsantiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge vutto.
他这样说:那个人成就了禅那的威力之后,却成了持邪见的人,就这样宣称。不孕:就像不孕的母畜、不结果的棕榈树等一样,不能给任何人带来结果。借此否定那些被执取为我和世间的禅那等能产生色等事物的说法。如山般稳固:就是像山峰一样安住。如柱坚立:就是像门柱一样立着不动。就像深深埋入地下的门柱一样,纹丝不动地立着,这就是安住的意思。这两个比喻都在说明世间不会毁灭。不过有些人把经文读成如芦苇内芯般竖立,并解释说:像芦苇中的芯那样安住。这里的意思是:所谓出生这件事,就像从芦苇中抽出的芯一样,本来就已经存在,只是显现出来而已。又因为像芯柱一样坚立不动,那些有情就这样流转,从此处到别处去。巴利
So evamāhāti so evaṃ jhānānubhāvasampanno hutvā diṭṭhigatiko evaṃ vadati. Vañjhoti vañjhapasuvañjhatālādayo viya aphalo kassaci ajanakoti. Etena ‘‘attā’’ti ca ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahitānaṃ jhānādīnaṃ rūpādijanakabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Pabbatakūṭaṃ viya ṭhitoti kūṭaṭṭho. Esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitoti esikaṭṭhāyī viya hutvā ṭhitoti esikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito. Yathā sunikhāto esikatthambho niccalo tiṭṭhati, evaṃ ṭhitoti attho. Ubhayenapi lokassa vināsābhāvaṃ dīpeti. Keci pana īsikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhitoti pāḷiṃ vatvā muñje īsikā viya ṭhitoti vadanti . Tatrāyamadhippāyo – yadidaṃ jāyatīti vuccati, taṃ muñjato īsikā viya vijjamānameva nikkhamati. Yasmā ca īsikaṭṭhāyiṭṭhito, tasmā teva sattā sandhāvanti, ito aññattha gacchantīti attho.
“流转”是指一次又一次地到处轮转。“死去”是指就这样走向消亡。“再生”也是同样的意思。不过,在义注中,这个人先前说“我和世间是常住的”,现在又说“那些有情流转、死去、再生”等等,这样一来,这个持邪见的人就用自己的话推翻了自己的主张。持邪见者的见解从来不是固定的,就像埋在灰堆里的木桩一样摇来晃去;又像疯子的篮子里,糕点碎块和粪便、牛粪之类混在一起,他的见解也是这样,好的坏的全都搅在一块儿。在“确实等同于常住”这句话里,他们把“常住”理解为像大地一样永恒存在,也理解为像须弥山、日月一样永恒存在,并且认为自己跟这些一样,所以说“确实等同于常住”。巴利
Saṃsarantīti aparāparaṃ sañcaranti. Cavantīti evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti. Tathā upapajjantīti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pubbe ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti vatvā idāni te ca sattā sandhāvantītiādinā vacanena ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko attanāyeva attano vādaṃ bhindati, diṭṭhigatikassa dassanaṃ nāma na nibaddhaṃ, thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇu viya cañcalaṃ, ummattakapacchiyaṃ pūvakhaṇḍagūthagomayādīni viya cettha sundarampi asundarampi hoti yevāti vuttaṃ. Atthitveva sassatisamanti ettha sassatīti niccaṃ vijjamānatāya mahāpathaviṃva maññati, tathā sinerupabbatacandimasūriye. Tato tehi samaṃ attānaṃ maññamānā atthi tveva sassatisamanti vadanti.
现在,为了证明“我及世间是常”这类主张,而说明它的理由,经文说:“那是什么原因呢?因为我依于精勤……”等等。其中,“由此我对此了知”的意思是:我通过这种殊胜的证得,直接现量了知这件事,并不是仅仅凭着信仰就这么说。这里的“m”只是为了让词与词连起来才说的。“比丘们,这是第一种处”中的“四种事”是指:在“事”这个词所说的四种处中,这是第一种处;也就是说,能回忆十万生,这就是第一个原因。巴利
Idāni sassato attā ca loko cātiādikāya paṭiññāya sādhanatthaṃ hetuṃ dassento ‘‘taṃ kissa hetu? Ahañhi ātappamanvāyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha imināmahaṃ etaṃ jānāmīti iminā visesādhigamena ahaṃ etaṃ paccakkhato jānāmi, na kevalaṃ saddhāmattakeneva vadāmīti dasseti, makāro panettha padasandhikaraṇatthaṃ vutto. Idaṃ, bhikkhave, paṭhamaṃ ṭhānanti catūhi vatthūhīti vatthusaddena vuttesu catūsu ṭhānesu idaṃ paṭhamaṃ ṭhānaṃ, idaṃ jātisatasahassamattānussaraṇaṃ paṭhamaṃ kāraṇanti attho.
32-33 32-33. 后面两种变式也是同样的方法。只不过这一变式是就回忆无量百千生来说的,另外两种则是就回忆十个成坏劫和四十个成坏劫来说的。因为钝根的外道只能回忆无量百千生,中等根器的人能回忆十个成坏劫,最利根的人能回忆四十个,再往上就不可能了。巴利
32-33. Upari vāradvayepi eseva nayo. Kevalañhi ayaṃ vāro anekajātisatasahassānussaraṇavasena vutto. Itare dasacattālīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappānussaraṇavasena. Mandapañño hi titthiyo anekajātisatasahassamattaṃ anussarati, majjhimapañño dasasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappāni, tikkhapañño cattālīsaṃ, na tato uddhaṃ.
34 第四种情况里,所谓“推论者”,就是会推论的人;或者因为他有推论,所以叫推论者。这是对那些经过推论、思考之后执取邪见的人的称呼。“具备思察的人”叫思察者。所谓思察,就是衡量、认可、接受。就像一个人先用木杖探一探水,然后再下水;同样,一个人经过衡量、认可、接受之后才执取某种见解,他就应该被理解为“思察者”。“被推论所打击”,就是被推论所冲击,意思是透过各种方式去推论。“跟随思察而行”,就是跟随上面所说那种思察而行。“自己涌现”,就是从自己涌现的自身智慧。“这样说”,就是执取常见之后这样说。巴利
34. Catutthavāre takkayatīti takkī, takko vā assa atthīti takkī. Takketvā vitakketvā diṭṭhigāhino etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Vīmaṃsāya samannāgatoti vīmaṃsī. Vīmaṃsā nāma tulanā ruccanā khamanā. Yathā hi puriso yaṭṭhiyā udakaṃ vīmaṃsitvā otarati, evameva yo tulayitvā ruccitvā khamāpetvā diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, so ‘‘vīmaṃsī’’ti veditabbo. Takkapariyāhatanti takkena pariyāhataṃ, tena tena pariyāyena takketvāti attho. Vīmaṃsānucaritanti tāya vuttappakārāya vīmaṃsāya anucaritaṃ. Sayaṃpaṭibhānanti attano paṭibhānamattasañjātaṃ. Evamāhāti sassatadiṭṭhiṃ gahetvā evaṃ vadati.
在这里,推论者有四类:随闻者、忆宿生者、得利养者、纯推论者。其中,有人听了“曾有位名叫须大拏的国王”这类说法后,就推论说:“既然世尊就是那位须大拏,那么我(自我)是常住的。”于是执取这种见解,这叫做随闻者。有人回忆起两生、三生之后,推论说:“过去我就是某某,所以我是常住的。”这叫做忆宿生者。有人因为得到利养,就推论说:“就像我现在快乐一样,过去也是这样,未来也会这样。”由此执取见解,这叫做得利养者。有人仅仅靠“这样存在时,这个就存在”这样的推论就执取见解,这叫做纯推论者。巴利
Tattha catubbidho takkī – anussutiko, jātissaro, lābhī, suddhatakkikoti. Tattha yo ‘‘vessantaro nāma rājā ahosī’’tiādīni sutvā ‘‘tena hi yadi vessantarova bhagavā, sassato attā’’ti takkayanto diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, ayaṃ anussutiko nāma. Dve tisso jātiyo saritvā – ‘‘ahameva pubbe asukasmiṃ nāma ahosiṃ, tasmā sassato attā’’ti takkayanto jātissaratakkiko nāma. Yo pana lābhitāya ‘‘yathā me idāni attā sukhī hoti, atītepi evaṃ ahosi, anāgatepi bhavissatī’’ti takkayitvā diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti, ayaṃ lābhītakkiko nāma. ‘‘Evaṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti takkamatteneva gaṇhanto pana suddhatakkiko nāma.
35 或者以这四种依据中的某一种:也就是在这四种依据里,用一种、两种或三种。除此之外没有别的:除了这些依据之外,对于安立常住论来说,再没有其他任何原因了。他就是这样发出不可退转的狮子吼。巴利
35.Etesaṃ vā aññatarenāti etesaṃyeva catunnaṃ vatthūnaṃ aññatarena ekena vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā. Natthi ito bahiddhāti imehi pana vatthūhi bahi aññaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇampi sassatapaññattiyā natthīti appaṭivattiyaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati.
36 比丘们,如来完全了知这个。比丘们,如来以种种方式了知这整个四种邪见。接着,为了说明他了知的方式,说了“这些是见处”等话。其中,邪见本身就是见处。此外,邪见的原因也是见处。正如经中所说:“哪八种见处?五蕴是见处,无明是见处,触是见处,想是见处,思惟是见处,不如理作意是见处,恶友是见处,从他人那里听来的声音是见处。”“蕴是因,蕴是缘,因为依止它而生起,所以蕴也是见处。无明是因……恶友是因。从他人那里听来的声音是因,从他人那里听来的声音是缘,因为依止它而生起,所以从他人那里听来的声音也是见处。”像这样执取:那些被称为见处的邪见,被这样执取、采纳、持续运作。像这样固持:因为内心没有疑惑,所以一再地执取、固持,最终认定“只有这是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”。而作为原因的见处,则是从所缘、从运作方式、从反复串习的角度被执取的,就像正在被执取时能让邪见生起那样;又因为看不到其中的过患,所以一再执取,成为坚固的执持。有这样的趣向:就是趣向地狱、畜生、饿鬼界这三种苦趣中的某一种。有这样的来世:这是前面那句话的另一种说法,意思是说有这样的后世。巴利
36.Tayidaṃ, bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānātīti bhikkhave, taṃ idaṃ catubbidhampi diṭṭhigataṃ tathāgato nānappakārato jānāti. Tato taṃ pajānanākāraṃ dassento ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānātiādimāha. Tattha diṭṭhiyova diṭṭhiṭṭhānā nāma. Api ca diṭṭhīnaṃ kāraṇampi diṭṭhiṭṭhānameva. Yathāha ‘‘katamāni aṭṭha diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni? Khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, avijjāpi, phassopi , saññāpi, vitakkopi, ayonisomanasikāropi, pāpamittopi, paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti. ‘‘Khandhā hetu, khandhā paccayo diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena, evaṃ khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ. Avijjā hetu…pe… pāpamitto hetu. Paratoghoso hetu, paratoghoso paccayo diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ upādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena, evaṃ paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.124). Evaṃgahitāti diṭṭhisaṅkhātā tāva diṭṭhiṭṭhānā – ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti evaṃgahitā ādinnā, pavattitāti attho. Evaṃparāmaṭṭhāti nirāsaṅkacittatāya punappunaṃ āmaṭṭhā parāmaṭṭhā, ‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’nti pariniṭṭhāpitā . Kāraṇasaṅkhātā pana diṭṭhiṭṭhānā yathā gayhamānā diṭṭhiyo samuṭṭhāpenti, evaṃ ārammaṇavasena ca pavattanavasena ca āsevanavasena ca gahitā. Anādīnavadassitāya punappunaṃ gahaṇavasena parāmaṭṭhā. Evaṃgatikāti evaṃ nirayatiracchānapettivisayagatikānaṃ aññataragatikā. Evaṃ abhisamparāyāti idaṃ purimapadasseva vevacanaṃ, evaṃvidhaparalokāti vuttaṃ hoti.
如来不仅了知那种有原因、有投生趋向的邪见,还了知那一切,并且了知比这更超胜的戒、定以及一切知智。他不执取那了知:虽然他了知如此无上的殊胜,却不以“我了知”的渴爱、邪见、我慢的执取去执取它。由于不执取,他自己亲身证知了寂灭:这样不执取的人,因为不执取的缘故,那些执取的烦恼便自行寂灭了。这是在说明:诸比丘,对如来而言,涅槃是清晰明了的。巴利
Tañca tathāgato pajānātīti na kevalañca tathāgato sakāraṇaṃ sagatikaṃ diṭṭhigatameva pajānāti, atha kho tañca sabbaṃ pajānāti, tato ca uttaritaraṃ sīlañceva samādhiñca sabbaññutaññāṇañca pajānāti. Tañca pajānanaṃ na parāmasatīti tañca evaṃvidhaṃ anuttaraṃ visesaṃ pajānantopi ahaṃ pajānāmīti taṇhādiṭṭhimānaparāmāsavasena tañca na parāmasati. Aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditāti evaṃ aparāmasato cassa aparāmāsapaccayā sayameva attanāyeva tesaṃ parāmāsakilesānaṃ nibbuti viditā. Pākaṭaṃ, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa nibbānanti dasseti.
现在,为了说明如来是依照怎样的修行方式证得那种寂灭的,世尊在开示以那些受本身作为修行所缘时,说了“了知诸受的集起”等话。那些外道正是对这些受生起贪染,心里想着“我们要在这里享乐,我们要在那里享乐”,由此走进了见解的密林。其中,“如实了知”的意思是:以五种相如实了知诸受的集起——也就是“由于无明的集起而有受的集起,以因缘集起的意义,见到受蕴的生起;由于渴爱的集起而有受的集起,以因缘集起的意义,见到受蕴的生起;由于业的集起而有受的集起,以因缘集起的意义,见到受蕴的生起;由于触的集起而有受的集起,以因缘集起的意义,见到受蕴的生起”,见到生起的相,也就是见到受蕴的生起。以这五种相如实了知诸受的集起之后,又以五种相如实了知诸受的息灭——“由于无明的灭尽而有受的灭尽,以因缘灭尽的意义,见到受蕴的坏灭;由于渴爱的灭尽而有受的灭尽,以因缘灭尽的意义,见到受蕴的坏灭;由于业的灭尽而有受的灭尽,以因缘灭尽的意义,见到受蕴的坏灭;由于触的灭尽而有受的灭尽,以因缘灭尽的意义,见到受蕴的坏灭”,见到变异的相,也就是见到受蕴的坏灭。如此如实了知乐味——“缘于受而生起的快乐与喜悦,这就是受的乐味。”如此如实了知过患——“受是无常的、是苦的、是变易之法,这就是受的过患。”如此如实了知出离——“对受的欲贪的调伏、欲贪的舍断,这就是受的出离。”由于已经离开了欲贪,如来无所执取,因无所执取而解脱。比丘们,如果存在某种执取,如来就会执取某个东西,并且因为被执取而成为蕴;但那种执取不存在,所以如来不执取任何法而解脱。比丘们,这就是如来。巴利
Idāni yathāpaṭipannena tathāgatena sā nibbuti adhigatā, taṃ paṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ yāsu vedanāsu rattā titthiyā ‘‘idha sukhino bhavissāma, ettha sukhino bhavissāmā’’ti diṭṭhigahanaṃ pavisanti, tāsaṃyeva vedanānaṃ vasena kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhanto vedanānaṃ samudayañcātiādimāha. Tattha yathābhūtaṃ viditvāti ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, taṇhāsamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, kammasamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati, phassasamudayā vedanāsamudayoti paccayasamudayaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passati (paṭi. ma. 1.50). Nibbattilakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa udayaṃ passatī’’ti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena vedanānaṃ samudayaṃ yathābhūtaṃ viditvā; ‘‘avijjānirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati, taṇhānirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati , kammanirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati, phassanirodhā vedanānirodhoti paccayanirodhaṭṭhena vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passati. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇaṃ passantopi vedanākkhandhassa vayaṃ passatī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50) imesaṃ pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānaṃ vasena vedanānaṃ atthaṅgamaṃ yathābhūtaṃ viditvā, ‘‘yaṃ vedanaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhaṃ somanassaṃ, ayaṃ vedanāya assādo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.26) evaṃ assādañca yathābhūtaṃ viditvā, ‘‘yaṃ vedanā aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā, ayaṃ vedanāya ādīnavo’’ti evaṃ ādīnavañca yathābhūtaṃ viditvā, ‘‘yo vedanāya chandarāgavinayo chandarāgappahānaṃ, idaṃ vedanāya nissaraṇa’’nti evaṃ nissaraṇañca yathābhūtaṃ viditvā vigatachandarāgatāya anupādāno anupādāvimutto, bhikkhave, tathāgato; yasmiṃ upādāne sati kiñci upādiyeyya, upādinnattā ca khandho bhaveyya, tassa abhāvā kiñci dhammaṃ anupādiyitvāva vimutto bhikkhave tathāgatoti.
37 比丘们,这些就是那些法:当我问“比丘们,哪些法是甚深的”时,所明确开示的“比丘们,这些就是那些法,如来既了知那些法,也了知比那些更超胜的”——这些就是一切知智之法,它们是甚深、难见的……乃至……应当了知为唯智者所能体验的。对于这些法,无论是凡夫,还是须陀洹等圣者中的任何一位,都不能如实地说出如来的功德,只有如来自己正确地宣说时,才能如实地说出如来的功德。因此,即使只是这样发问,所问的也正是全部知智;即使只是这样作答,所答的也正是全部知智。而在中间,则是对各种见解的分别解说。巴利
37.Ime kho te, bhikkhaveti ye te ahaṃ – ‘‘katame, ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā’’ti apucchiṃ, ‘‘ime kho te, bhikkhave, tañca tathāgato pajānāti tato ca uttaritaraṃ pajānātī’’ti evaṃ niddiṭṭhā sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā gambhīrā duddasā…pe… paṇḍitavedanīyāti veditabbā. Yehi tathāgatassa neva puthujjano, na sotāpannādīsu aññataro vaṇṇaṃ yathābhūtaṃ vattuṃ sakkoti, atha kho tathāgatova yathābhūtaṃ vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyyāti evaṃ pucchamānenāpi sabbaññutaññāṇameva puṭṭhaṃ, niyyātentenāpi tadeva niyyātitaṃ, antarā pana diṭṭhiyo vibhattāti.
部分常住论的注释巴利
Ekaccasassatavādavaṇṇanā
38 部分常住论者,就是持部分常住论的人。他们有两种:主张有情部分常住的,和主张行部分常住的。这两种都包括在这里面了。巴利
38.Ekaccasassatikāti ekaccasassatavādā. Te duvidhā honti – sattekaccasassatikā, saṅkhārekaccasassatikāti. Duvidhāpi idha gahitāyeva.
39 “Yanti”只是一个不变词。“Kadāci”指在某个时候。“Karahaci”是它的同义词。“Dīghassa addhuno”指长时间。“Accayena”指经过。“Saṃvaṭṭati”指毁灭。“Yebhuyyena”是就那些转生到上方梵天界或无色界的天众之外其余的天众而说的。因为是从禅那之意所生,所以叫“意所成”。以喜为食,所以叫“以喜为食”。自身发光,所以叫“自光明”。在空中行走,所以叫“行于空中”。住在殊妙的园林、宫殿、如意树等处,所以叫“住于殊妙处”;或者以殊妙、令人悦意的衣着装饰而安住,也叫“住于殊妙处”。“长久之时”指最长八劫。巴利
39.Yanti nipātamattaṃ. Kadācīti kismiñci kāle. Karahacīti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Dīghassaaddhunoti dīghassa kālassa. Accayenāti atikkamena . Saṃvaṭṭatīti vinassati. Yebhuyyenāti ye uparibrahmalokesu vā arūpesu vā nibbattanti, tadavasese sandhāya vuttaṃ. Jhānamanena nibbattattā manomayā. Pīti tesaṃ bhakkho āhāroti pītibhakkhā. Attanova tesaṃ pabhāti sayaṃpabhā. Antalikkhe carantīti antalikkhacarā. Subhesu uyyānavimānakapparukkhādīsu tiṭṭhantīti, subhaṭṭhāyino subhā vā manorammavatthābharaṇā hutvā tiṭṭhantīti subhaṭṭhāyino. Ciraṃ dīghamaddhānanti ukkaṃsena aṭṭha kappe.
40 「形成」就是「安住」。所谓「空无的梵天宫殿」,是因为没有自然化生的有情而说空无,意思是梵身天人的境地生起了。它没有造作者,也没有指使造作者,而是按照《清净道论》所说的方法,由业缘和时节所生的宝地生起。在这里,只有在自然化生的地方才会生起园林、如意树等。那时,有情对原本居住的地方生起贪恋,他们修习初禅后从那里退堕,所以才接着说「那时,某位有情」等。「因寿尽或因福尽」:那些造了广大福业而投生到某个短寿天界的人,他们无法靠自己的福德之力住留,只是随着那个天界的寿量而死去,所以叫「因寿尽而死」。而那些造了微小福业却投生到长寿天界的人,他们无法住满全部寿量,中途就死去,所以叫「因福尽而死」。「住于长久之时」指一劫或半劫。巴利
40.Vivaṭṭatīti saṇṭhāti. Suññaṃ brahmavimānanti pakatiyā nibbattasattānaṃ natthitāya suññaṃ, brahmakāyikabhūmi nibbattatīti attho. Tassa kattā vā kāretā vā natthi, visuddhimagge vuttanayena pana kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā ratanabhūmi nibbattati. Pakatinibbattiṭṭhānesuyeva cettha uyyānakapparukkhādayo nibbattanti. Atha sattānaṃ pakatiyā vasitaṭṭhāne nikanti uppajjati, te paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā tato otaranti, tasmā atha kho aññataro sattotiādimāha. Āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vāti ye uḷāraṃ puññakammaṃ katvā yattha katthaci appāyuke devaloke nibbattanti, te attano puññabalena ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti, tassa pana devalokassa āyuppamāṇeneva cavantīti āyukkhayā cavantīti vuccanti. Ye pana parittaṃ puññakammaṃ katvā dīghāyukadevaloke nibbattanti, te yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhātuṃ na sakkonti, antarāva cavantīti puññakkhayā cavantīti vuccanti. Dīghamaddhānaṃ tiṭṭhatīti kappaṃ vā upaḍḍhakappaṃ vā.
41 不满足,是指期盼其他有情也来到这里。而与嗔恨相应的厌倦,在梵天界并不存在。悚惧,是指恐惧、悸动,这种悚惧有四种:由恐怖而生的悚惧、由渴爱而生的悚惧、由邪见而生的悚惧、由智而生的悚惧。其中,“因为投生而有恐惧、可怕、惊惶、身毛竖立、心的战栗。因为老……因为病……因为死……而有战栗”(《分别论》921),这叫做由恐怖而生的悚惧。“啊!但愿其他有情也能得到这种状态”(《长部》3.38),这叫做由渴爱而生的悚惧。“那只是悚惧和悸动而已”,这叫做由邪见而生的悚惧。“他们听了如来的说法之后,大多数都生起恐惧、悚惧、怖畏”(《增支部》4.33),这叫做由智而生的悚惧。在这里,由渴爱而生的悚惧和由邪见而生的悚惧都适用。这里的“梵天宫殿”,因为已经有第一位化生者存在,所以不说它是空的。“转生”,是指以再生的方式到达。“同伴”,是指共同居住。巴利
41.Anabhiratīti aparassāpi sattassa āgamanapatthanā. Yā pana paṭighasampayuttā ukkaṇṭhitā, sā brahmaloke natthi. Paritassanāti ubbijjanā phandanā, sā panesā tāsatassanā, taṇhātassanā, diṭṭhitassanā, ñāṇatassanāti catubbidhā hoti. Tattha ‘‘jātiṃ paṭicca bhayaṃ bhayānakaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃso cetaso utrāso. Jaraṃ… byādhiṃ… maraṇaṃ paṭicca…pe… utrāso’’ti (vibha. 921) ayaṃ tāsatassanā nāma. ‘‘Aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṃ āgaccheyyu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.38) ayaṃ taṇhātassanā nāma. ‘‘Paritassitavipphanditamevā’’ti ayaṃ diṭṭhitassanā nāma. ‘‘Tepi tathāgatassa dhammadesanaṃ sutvā yebhuyyena bhayaṃ saṃvegaṃ santāsaṃ āpajjantī’’ti (a. ni. 4.33) ayaṃ ñāṇatassanā nāma. Idha pana taṇhātassanāpi diṭṭhitassanāpi vaṭṭati. Brahmavimānanti idha pana paṭhamābhinibbattassa atthitāya suññanti na vuttaṃ. Upapajjantīti upapattivasena upagacchanti. Sahabyatanti sahabhāvaṃ.
42 征服了、战胜之后而安住,心想‘我是最胜者’。‘不被征服’是指不被别人征服。‘必定’是一个表示决定语气的虚词。‘以见之故为见者’,意思是凭见能见一切,也就是‘我见一切’。‘自在者’是指我令一切人随我掌控而行。‘我是世间的主宰、作者、化作者’:我是世间的主宰,我是世间的作者和化作者,大地、雪山、须弥山、轮围山、大海、月天子、日天子都是我化现的。‘我是最胜者、分配者’:我是世间最上者,也是分配者,他这样想:‘你成为刹帝利,你成为婆罗门、吠舍、首陀罗、在家人、出家人。甚至你成为骆驼,你成为牛。’他以为:‘我这样为众生分配。’‘具足自在者、已生者和未生者之父’:我因修习自在而具足自在,我是已生者和未生者的父亲——他这样想。其中,卵生和胎生的众生,在卵壳内和母胎内时,称为‘未生者’;从出来之后开始,称为‘已生者’。湿生者在第一心识刹那称为‘未生者’,从第二刹那起称为‘已生者’。化生者在第一种威仪姿态时称为‘未生者’,从第二种姿态起称为‘已生者’。应当知道,他正是基于这一点,以‘他们都是我的孩子’这样的想,认为‘我是已生者和未生者的父亲’。巴利
42.Abhibhūti abhibhavitvā ṭhito jeṭṭhakohamasmīti. Anabhibhūtoti aññehi anabhibhūto. Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dassanavasena daso, sabbaṃ passāmīti attho. Vasavattīti sabbaṃ janaṃ vase vattemi. Issaro kattā nimmātāti ahaṃ loke issaro, ahaṃ lokassa kattā ca nimmātā ca, pathavī – himavanta-sineru-cakkavāḷa-mahāsamudda-candima-sūriyā mayā nimmitāti. Seṭṭho sajitāti ahaṃ lokassa uttamo ca sajitā ca, ‘‘tvaṃ khattiyo nāma hohi, tvaṃ brāhmaṇo, vesso, suddo, gahaṭṭho, pabbajito nāma. Antamaso tvaṃ oṭṭho hohi, goṇo hohī’’ti ‘‘evaṃ sattānaṃ saṃvisajetā aha’’nti maññati. Vasī pitā bhūtabhabyānanti (dī. ni. 1.17) ahamasmi ciṇṇavasitāya vasī, ahaṃ pitā bhūtānañca bhabyānañcāti maññati. Tattha aṇḍajajalābujā sattā antoaṇḍakose ceva antovatthimhi ca bhabyā nāma, bahi nikkhantakālato paṭṭhāya bhūtā nāma. Saṃsedajā paṭhamacittakkhaṇe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtā. Opapātikā paṭhamairiyāpathe bhabyā, dutiyato paṭṭhāya bhūtāti veditabbā. Te sabbepi mayhaṃ puttāti saññāya ‘‘ahaṃ pitā bhūtabhabyāna’’nti maññati.
现在,他想从道理上证明这一点,就先立下“这些众生是我所造”的主张,然后说“那是什么原因呢”等等。“此性”就是这种状态,意思是“梵天身”。所谓“由此我”,是说那些凭自己的业而死后投生的众生,仅仅因为妄念,就认为“我们是他所造的”,于是像弯钉插进弯孔一样,俯身投向他脚下。巴利
Idāni kāraṇato sādhetukāmo – ‘‘mayā ime sattā nimmitā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādimāha. Itthattanti itthabhāvaṃ, brahmabhāvanti attho. Iminā mayanti attano kammavasena cutāpi upapannāpi ca kevalaṃ maññanāmatteneva ‘‘iminā mayaṃ nimmitā’’ti maññamānā vaṅkacchidde vaṅkaāṇī viya onamitvā tasseva pādamūlaṃ gacchantīti.
43 容貌更庄严,是指容貌更庄严,意思是长得端正、让人看了心生欢喜。有大威势,是指因为拥有自在力和眷属,所以名声与势力更大。巴利
43.Vaṇṇavantataro cāti vaṇṇavantataro, abhirūpo pāsādikoti attho. Mahesakkhataroti issariyaparivāravasena mahāyasataro.
44 「这确实是原因」的意思是:这确实就是理由。他从那里死后不去别的地方,只来到这里,就是针对这个情况才这么说。「从在家」指从俗家。「出家」指出家。因为出家之后,那里没有耕田、放牛等家业事务,所以称为「出家」。「出家」意思是前往、进入那种状态。「此后不忆念」指从那时起,对之前的宿住不能忆念;因为无法忆念,就停在那里执取了邪见。巴利
44.Ṭhānaṃkho panetanti kāraṇaṃ kho panetaṃ. So tato cavitvā aññatra na gacchati, idheva āgacchati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Agārasmāti gehā. Anagāriyanti pabbajjaṃ. Pabbajjā hi yasmā agārassa hi taṃ kasigorakkhādikammaṃ tattha natthi, tasmā anagāriyanti vuccati. Pabbajatīti upagacchati. Tato paraṃ nānussaratīti tato pubbenivāsā paraṃ na sarati, sarituṃ asakkonto tattha ṭhatvā diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti.
在“常”等说法中,因为看不到他的再生,就说他是“常”;因为看不到他的死,就说他是“恒”;因为他始终存在,就说他是“永恒”;因为即使衰老也不发生变化,就说他是“不变异法”。在这第一轮里,其余内容都是显而易见的。巴利
Niccotiādīsu tassa upapattiṃ apassanto niccoti vadati, maraṇaṃ apassanto dhuvoti, sadābhāvato sassatoti, jarāvasenāpi vipariṇāmassa abhāvato avipariṇāmadhammoti. Sesamettha paṭhamavāre uttānamevāti.
45-46 45-46. 在第二番说明中,“因嬉戏而败坏、毁灭”所以叫嬉戏腐化者;有些圣典文本也写作“腐化者”,但义注里没有这种写法。“过度”就是时间过长,意思是太久。“具足笑、嬉戏、喜乐法”是指已经进入并沉溺于笑乐法和嬉戏喜乐法,也就是沉溺于嬉笑之乐和身体、言语上的游戏之乐,意思是他们以具备上述这类喜乐法而生活。巴利
45-46. Dutiyavāre khiḍḍāya padussanti vinassantīti khiḍḍāpadosikā, padūsikātipi pāḷiṃ likhanti, sā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ natthi. Ativelanti atikālaṃ, aticiranti attho. Hassakhiḍḍāratidhammasamāpannāti hassarati dhammañceva khiḍḍāratidhammañca samāpannā anuyuttā, keḷihassasukhañceva kāyikavācasikakīḷāsukhañca anuyuttā, vuttappakāraratidhammasamaṅgino hutvā viharantīti attho.
正念忘失,是指在嚼食和啖食上正念忘失了。据说,他们凭借殊胜福德所获得的巨大祥瑞与威势,在玩赏星宿娱乐时,因为成就太过广大,连“我们吃过东西没有”都分不清。从错过一顿饭的时间开始,即使后来不停地嚼、不停地喝,他们也照样死去,活不下来。为什么呢?因为诸天业生的火界强,而所生的色身弱。人类则是业生的火界弱,所生的色身强。人类的火界弱、色身强,所以哪怕超过七天,也能靠温水、稀粥等来维持身体。但诸天的火界强,所生的色身弱,只要错过一顿饭的时间,就撑不住了。就像夏天正午把一朵红莲或青莲放在晒热的石头上,到了傍晚,哪怕用上百罐水去浇,它也恢复不了,只会枯萎。同样,他们后来虽然不停地嚼、不停地喝,也照样死去,活不下来。因此说:“由于正念忘失,那些天众从那个天身死去。”那么这些是哪些天众呢?义注里并没有专门辨析说“就是这些天众”,但因为笼统地说“诸天业生的火界强,所生的色身弱”,所以应当理解:凡是依靠段食维生的天众,这样做都会死去。不过也有人说:“这些天众是化乐天和他化自在天。”他们仅仅因为嬉戏损坏,就被称为嬉戏损坏天。这里其余部分应当按前面的方式理解。巴利
Sati sammussatīti khādanīyabhojanīyesu sati sammussati. Te kira puññavisesādhigatena mahantena attano sirivibhavena nakkhattaṃ kīḷantā tāya sampattimahantatāya – ‘‘āhāraṃ paribhuñjimha, na paribhuñjimhā’’tipi na jānanti. Atha ekāhārātikkamanato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva, na tiṭṭhanti. Kasmā? Kammajatejassa balavatāya, karajakāyassa mandatāya, manussānañhi kammajatejo mando, karajakāyo balavā. Tesaṃ tejassa mandatāya karajakāyassa balavatāya sattāhampi atikkamitvā uṇhodakaacchayāguādīhi sakkā vatthuṃ upatthambhetuṃ. Devānaṃ pana tejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ mandaṃ. Te ekaṃ āhāravelaṃ atikkamitvāva saṇṭhātuṃ na sakkonti. Yathā nāma gimhānaṃ majjhanhike tattapāsāṇe ṭhapitaṃ padumaṃ vā uppalaṃ vā sāyanhasamaye ghaṭasatenāpi siñciyamānaṃ pākatikaṃ na hoti, vinassatiyeva. Evameva pacchā nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpi cavantiyeva, na tiṭṭhanti. Tenāha ‘‘satiyā sammosā te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti. Katame pana te devāti? Ime devāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vicāraṇā natthi, ‘‘devānaṃ kammajatejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ manda’’nti avisesena vuttattā pana ye keci kabaḷīkārāhārūpajīvino devā evaṃ karonti, teyeva cavantīti veditabbā. Keci panāhu – ‘‘nimmānaratiparanimmitavasavattino te devā’’ti. Khiḍḍāpadussanamatteneva hete khiḍḍāpadosikāti vuttā. Sesamettha purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
47-48 47-48. 在第三轮中,那些以心败坏、毁灭的天人叫“意愤天”,他们属于四大王天。据说,在他们当中,有一位天子心想“我要去玩赏星宿”,就带着随从坐车上了街。这时另一位天子正要出去,看见他走在前面,就想:“这人真可怜!”像是从未见过他一样,看着他心想:“他高兴得像是胀起来、快要裂开一样在走。”于是发怒。走在前面那位也转过身来,看见他发怒。因为发怒的人很容易看出来,他知道了对方在发怒,就反过来发怒:“你发怒又能把我怎么样?这份成就是靠我布施、持戒等得来的,不是靠你。”要知道,一方发怒而另一方不发怒,还能保得住;但如果双方都发怒,一方的怒就成为另一方的缘,另一方的怒也成为这一方的缘,结果两人都像哭喊着一样,从各自的住处死去。这就是这里的法性。其余部分应按前面所说的方法理解。巴利
47-48. Tatiyavāre manena padussanti vinassantīti manopadosikā, ete cātumahārājikā. Tesu kira eko devaputto – nakkhattaṃ kīḷissāmīti saparivāro rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjati, athañño nikkhamanto taṃ purato gacchantaṃ disvā – ‘bho ayaṃ kapaṇo’, adiṭṭhapubbaṃ viya etaṃ disvā – ‘‘pītiyā uddhumāto viya bhijjamāno viya ca gacchatī’’ti kujjhati. Purato gacchantopi nivattitvā taṃ kuddhaṃ disvā – kuddhā nāma suviditā hontīti kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvā – ‘‘tvaṃ kuddho, mayhaṃ kiṃ karissasi, ayaṃ sampatti mayā dānasīlādīnaṃ vasena laddhā, na tuyhaṃ vasenā’’ti paṭikujjhati. Ekasmiñhi kuddhe itaro akuddho rakkhati, ubhosu pana kuddhesu ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti. Tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ubho kandantānaṃyeva orodhānaṃ cavanti. Ayamettha dhammatā. Sesaṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
49-52 在“推论者之论”中,他看见眼等感官的坏灭;然而,因为心总是前一个心灭去时,把缘给了后一个心,所以尽管心的坏灭比眼等感官的坏灭更强有力,他却看不见心的坏灭。他看不见这一点,于是就执取这样的想法:就像鸟离开一棵树,飞到另一棵树上栖息,同样,当这一期生命坏灭时,心就前往别处。这里剩下的内容,都按前面说过的方式来理解。巴利
49-52. Takkīvāde ayaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ bhedaṃ passati, cittaṃ pana yasmā purimaṃ purimaṃ pacchimassa pacchimassa paccayaṃ datvāva nirujjhati, tasmā cakkhādīnaṃ bhedato balavatarampi cittassa bhedaṃ na passati. So taṃ apassanto yathā nāma sakuṇo ekaṃ rukkhaṃ jahitvā aññasmiṃ nilīyati, evameva imasmiṃ attabhāve bhinne cittaṃ aññatra gacchatīti gahetvā evamāha. Sesamettha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
有边无边论的注释巴利
Antānantavādavaṇṇanā
53 有边无边论者,就是持“有边”“无边”“也有边也无边”“既非有边也非无边”这些主张的人;意思是说,他们的议论是围绕“有边”“无边”“也有边也无边”“既非有边也非无边”而展开的。巴利
53.Antānantikāti antānantavādā, antaṃ vā anantaṃ vā antānantaṃ vā nevantānānantaṃ vā ārabbha pavattavādāti attho.
54-60 在世间隔著有边想:不把似相扩展到轮围的边界,而是执取那个似相为“世间”,这样就是于世间隔著有边想。如果把遍处扩展到以轮围边界为限,那就成了无边想。如果上下不扩展、只横向扩展,那就是上下有边想、横向无边想。推论者之论也按前面说的方式理解。这四种见都是因为执取自己以前见过的相而执持此见,所以被归入关于前际的思辨者之中。巴利
54-60.Antasaññīlokasmiṃ viharatīti paṭibhāganimittaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ avaḍḍhetvā taṃ – ‘‘loko’’ti gahetvā antasaññī lokasmiṃ viharati, cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā vaḍḍhitakasiṇo pana anantasaññī hoti, uddhamadho avaḍḍhetvā pana tiriyaṃ vaḍḍhetvā uddhamadho antasaññī, tiriyaṃ anantasaññī. Takkīvādo vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Ime cattāropi attanā diṭṭhapubbānusāreneva diṭṭhiyā gahitattā pubbantakappikesu paviṭṭhā.
不死乱见论的解说巴利
Amarāvikkhepavādavaṇṇanā
61 61. “不死”就是不死。那是什么?就是按照“对我来说是这样吗?也不是”这类方式,属于执持邪见者的、没有边际的见解和言语。“种种散乱”就是散乱。由于不死的见解和言语而散乱,就叫“不死散乱”。这些存在于他们身上,所以他们就是“不死散乱论者”。另一种说法是:有一种鱼叫“不死鱼”,它在水里时而浮起、时而沉下,游来游去,抓不住。同样,这种论说也到处游移,让人抓不住把柄,所以叫“不死散乱”。这些存在于他们身上,所以他们就是“不死散乱论者”。巴利
61. Na maratīti amarā. Kā sā? Evantipi me notiādinā nayena pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā ca. Vividho khepoti vikkhepo, amarāya diṭṭhiyā vācāya ca vikkhepoti amarāvikkhepo, so etesaṃ atthīti amarāvikkhepikā, aparo nayo – amarā nāma ekā macchajāti, sā ummujjananimujjanādivasena udake sandhāvamānā gahetuṃ na sakkāti, evameva ayampi vādo itocito ca sandhāvati, gāhaṃ na upagacchatīti amarāvikkhepoti vuccati. So etesaṃ atthīti amarāvikkhepikā.
62 他说“这是善”,却不能如实了知,意思是:他不能如实了知十善业道。这里说的“不善”,也同样是指十不善业道。“那会成为我的苦恼”,意思是:因为生起“我说了妄语”的追悔,那就会成为我的苦恼,也就是会带来痛苦。“那会成为我的障碍”,意思是:那会成为我生天和解脱之道的障碍。“因为害怕妄语、厌恶妄语”,是指对妄语有愧也有惭。“陷入言语的混乱”,就是陷入言语上的混乱。是什么样的混乱?就是那种“不死”式的混乱,也就是没有边际、无法确定的混乱。巴利
62.‘‘Idaṃkusala’’nti yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti dasa kusalakammapathe yathābhūtaṃ nappajānātīti attho. Akusalepi dasa akusalakammapathāva adhippetā. So mamassa vighātoti ‘‘musā mayā bhaṇita’’nti vippaṭisāruppattiyā mama vighāto assa, dukkhaṃ bhaveyyāti attho. So mamassa antarāyoti so mama saggassa ceva maggassa ca antarāyo assa. Musāvādabhayā musāvādaparijegucchāti musāvāde ottappena ceva hiriyā ca. Vācāvikkhepaṃ āpajjatīti vācāya vikkhepaṃ āpajjati. Kīdisaṃ? Amarāvikkhepaṃ, apariyantavikkhepanti attho.
在“对我来说是这样吗?也不是”这类说法里,“对我来说是这样吗?也不是”指的是一种摇摆不定、无法确定的混乱。
“对我来说是那样吗?也不是”——这是在否定“我和世界都是恒常的”这种常住论。
“对我来说是另一种吗?也不是”——这是在否定与常住论不同的“部分恒常”论。
“对我来说不是吗?也不是”——这是在否定“如来死后不存在”这种断灭论。
“对我来说不是‘不是’吗?也不是”——这是在否定“既非存在也非不存在”这种推论者的主张。
而他自己呢,当被问到“这是善吗?”或者“这是不善吗?”时,什么都不明确回答。被问“这是善吗?”,他就说:“对我来说是这样吗?也不是。”接着问“那什么是不善?”,他又说:“对我来说是那样吗?也不是。”再问“那和这两者都不同的是什么?”,他说:“对我来说是另一种吗?也不是。”然后问:“你用这三种方式都说不是,那你的主张到底是什么?”他就说:“对我来说不是吗?也不是。”再追问:“那你的主张是‘不是不是’吗?”他就回答:“对我来说不是‘不是’吗?也不是。”就这样,他陷入纯粹的摇摆混乱,哪一种立场都站不住。巴利
Evantipi me notiādīsu evantipi me noti aniyamitavikkhepo . Tathātipi me noti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti vuttaṃ sassatavādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Aññathātipi me noti sassatato aññathā vuttaṃ ekaccasassataṃ paṭikkhipati. Notipi me noti – ‘‘na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vuttaṃ ucchedaṃ paṭikkhipati. No notipi me noti ‘‘neva hoti na na hotī’’ti vuttaṃ takkīvādaṃ paṭikkhipati. Sayaṃ pana ‘‘idaṃ kusala’’nti vā ‘‘akusala’’nti vā puṭṭho na kiñci byākaroti. ‘‘Idaṃ kusala’’nti puṭṭho ‘‘evantipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ akusala’’nti vutte ‘‘tathātipi me no’’ti vadati. ‘‘Kiṃ ubhayato aññathā’’ti vutte ‘‘aññathātipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘tividhenāpi na hoti, kiṃ te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘notipi me no’’ti vadati. Tato ‘‘kiṃ no noti te laddhī’’ti vutte ‘‘no notipi me no’’ti evaṃ vikkhepameva āpajjati, ekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhati.
63 “欲或贪”:即使自己无知,也会轻率地把善说成“善”,把不善说成“不善”,心里想:“我这样解答了某个问题,这解答到底好不好呢?”于是去请教别的智者。那些智者对他说:“善友,你解答得很好,你把善说成了善,把不善说成了不善。”他听了便想:“没有谁像我这样有智慧了。”就这样,他对这件事生起了欲或贪。这里,欲是微弱的贪,贪是强烈的贪。至于嗔或恚,则是把善说成“不善”,或把不善说成“善”,然后去请教别的智者,那些智者说“你解答得不好”时,他便想:“我连这么一点事都不懂。”就这样,他对这件事生起了嗔或恚。这里,嗔是微弱的忿怒,恚是强烈的忿怒。巴利
63.Chando vā rāgo vāti ajānantopi sahasā kusalameva ‘‘kusala’’nti vatvā akusalameva ‘‘akusala’’nti vatvā mayā asukassa nāma evaṃ byākataṃ, kiṃ taṃ subyākatanti aññe paṇḍite pucchitvā tehi – ‘‘subyākataṃ, bhadramukha, kusalameva tayā kusalaṃ, akusalameva akusalanti byākata’’nti vutte natthi mayā sadiso paṇḍitoti evaṃ me tattha chando vā rāgo vā assāti attho. Ettha ca chando dubbalarāgo, rāgo balavarāgo. Doso vā paṭigho vāti kusalaṃ pana ‘‘akusala’’nti, akusalaṃ vā ‘‘kusala’’nti vatvā aññe paṇḍite pucchitvā tehi – ‘‘dubyākataṃ tayā’’ti vutte ettakampi nāma na jānāmīti tattha me assa doso vā paṭigho vāti attho. Idhāpi doso dubbalakodho, paṭigho balavakodho.
那就会成为我的取,那就会成为我的恼害,意思是:那欲与贪两者会成为我的取,那嗔与恚两者会成为恼害。或者也可以说,从牢牢执取的角度看,两者都是取;从摧毁伤害的角度看,两者都是恼害。因为贪是不想放舍,所以抓住所缘,就像蚂蟥一样;嗔是想毁灭,所以像毒蛇一样。这两者都以灼烧的方式造成伤害,因此被称为取和恼害。其余内容和第一轮相同。巴利
Taṃmamassa upādānaṃ, so mamassa vighātoti taṃ chandarāgadvayaṃ mama upādānaṃ assa, dosapaṭighadvayaṃ vighāto. Ubhayampi vā daḷhaggahaṇavasena upādānaṃ , vihananavasena vighāto. Rāgo hi amuñcitukāmatāya ārammaṇaṃ gaṇhāti jalūkā viya. Doso vināsetukāmatāya āsīviso viya. Ubhopi cete santāpakaṭṭhena vihananti yevāti ‘‘upādāna’’nti ca ‘‘vighāto’’ti ca vuttā. Sesaṃ paṭhamavārasadisameva.
64 “贤智者”是指具备智慧的人。“精明者”是指心思细密、智慧敏锐,能够看透微细义理的人。“已熟知他人主张者”是指既了解他人的主张,又曾与他人反复辩论、熟悉彼此说法的人。“能射穿毛发的弓箭手”是指像能射穿毛发的神箭手一样。说“他们摧破(他人之见)”,意思是:就像神箭手射穿毛发那样,他们用自己智慧所通达的见解,去摧破他人那些极其微细的见解。 “那些人对我在那里追问”,是指那些沙门婆罗门在善与不善的问题上对我这样追问。“会质问”,是指他们会问:“什么是善?什么是不善?说出你自己的主张。”这样来问他的主张。“会进一步追问”,是指当他说“这是某某”之后,他们会追问:“你凭什么理由成立这个观点?”这样来问理由。“会驳问”,是指当他说“是因为这个理由”之后,他们便指出该理由的过失,说“你并不懂这个,你应当这样理解,这样回答”,如此加以诘难。“我无法应对”,是指我无法圆满回答,也就是说,纵然努力也说不清楚。 “那对我来说就是苦恼”,是指这样一再被追问却始终答不上来,那对我来说就是苦恼——只是嘴唇、上颚、舌头、喉咙干涸焦渴的痛苦罢了。这里其余部分和第一轮一样。巴利
64.Paṇḍitāti paṇḍiccena samannāgatā. Nipuṇāti saṇhasukhumabuddhino sukhumaatthantaraṃ paṭivijjhanasamatthā. Kataparappavādāti viññātaparappavādā ceva parehi saddhiṃ katavādaparicayā ca. Vālavedhirūpāti vālavedhidhanuggahasadisā. Te bhindantā maññeti vālavedhi viya vālaṃ sukhumānipi paresaṃ diṭṭhigatāni attano paññāgatena bhindantā viya carantīti attho. Te maṃ tatthāti te samaṇabrāhmaṇā maṃ tesu kusalākusalesu. Samanuyuñjeyyunti ‘‘kiṃ kusalaṃ, kiṃ akusalanti attano laddhiṃ vadā’’ti laddhiṃ puccheyyuṃ. Samanugāheyyunti ‘‘idaṃ nāmā’’ti vutte ‘‘kena kāraṇena etamatthaṃ gāheyyu’’nti kāraṇaṃ puccheyyuṃ. Samanubhāseyyunti ‘‘iminā nāma kāraṇenā’’ti vutte kāraṇe dosaṃ dassetvā ‘‘na tvaṃ idaṃ jānāsi, idaṃ pana gaṇha, idaṃ vissajjehī’’ti evaṃ samanuyuñjeyyuṃ. Na sampāyeyyanti na sampādeyyaṃ, sampādetvā kathetuṃ na sakkuṇeyyanti attho. So mamassa vighātoti yaṃ taṃ punappunaṃ vatvāpi asampāyanaṃ nāma, so mama vighāto assa, oṭṭhatālujivhāgalasosanadukkhameva assāti attho. Sesametthāpi paṭhamavārasadisameva.
65-66 “愚钝者”是指智慧迟钝的人,这本身就是对没有智慧之人的称呼。“极愚痴者”是指极度昏昧迷惑的人。在“如来存在”这类说法里,所说的“如来”指的就是有情。这里其余的内容都很浅显易懂。这四种见解也是因为随顺先前生起的法而执取见解,所以被归入主张前际论的论者之中。巴利
65-66.Mandoti mandapañño apaññassevetaṃ nāmaṃ. Momūhoti atisammūḷho. Hotitathāgatotiādīsu satto ‘‘tathāgato’’ti adhippeto. Sesamettha uttānameva. Imepi cattāro pubbe pavattadhammānusāreneva diṭṭhiyā gahitattā pubbantakappikesu paviṭṭhā.
无因生论者的解说巴利
Adhiccasamuppannavādavaṇṇanā
67 认为“我和世间是无因产生的”,这种见解就是无因生见。因为他们持有这种见解,所以被称为无因生论者。无因生,意思就是没有原因而产生。巴利
67. ‘‘Adhiccasamuppanno attā ca loko cā’’ti dassanaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ. Taṃ etesaṃ atthīti adhiccasamuppannikā. Adhiccasamuppannanti akāraṇasamuppannaṃ.
68-73 无想有情:这是以教导的要点来称呼,意思是他们是没有心识生起、只有色法构成的个体。他们的投生方式应当这样理解:有人在外道那里出家,以风遍作预备修行,证得第四禅那,从禅那出定后,他看见心的过患:“有心的时候,就会有断手之类的痛苦和一切恐惧。这个心实在没用,没有心的状态才是寂静。”他这样看见心的过患后,因为禅那没有退失,命终之后就投生到无想有情天中。在那里,他的心生起在死心灭尽时就地停止,只有色蕴在那里显现。他们在那里安住的情形,就像一支被弓弦的力量射出的箭,弓弦的力量有多大,它就在空中飞多远。同样,他们被禅那的力量射出去、投生之后,禅那的力量能维持多久,他们就住多久。当禅那的力量耗尽时,那里的色蕴就消失,而在这里则生起结生想。又因为从这里生起的想,能让人知道他们在那里死去,所以说:“这些天人的想一生起,就从那个身体死去。”寂静:就是寂静的状态。这里其余的内容都很浅显易懂。诡辩派论者也应当按同样的方式理解。巴利
68-73.Asaññasattāti desanāsīsametaṃ, acittuppādā rūpamattakaattabhāvāti attho. Tesaṃ evaṃ uppatti veditabbā – ekacco hi titthāyatane pabbajitvā vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvā catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā jhānā vuṭṭhāya – ‘‘citte dosaṃ passati, citte sati hatthacchedādidukkhañceva sabbabhayāni ca honti, alaṃ iminā cittena, acittakabhāvova santo’’ti, evaṃ citte dosaṃ passitvā aparihīnajjhāno kālaṃ katvā asaññasattesu nibbattati, cittamassa cuticittanirodhena idheva nivattati, rūpakkhandhamattameva tattha pātubhavati. Te tattha yathā nāma jiyāvegakkhitto saro yattako jiyāvego, tattakameva ākāse gacchati. Evameva jhānavegakkhittā upapajjitvā yattako jhānavego, tattakameva kālaṃ tiṭṭhanti, jhānavege pana parihīne tattha rūpakkhandho antaradhāyati, idha pana paṭisandhisaññā uppajjati. Yasmā pana tāya idha uppannasaññāya tesaṃ tattha cuti paññāyati, tasmā ‘‘saññuppādā ca pana te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Santatāyāti santabhāvāya. Sesamettha uttānameva. Takkīvādopi vuttanayeneva veditabboti.
后际论者的解释巴利
Aparantakappikavaṇṇanā
74 像这样展示了十八种前际论者之后,现在为了展示四十四种后际论者,而说了“诸比丘,有……”等话。其中,把被称为未来部分的“后际”加以思量、执取的人,就是后际论者;或者,这类人有后际的思量,所以叫后际论者。其余的内容,也应当依照前面所说的同样方式去理解。巴利
74. Evaṃ aṭṭhārasa pubbantakappike dassetvā idāni catucattārīsaṃ aparantakappike dassetuṃ – ‘‘santi, bhikkhave’’tiādimāha. Tattha anāgatakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhātaṃ aparantaṃ kappetvā gaṇhantīti aparantakappikā, aparantakappo vā etesaṃ atthīti aparantakappikā. Evaṃ sesampi pubbe vuttappakāranayeneva veditabbaṃ.
有想论者的解说巴利
Saññīvādavaṇṇanā
75 “死后有想论者”:“刑场”是指死亡,他们在死后还宣称“我存在”,所以叫“死后有想论者”。“有想”是他们所主张的说法,就是“有想论”;他们持有这种主张,所以称为“有想论者”。巴利
75.Uddhamāghātanikāti āghātanaṃ vuccati maraṇaṃ, uddhamāghātanā attānaṃ vadantīti uddhamāghātanikā. Saññīti pavatto vādo, saññīvādo, so etesaṃ atthīti saññīvādā.
76-77 在“有色之我”这类说法里,有人把遍处色执取为“我”,又把在它上面生起的想执取为“我想”;或者像邪命外道那些人一样,仅凭推理就宣称:“有色之我存在,无病,死后有想。”这里的“无病”就是恒常的意思。另有人把无色定的所缘相执取为“我”,又把入定时的想执取为“我想”;或者像尼乾子外道那些人一样,仅凭推理就宣称:“无色之我存在,无病,死后有想。”第三种见解则是以混合执取的方式生起的。第四种纯粹只是推理执取。第二组四种应按照在有边无边论中所说的方式来理解。第三组四种则应理解为:已入定者成为“单一想”,未入定者成为“差异想”;依小遍处成为“少想”,依广大遍处成为“无量想”。第四组四种则是:有人以天眼看见有情投生到三禅、四禅地界,就执取为“一向乐”;看见投生到地狱,就执取为“一向苦”;看见投生到人间,就执取为“有苦有乐”;看见投生到广果天,就执取为“不苦不乐”。特别是,证得宿命随念智的人往往成为前际论者,而具足天眼的人则成为后际论者。巴利
76-77.Rūpī attātiādīsu kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti tattha pavattasaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahetvā vā ājīvakādayo viya takkamatteneva vā ‘‘rūpī attā hoti, arogo paraṃ maraṇā saññī’’ti naṃ paññapenti. Tattha arogoti nicco. Arūpasamāpattinimittaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti samāpattisaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahetvā vā nigaṇṭhādayo viya takkamatteneva vā ‘‘arūpī attā hoti, arogo paraṃ maraṇā saññī’’ti naṃ paññapenti. Tatiyā pana missakagāhavasena pavattā diṭṭhi. Catutthā takkagāheneva. Dutiyacatukkaṃ antānantikavāde vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Tatiyacatukke samāpannakavasena ekattasaññī , asamāpannakavasena nānattasaññī, parittakasiṇavasena parittasaññī, vipulakasiṇavasena appamāṇasaññīti veditabbā. Catutthacatukke pana dibbena cakkhunā tikacatukkajjhānabhūmiyaṃ nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ekantasukhī’’ti gaṇhāti. Niraye nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘ekantadukkhī’’ti. Manussesu nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘sukhadukkhī’’ti. Vehapphaladevesu nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘‘adukkhamasukhī’’ti gaṇhāti. Visesato hi pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇalābhino pubbantakappikā honti, dibbacakkhukā aparantakappikāti.
无想论者的解说巴利
Asaññīvādavaṇṇanā
78-83 无想论应当依照有想论开头所说的那两种四组来理解。非想非非想论也是这样。只不过在那里,是执取“有想之我”的人所持的那些见解;而在这里,则是执取“无想”和“非想非非想”的见解。在这里,不必一味地追问绝对的原因,因为怀有邪见者的执取,据说就像疯人的篮子一样。巴利
78-83. Asaññīvādo saññīvāde ādimhi vuttānaṃ dvinnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena veditabbo. Tathā nevasaññīnāsaññīvādo. Kevalañhi tattha ‘‘saññī attā’’ti gaṇhantānaṃ tā diṭṭhiyo, idha ‘‘asaññī’’ti ca ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti ca. Tattha na ekantena kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabbaṃ. Diṭṭhigatikassa hi gāho ummattakapacchisadisoti vuttametaṃ.
断灭论的解说巴利
Ucchedavādavaṇṇanā
84 84. 在断灭论中说到“存在”,是指确实存在的东西。“断灭”就是彻底断绝。“消亡”就是看不见。“非有”就是存在消失。这些都是同一个意思的不同说法。在这里,有两种人会执取断灭见:有得者(有修行成就的人)和无得者(没有修行成就的人)。有得者用阿罗汉的天眼看到死亡,却看不到投生,或者只能看到死亡本身而看不到投生,于是就执取断灭见。无得者则因为贪恋欲乐而说“谁知道有没有他世呢”,或者通过推理来执取断灭,比如认为“就像树叶从树上落下后不会再长回去,众生也是这样”。但在这里应当知道:这七种见,是依着渴爱和邪见,经过这样或那样的分别构想之后才产生的。巴利
84. Ucchedavāde satoti vijjamānassa. Ucchedanti upacchedaṃ . Vināsanti adassanaṃ. Vibhavanti bhāvavigamaṃ. Sabbānetāni aññamaññavevacanāneva. Tattha dve janā ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhanti, lābhī ca alābhī ca. Lābhī arahato dibbena cakkhunā cutiṃ disvā upapattiṃ apassanto, yo vā cutimattameva daṭṭhuṃ sakkoti, na upapātaṃ; so ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. Alābhī ca ‘‘ko paralokaṃ na jānātī’’ti kāmasukhagiddhatāya vā. ‘‘Yathā rukkhato paṇṇāni patitāni na puna viruhanti, evameva sattā’’tiādinā takkena vā ucchedaṃ gaṇhāti. Idha pana taṇhādiṭṭhīnaṃ vasena tathā ca aññathā ca vikappetvāva imā satta diṭṭhiyo uppannāti veditabbā.
85 85. 其中,“有色”就是拥有色身。“四大所造”就是由四大构成。“属于父母的”,是指父母的东西。那是什么?就是精血。由父母所生的精血而生起,就叫“由父母所生”。这样,他以色身为首,把人的生命体说成是“我”。“在此,有些人这样说”,意思是有些人这样主张。巴利
85. Tattha rūpīti rūpavā. Cātumahābhūtikoti catumahābhūtamayo. Mātāpitūnaṃ etanti mātāpettikaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Sukkasoṇitaṃ. Mātāpettike sambhūto jātoti mātāpettikasambhavo. Iti rūpakāyasīsena manussattabhāvaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti vadati. Ittheketi itthaṃ eke evameketi attho.
86 第二种人否定那种说法,转而说天界生命体。“天”指生在天界。“欲界”指属于六欲天。“吃段食”意思是以段食为食。巴利
86. Dutiyo taṃ paṭikkhipitvā dibbattabhāvaṃ vadati. Dibboti devaloke sambhūto. Kāmāvacaroti cha kāmāvacaradevapariyāpanno. Kabaḷīkāraṃ āhāraṃ bhakkhatīti kabaḷīkārāhārabhakkho.
87 “意所成”是指由禅那之心所造出来的。“具足一切肢节”是指一切大肢小肢都齐全。“诸根不缺”是指诸根完整无缺。这是依据梵天界众生的情形,以及其他众生形态的情况来说的。巴利
87.Manomayoti jhānamanena nibbatto. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgīti sabbaṅgapaccaṅgayutto. Ahīnindriyoti paripuṇṇindriyo. Yāni brahmaloke atthi, tesaṃ vasena itaresañca saṇṭhānavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.
88-92 “完全超越色想”等句的含义,在《清净道论》中已经讲过。至于“到达空无边处”等句,则应理解为“已经投生到空无边处 existence(存在境界)”。这里剩下的内容都很浅显易懂。巴利
88-92.Sabbaso rūpasaññānaṃ samatikkamātiādīnaṃ attho visuddhimagge vutto. Ākāsānañcāyatanūpagotiādīsu pana ākāsānañcāyatanabhavaṃ upagatoti, evamattho veditabbo. Sesamettha uttānamevāti.
现法涅槃论的解说巴利
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavaṇṇanā
93 在“现法涅槃论”中,“现法”指的是眼前当下就能亲身证知的事物,这是对在种种生存状态中所获得的自体的称呼。“在现法中涅槃”就是现法涅槃,意思是就在这个自体之中止息苦。主张这种说法的人,就叫现法涅槃论者。“最上现法涅槃”是指最高的、最殊胜的现法涅槃,也就是最上的意思。巴利
93. Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavāde diṭṭhadhammoti paccakkhadhammo vuccati, tattha tattha paṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Diṭṭhadhamme nibbānaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ, imasmiṃyeva attabhāve dukkhavūpasamananti attho. Taṃ vadantīti diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā. Paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānanti paramaṃ diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ uttamanti attho.
94 “以五种欲乐”是指通过可爱的色等五种欲的组成部分,或者说是五种束缚。“完全投入”是指很好地投入、黏着。“具足”就是具备。“享受”是指在那些欲乐上随心所欲地让诸根活动、游转,来回运作。或者说,嬉戏、享乐、游玩。这里欲乐有两种:人间的和天界的。人间的欲乐应当看作像曼陀多王的欲乐那样,天界的欲乐则像他化自在天王的欲乐那样。因为那些耽著于如此欲乐的人,才会施设现法涅槃的成就。巴利
94.Pañcahi kāmaguṇehīti manāpiyarūpādīhi pañcahi kāmakoṭṭhāsehi bandhanehi vā. Samappitoti suṭṭhu appito allīno hutvā. Samaṅgībhūtoti samannāgato. Paricāretīti tesu kāmaguṇesu yathāsukhaṃ indriyāni cāreti sañcāreti itocito ca upaneti. Atha vā laḷati ramati kīḷati. Ettha ca duvidhā kāmaguṇā – mānusakā ceva dibbā ca. Mānusakā mandhātukāmaguṇasadisā daṭṭhabbā, dibbā paranimmitavasavattidevarājassa kāmaguṇasadisāti. Evarūpe kāme upagatānañhi te diṭṭhadhammanibbānasampattiṃ paññapenti.
95 在第二转中,应当这样理解:以“曾经有而后不存在”这一含义,它们是无常;以“逼迫”这一含义,它们是苦;以“舍弃自性”这一含义,它们是变易法。由于那些欲的变易和变异,也就是那些欲被称为变易的变异,正如所说“我曾经拥有的,如今对我来说已不存在”,于是生起愁、悲、苦、忧、恼。其中,愁的特征是内心焦灼;悲的特征是依赖它而悲伤诉说;苦的特征是身体受逼迫;忧的特征是心受打击;恼的特征是沮丧。“远离诸欲……”等的含义,已在《清净道论》中说明。巴利
95. Dutiyavāre hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā paṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā, pakatijahanaṭṭhena vipariṇāmadhammāti veditabbā. Tesaṃ vipariṇāmaññathābhāvāti tesaṃ kāmānaṃ vipariṇāmasaṅkhātā aññathābhāvā, yampi me ahosi, tampi me natthīti vuttanayena uppajjanti sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā. Tattha antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇo soko, tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇo paridevo, kāyappaṭipīḷanalakkhaṇaṃ dukkhaṃ, manovighātalakkhaṇaṃ domanassaṃ, visādalakkhaṇo upāyāso, vivicceva kāmehītiādīnamattho visuddhimagge vutto.
96 “寻”是指以投向目标的方式生起的心所。“伺”是指以反复推度的方式生起的心所。“以此”是说:因为有这寻和这伺,这初禅就显得粗重,像有刺一样。巴利
96.Vitakkitanti abhiniropanavasena pavatto vitakko. Vicāritanti anumajjanavasena pavatto vicāro. Etenetanti etena vitakkitena ca vicāritena ca etaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ oḷārikaṃ sakaṇḍakaṃ viya khāyati.
97-98 “喜俱”就是指喜本身。“心踊跃性”是指让心变得踊跃的作用。“心的转向”是指从禅那出定之后,心对那种快乐一再地转向、作意、系念。在这“现法涅槃论”里,其余的内容都很清楚明白。巴利
97-98.Pītigatanti pītiyeva. Cetaso uppilāvitattanti cittassa uppilabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Cetaso ābhogoti jhānā vuṭṭhāya tasmiṃ sukhe punappunaṃ cittassa ābhogo manasikāro samannāhāroti. Sesamettha diṭṭhadhammanibbānavāde uttānameva.
说到这里,全部六十二种见解都已经讲完了。其中,七种是断见,其余的是常见。巴利
Ettāvatā sabbāpi dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo kathitā honti. Yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo.
100-104 现在,通过“诸比丘,就是这些”这一段话,把所有持后际论的人一并归拢起来,然后宣说一切知智。接着,又通过“诸比丘,就是这些”等段落,把所有持前际和后际论的人一并归拢起来,同样宣说这种智。因此,在“诸比丘,哪些是法”等问句里,问的其实也是一切知智;回答时,也像用秤衡量众生的意乐,又像从须弥山脚下取沙一样,把六十二种见解抽出来之后,仍然只是宣说一切知智。这段开示就是按照随顺次第的方式来的。巴利
100-104. Idāni – ‘‘imehi kho te, bhikkhave’’ti iminā vārena sabbepi te aparantakappike ekajjhaṃ niyyātetvā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ vissajjeti. Puna – ‘‘imehi, kho te bhikkhave’’tiādinā vārena sabbepi te pubbantāparantakappike ekajjhaṃ niyyātetvā tadeva ñāṇaṃ vissajjeti. Iti ‘‘katame ca te, bhikkhave, dhammā’’tiādimhi pucchamānopi sabbaññutaññāṇameva pucchitvā vissajjamānopi sattānaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ tulāya tulayanto viya sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viya dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni uddharitvā sabbaññutaññāṇameva vissajjeti. Evamayaṃ yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā.
经的连结有三种:问的连结、意乐的连结、随顺的连结。其中,像有比丘这样问世尊:“尊者,什么是此岸?什么是彼岸?谁沉在中流?谁滞在高地?谁被人抓住?谁被非人抓住?谁被漩涡抓住?什么是内部腐败?”(《相应部》4.241)——依世尊为这样提问的人所解答的经,应当知道这就是问的连结。巴利
Tayo hi suttassa anusandhī – pucchānusandhi, ajjhāsayānusandhi, yathānusandhīti. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavoca – kiṃ nu kho, bhante, orimaṃ tīraṃ, kiṃ pārimaṃ tīraṃ, ko majjhe saṃsīdo, ko thale ussādo, ko manussaggāho, ko amanussaggāho, ko āvaṭṭaggāho, ko antopūtibhāvo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.241) evaṃ pucchantānaṃ bhagavatā vissajjitasuttavasena pucchānusandhi veditabbo.
这时,有一位比丘心里生起了这样的念头:“听说色是无我的……受……想……行……识是无我的。既然诸业都是无我的,那它们又会触及哪个我呢?”世尊以心了知那位比丘心中的念头,便对比丘们说:“比丘们,确实有可能,这里某个愚痴的人,无知、陷于无明,心被贪爱支配,竟以为可以越过大师的教导,这样想:‘听说色是无我的……它们会触及……’。比丘们,你们怎么看,色是常还是无常?”(《中部》3.10)。像这样,世尊了知他人的意乐之后所开示的经文,应当理解为意乐次第。巴利
Atha kho aññatarassa bhikkhuno evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi – ‘‘iti kira bho rūpaṃ anattā…, vedanā…, saññā…, saṅkhārā …, viññāṇaṃ anattā, anattakatāni kira kammāni kamattānaṃ phusissantī’’ti. Atha kho bhagavā tassa bhikkhuno cetasā ceto parivitakkamaññāya bhikkhū āmantesi – ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, vijjati, yaṃ idhekacco moghapuriso avidvā avijjāgato taṇhādhipateyyena cetasā satthusāsanaṃ atidhāvitabbaṃ maññeyya – ‘‘iti kira bho rūpaṃ anattā…pe… phusissantī’’ti. Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā aniccaṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.10). Evaṃ paresaṃ ajjhāsayaṃ viditvā bhagavatā vuttasuttavasena ajjhāsayānusandhi veditabbo.
不过,如果某部经的开头是以某个法作为开示的起点,那么在这部经后面出现的开示,不管是顺着这个法来讲,还是从与它相反的角度来讲,都应该依据这些后续内容来理解前后的衔接次第。比如,《希望经》开头讲的是戒,后面接着讲六神通;《布经》开头讲的是烦恼,后面接着讲四梵住;《憍赏弥经》开头讲的是争吵,后面接着讲可念法;《锯喻经》开头讲的是不能忍耐,后面接着讲锯喻;在这部《梵网经》里,开头是从各种见解讲起,后面接着阐明空性。因此说:“这部开示就是按照前后衔接的次第来的。”巴利
Yena pana dhammena ādimhi desanā uṭṭhitā, tassa dhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā paṭipakkhavasena vā yesu suttesu upari desanā āgacchati, tesaṃ vasena yathānusandhi veditabbo. Seyyathidaṃ, ākaṅkheyyasutte heṭṭhā sīlena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari cha abhiññā āgatā. Vatthasutte heṭṭhā kilesena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari brahmavihārā āgatā. Kosambakasutte heṭṭhā bhaṇḍanena uṭṭhitā, upari sāraṇīyadhammā āgatā. Kakacūpame heṭṭhā akkhantiyā uṭṭhitā, upari kakacūpamā āgatā. Imasmimpi brahmajāle heṭṭhā diṭṭhivasena desanā uṭṭhitā, upari suññatāpakāsanaṃ āgataṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘evamayaṃ yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti.
关于战栗与挣扎这一部分的注释巴利
Paritassitavipphanditavāravaṇṇanā
105-117 105-117. 现在,为了说明界限的区分,开始了“比丘们,对此……”等开示。那些沙门、婆罗门不了知、不见这一点,他们的感受陷入渴爱,纯粹只是战栗和挣扎而已。他们凭着对见的贪味、对见的快乐、对见的感受,心生欢喜,用四种根据来安立“我和世间是恒常的”。那些沙门、婆罗门不了知、不见诸法的如实自性,他们的感受陷入渴爱,纯粹只是陷入渴爱的感受,而那也确实只是战栗和挣扎。也就是说,被所谓的见和所谓的渴爱所引发的战栗、挣扎、动摇、震动,就像插在灰堆里的木桩一样,不像入流者的见那样坚定不移。这就是它的显示方式。同样的道理也适用于“某些常恒论”等。巴利
105-117. Idāni mariyādavibhāgadassanatthaṃ – ‘‘tatra bhikkhave’’tiādikā desanā āraddhā. Tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ ajānataṃ apassataṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphanditamevāti yena diṭṭhiassādena diṭṭhisukhena diṭṭhivedayitena te somanassajātā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi tesaṃ bhavantānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ dhammānaṃ sabhāvaṃ ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ kevalaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃyeva taṃ vedayitaṃ, tañca kho panetaṃ paritassitavipphanditameva. Diṭṭhisaṅkhātena ceva taṇhāsaṅkhātena ca paritassitena vipphanditameva calitameva kampitameva thusarāsimhi nikhātakhāṇusadisaṃ, na sotāpannassa dassanamiva niccalanti dasseti. Esa nayo ekaccasassatavādādīsupi.
以触为缘的段落注释巴利
Phassapaccayavāravaṇṇanā
118-130 118–130. 再者,为了说明辗转相续的缘,开始说“比丘们,在那里,那些持常住论的沙门婆罗门……”等。其中,“那也只是以触为缘”,是说他们依靠那种见的滋味、见的快乐、见的感受而生起喜悦,用四种根据来安立“我和世间是常住的”;那被渴爱和见解所鼓动的感受,也是以触为缘。这个道理在一切处都一样。巴利
118-130. Puna – ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā’’tiādi paramparapaccayadassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ . Tattha tadapi phassapaccayāti yena diṭṭhiassādena diṭṭhisukhena diṭṭhivedayitena te somanassajātā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, tadapi taṇhādiṭṭhipariphanditaṃ vedayitaṃ phassapaccayāti dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
131-143 131-143. 现在,为了说明那个缘在“所见所感”当中具有强大的力量,又再次说:“比丘们,在那里,那些持常住论的沙门婆罗门……”等等。其中,“他们确实除了触之外……”意思是说:那些沙门婆罗门认为,没有触也能感受那种感受,这种说法根本没有道理。就像支撑倾斜房屋的柱子,对房屋来说是一个强有力的缘,没有柱子支撑,房屋就立不住;同样,触也是受的强有力的缘,这就说明:没有触,这种所见所感就不会存在。这个道理适用于一切地方。巴利
131-143. Idāni tassa paccayassa diṭṭhivedayite balavabhāvadassanatthaṃ puna – ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā’’tiādimāha. Tattha te vata aññatra phassāti te vata samaṇabrāhmaṇā taṃ vedayitaṃ vinā phassena paṭisaṃvedissantīti kāraṇametaṃ natthīti. Yathā hi patato gehassa upatthambhanatthāya thūṇā nāma balavapaccayo hoti, na taṃ thūṇāya anupatthambhitaṃ ṭhātuṃ sakkoti, evameva phassopi vedanāya balavapaccayo, taṃ vinā idaṃ diṭṭhivedayitaṃ natthīti dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha.
关于邪见行境与执持之说的轮回分别解释巴利
Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānavaṭṭakathāvaṇṇanā
144 144. 现在,比丘们,在这里,那些主张常住论的沙门婆罗门用四种根据来安立“我”和“世间”是常住的,还有那些持“一分常住论”等的沙门婆罗门,也以各种方式把一切与见相关的感受汇集起来。为什么呢?是为了接下来把它们归入“触”中。怎么归入呢?他们全都是通过六触处,触了又触之后而感受。其中,所谓六触处就是:眼触处、耳触处、鼻触处、舌触处、身触处、意触处,这六种。因为“处”这个词,在“出生处”“会合处”“原因”“仅仅是施设”这几种含义上使用。比如“甘菩阇是马的出生处,南印度是牛的出生处”,这是在“出生处”的含义上使用,意思是出生的地方。“在可爱的处所,鸟儿们群集栖息”,这是在“会合处”的含义上使用。“当条件存在时”,这是在“原因”的含义上使用。“在森林处的树叶屋里共住”,这是在“仅仅是施设”的含义上使用。而这里所用的“处”,在“出生处”等三种含义上也都能成立。因为在眼等处,以触为第五的诸法得以出生、会合,而眼等也是这些法的原因,所以称为“处”。但在这里,依据“缘于眼和色而生起眼识,三者和合就是触”这种方式,把教说归结到以触为首,为了说明以触为起点的一系列缘起关系,所以才说了触处等。巴利
144. Idāni tatra bhikkhave, ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapenti catūhi vatthūhi, yepi te samaṇabrāhmaṇā ekaccasassatikātiādinā nayena sabbadiṭṭhivedayitāni sampiṇḍeti. Kasmā? Upari phasse pakkhipanatthāya. Kathaṃ? Sabbe te chahi phassāyatanehi phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentīti. Tattha cha phassāyatanāni nāma – cakkhuphassāyatanaṃ, sotaphassāyatanaṃ, ghānaphassāyatanaṃ, jivhāphassāyatanaṃ, kāyaphassāyatanaṃ, manophassāyatananti imāni cha. Sañjāti-samosaraṇa-kāraṇa-paṇṇattimattatthesu hi ayaṃ āyatanasaddo pavattati. Tattha – ‘‘kambojo assānaṃ āyatanaṃ, gunnaṃ dakkhiṇāpatho’’ti sañjātiyaṃ pavattati, sañjātiṭṭhāneti attho. ‘‘Manorame āyatane, sevanti naṃ vihaṅgamā’’ti (a. ni. 5.38) samosaraṇe. ‘‘Sati satiāyatane’’ti (a. ni. 3.102) kāraṇe. ‘‘Araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭīsu sammantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.255) paṇṇattimatte. Svāyamidha sañjātiādiatthattayepi yujjati. Cakkhādīsu hi phassapañcamakā dhammā sañjāyanti samosaranti, tāni ca tesaṃ kāraṇanti āyatanāni. Idha pana ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.43) iminā nayena phassasīseneva desanaṃ āropetvā phassaṃ ādiṃ katvā paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ phassāyatanādīni vuttāni.
接触了又接触之后而感受,意思是:接触了又接触之后而感受。在这里,虽然经文看起来像是在说诸处有接触的作用,但也不应该认为它们真的具有接触的作用。因为诸处并不接触,是触本身在接触各个所缘;而诸处是被安立在触的层面上来显示的。所以,这里的意思应该这样理解:他们所有这些人,都是通过由六触处生起的触,接触了色等所缘之后,感受到了那种见的感受。巴利
Phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentīti phusitvā phusitvā paṭisaṃvedenti. Ettha ca kiñcāpi āyatanānaṃ phusanakiccaṃ viya vuttaṃ, tathāpi na tesaṃ phusanakiccatā veditabbā. Na hi āyatanāni phusanti, phassova taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusati, āyatanāni pana phasse upanikkhipitvā dassitāni; tasmā sabbe te cha phassāyatanasambhavena phassena rūpādīni ārammaṇāni phusitvā taṃ diṭṭhivedanaṃ paṭisaṃvedayantīti evamettha attho veditabbo.
在他们那里,“以受为缘而有渴爱”等句中,“受”指的是由六触处所生的受。这个受以亲依止的方式,成为对色等各类渴爱的缘。因此说“在他们那里,以受为缘而有渴爱”。而这个渴爱又以亲依止和俱生两种方式,成为四种取的缘。同样,取是有的缘,有则以亲依止的方式成为生的缘。巴利
Tesaṃ vedanāpaccayā taṇhātiādīsu vedanāti cha phassāyatanasambhavā vedanā. Sā rūpataṇhādibhedāya taṇhāya upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo hoti. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tesaṃ vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti. Sā pana catubbidhassa upādānassa upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā ca paccayo hoti. Tathā upādānaṃ bhavassa. Bhavo jātiyā upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo hoti.
这里说的“生”,应当理解为有变动的五蕴。生不仅是老死的亲依止缘,也是忧愁等的亲依止缘。这是此处的简要说明;详细来说,缘起的讨论在《清净道论》中已经讲过。在这里只需要了解它的用意就够了。世尊在讲轮回的时候,有时以无明为开头说:“比丘们,无明的前际不可知,不能说‘在此之前没有无明,后来才生起’。比丘们,虽然这样说,但‘以此为缘而有无明’却是可以知道的。”有时以有爱为开头说:“比丘们,有爱的前际不可知……‘以此为缘而有有爱’。”有时以有见为开头说:“比丘们,有见的前际不可知……‘以此为缘而有有见’。”而在这里,世尊是以有见为开头来讲的。他先讲了因对受的贪染而生起的种种邪见,然后讲了以受为根本的缘起。由此说明:“这些执着邪见的人,抓住这种见解之后,在三有、四生、五趣、七识住、九众生居之中,从这里到那里、从那里到这里,不断流转轮回,就像套上轭的牛绕圈打转,像拴在柱子上的狗,像被风吹离航向的船,只是反复承受轮回之苦,根本无法从轮回之苦中抬起头来。”巴利
Jātīti panettha savikārā pañcakkhandhā daṭṭhabbā, jāti jarāmaraṇassa ceva sokādīnañca upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo hoti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthārato pana paṭiccasamuppādakathā visuddhimagge vuttā. Idha panassa payojanamattameva veditabbaṃ. Bhagavā hi vaṭṭakathaṃ kathento – ‘‘purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati avijjāya, ‘ito pubbe avijjā nāhosi, atha pacchā samabhavī’ti evañcetaṃ, bhikkhave, vuccati, atha ca pana paññāyati ‘‘idappaccayā avijjā’’ti (a. ni. 10.61) evaṃ avijjāsīsena vā, purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavataṇhāya…pe… ‘‘idappaccayā bhavataṇhā’’ti (a. ni. 10.62) evaṃ taṇhāsīsena vā, purimā, bhikkhave, koṭi na paññāyati bhavadiṭṭhiyā…pe… ‘‘idappaccayā bhavadiṭṭhī’’ti evaṃ diṭṭhisīsena vā kathesi’’. Idha pana diṭṭhisīsena kathento vedanārāgena uppajjamānā diṭṭhiyo kathetvā vedanāmūlakaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṃ kathesi. Tena idaṃ dasseti – ‘‘evamete diṭṭhigatikā, idaṃ dassanaṃ gahetvā tīsu bhavesu catūsu yonīsu pañcasu gatīsu sattasu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu navasu sattāvāsesu ito ettha etto idhāti sandhāvantā saṃsarantā yante yuttagoṇo viya, thambhe upanibaddhakukkuro viya, vātena vippannaṭṭhanāvā viya ca vaṭṭadukkhameva anuparivattanti, vaṭṭadukkhato sīsaṃ ukkhipituṃ na sakkontī’’ti.
对“还灭之说”等的解释巴利
Vivaṭṭakathādivaṇṇanā
145 世尊这样讲完以邪见者为立足处的轮回之后,现在为了显示以如理精进的比丘为立足处的还灭,又说了“诸比丘,当比丘……”等话。其中,“当”就是“在……的时候”。“六触处”指的是:那些邪见者正是靠着这六触处去接触、去感受而流转,这里说的就是这六触处本身。关于“集”等说法,应当依照“受业处”中讲过的方式,用“无明集则眼集”等来理解诸触处的集等。然而,那里说的是“触集则触灭”,这里对于眼等则应理解为“食集则食灭”;对于意处,则是“名色集则名色灭”。巴利
145. Evaṃ diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ kathetvā idāni yuttayogabhikkhuadhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā vivaṭṭaṃ dassento – ‘‘yato kho, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’tiādimāha. Tattha yatoti yadā. Channaṃ phassāyatanānanti yehi chahi phassāyatanehi phusitvā paṭisaṃvedayamānānaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vaṭṭaṃ vattati, tesaṃyeva channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ. Samudayantiādīsu avijjāsamudayā cakkhusamudayotiādinā vedanākammaṭṭhāne vuttanayena phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādayo veditabbā. Yathā pana tattha ‘‘phassasamudayā phassanirodhā’’ti vuttaṃ, evamidha, taṃ cakkhādīsu – ‘‘āhārasamudayā āhāranirodhā’’ti veditabbaṃ. Manāyatane ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā nāmarūpanirodhā’’ti.
“了知更超胜的”:执取邪见的人只了知邪见本身。而这个人则了知邪见,也了知比邪见更超胜的戒、定、慧、解脱,直到阿拉汉果。谁这样了知呢?漏已尽者了知,不来者了知,一来者了知,入流者了知,多闻且持诵经典的比丘了知,已开始修观的比丘了知。不过,这段开示是以阿拉汉果为顶点而结束的。巴利
Uttaritaraṃ pajānātīti diṭṭhigatiko diṭṭhimeva jānāti. Ayaṃ pana diṭṭhiñca diṭṭhito ca uttaritaraṃ sīlasamādhipaññāvimuttinti yāva arahattā jānāti. Ko evaṃ jānātīti? Khīṇāsavo jānāti, anāgāmī, sakadāgāmī, sotāpanno, bahussuto, ganthadharo bhikkhu jānāti, āraddhavipassako jānāti. Desanā pana arahattanikūṭeneva niṭṭhāpitāti.
146 世尊这样开示了还灭之后,现在为了表明“没有所谓脱离说法之网的邪见者”,又接着说:“诸比丘,凡是……”等等。
其中,“被置于网内”:就是被放进了我这个说法之网的里面。“依附于此”:就是依附、依靠、安住在这个我的说法之网中。“浮上来时,就是浮上来”说的是什么意思?就是他们不管是向下沉,还是向上浮,都是依附在我的说法之网中才下沉、才上浮的。“包含于此”:就是被包摄在我的说法之网里面,被这个网绑住,成了网中之物而浮沉,在这里并没有不被收摄的所谓邪见者。巴利
146. Evaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ kathetvā idāni ‘‘desanājālavimutto diṭṭhigatiko nāma natthī’’ti dassanatthaṃ puna – ‘‘ye hi keci, bhikkhave’’ti ārabhi. Tattha antojālīkatāti imassa mayhaṃ desanājālassa antoyeva katā. Ettha sitā vāti etasmiṃ mama desanājāle sitā nissitā avasitāva. Ummujjamānā ummujjantīti kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Te adho osīdantāpi uddhaṃ uggacchantāpi mama desanājāle sitāva hutvā osīdanti ca uggacchanti ca. Ettha pariyāpannāti ettha mayhaṃ desanājāle pariyāpannā, etena ābaddhā antojālīkatā ca hutvā ummujjamānā ummujjanti, na hettha asaṅgahito diṭṭhigatiko nāma atthīti.
“以细网”是指网眼细密、网孔细微的网。这就好比:世尊像渔夫,开示像渔网,一万个世界界像一小片水域,六十二种邪见者像那些粗大的水族。渔夫站在岸边观察时,能看见粗大的水族全都进了网里;同样,世尊也能看见一切邪见者都落入了他开示之网的范围内。应当这样理解这里的譬喻对应关系。巴利
Sukhumacchikenāti saṇhaacchikena sukhumacchiddenāti attho. Kevaṭṭo viya hi bhagavā, jālaṃ viya desanā, parittaudakaṃ viya dasasahassilokadhātu, oḷārikā pāṇā viya dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatikā. Tassa tīre ṭhatvā olokentassa oḷārikānaṃ pāṇānaṃ antojālīkatabhāvadassanaṃ viya bhagavato sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ desanājālassa antokatabhāvadassananti evamettha opammasaṃsandanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
147 就这样,因为这六十二种邪见已经涵盖了一切邪见,说明了一切持邪见者都落在这个说法的网里;现在为了说明他自己并不落在任何一处,便说了“比丘们,如来的身体已经断除了有之索……”等话。其中,“索”就是用来牵引的东西。所谓牵引,就是套在脖子上拖着走,这是绳索的名称。但在这里,因为跟绳索相似,所以把有爱说成“索”。因为那有爱把大众套住脖子,牵引、带到种种生存中去,所以叫“有之索”。以阿罗汉道之剑断除了有之索,就是“已断除有之索者”。巴利
147. Evaṃ imāhi dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīhi sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ saṅgahitattā sabbesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ etasmiṃ desanājāle pariyāpannabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni attano katthaci apariyāpannabhāvaṃ dassento – ‘‘ucchinnabhavanettiko, bhikkhave, tathāgatassa kāyo’’tiādimāha. Tattha nayanti etāyāti netti. Nayantīti gīvāya bandhitvā ākaḍḍhanti, rajjuyā etaṃ nāmaṃ. Idha pana nettisadisatāya bhavataṇhā nettīti adhippetā. Sā hi mahājanaṃ gīvāya bandhitvā taṃ taṃ bhavaṃ neti upanetīti bhavanetti. Arahattamaggasatthena ucchinnā bhavanetti assāti ucchinnabhavanettiko.
身体毁坏之后,就是身体毁坏之后。“命终之后”,意思是寿命已经完全耗尽、灭尽,不再有结生的状态。“他们将见不到”,是指见不到那位如来。天或人都将见不到他,意思是说,他将进入不可施设的状态。巴利
Kāyassa bhedā uddhanti kāyassa bhedato uddhaṃ. Jīvitapariyādānāti jīvitassa sabbaso pariyādinnattā parikkhīṇattā, puna appaṭisandhikabhāvāti attho. Na taṃ dakkhantīti taṃ tathāgataṃ. Devā vā manussā vā na dakkhissanti, apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gamissatīti attho.
“比丘们,譬如……”这里是用譬喻来做对应说明。如来的身就像一棵芒果树,树上长出的那个大果蒂,就像过去依附着这个身而活动的渴爱。只要渴爱还在,以渴爱为系缚,将来会生起的五蕴、十二处、十八界,就像绑在那个果蒂上的芒果,数量分别是五颗一簇、十二颗一簇、十八颗一簇。又好比那个果蒂被砍断时,所有那些芒果也都跟着断掉,因为它们都随附于那个果蒂,果蒂断了它们就断了。同样地,由于有爱之蒂还没有被彻底切断,那些将来会生起的五蕴、十二处、十八界,所有这些法都随附于它,都跟着有爱走;有爱一旦被切断,它们也就断了。巴利
Seyyathāpi, bhikkhaveti, upamāyaṃ pana idaṃ saṃsandanaṃ. Ambarukkho viya hi tathāgatassa kāyo, rukkhe jātamahāvaṇṭo viya taṃ nissāya pubbe pavattataṇhā. Tasmiṃ vaṇṭe upanibaddhā pañcapakkadvādasapakkaaṭṭhārasapakkaparimāṇā ambapiṇḍī viya taṇhāya sati taṇhūpanibandhanā hutvā āyatiṃ nibbattanakā pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo. Yathā pana tasmiṃ vaṇṭe chinne sabbāni tāni ambāni tadanvayāni honti, taṃyeva vaṇṭaṃ anugatāni, vaṇṭacchedā chinnāni yevāti attho; evameva ye bhavanettivaṇṭassa anupacchinnattā āyatiṃ uppajjeyyuṃ pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasadhātuyo, sabbe te dhammā tadanvayā honti bhavanettiṃ anugatā, tāya chinnāya chinnā yevāti attho.
就像那棵树上,因为碰到了青蛙刺的毒,就渐渐枯死了;死了以后,只剩下一个说法:“这个地方曾经有过这样一棵树。”谁也不再看见那棵树。同样地,因为接触到圣道,渴爱的滋润被彻底耗尽,这个身体就像渐渐枯死一样坏灭了;身体坏灭、寿命结束后,天与人再也看不见他。对这样一位大师,人们也只会剩下一个说法:“据说曾经有过这样一位大师的教法。”世尊把这番开示引导到无余涅槃界之后,就结束了说法。巴利
Yathā pana tasmimpi rukkhe maṇḍūkakaṇṭakavisasamphassaṃ āgamma anupubbena sussitvā mate – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne evarūpo nāma rukkho ahosī’’ti vohāramattameva hoti, na taṃ rukkhaṃ koci passati, evaṃ ariyamaggasamphassaṃ āgamma taṇhāsinehassa pariyādinnattā anupubbena sussitvā viya bhinne imasmiṃ kāye, kāyassa bhedā uddhaṃ jīvitapariyādānā na taṃ dakkhanti, tathāgatampi devamanussā na dakkhissanti, evarūpassa nāma kira satthuno idaṃ sāsananti vohāramattameva bhavissatīti anupādisesanibbānadhātuṃ pāpetvā desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
148 世尊这样说完之后,具寿阿难——也就是当世尊在这部经里这样说完时,这位长老从头到尾把整部经都记在心里,这样彰显了佛陀的威力之后,心想:“世尊并没有给所说的这部经取名字,让我来请世尊给它取个名字吧。”于是就对世尊说了这番话。巴利
148.Evaṃvutte āyasmā ānandoti evaṃ bhagavatā imasmiṃ sutte vutte thero ādito paṭṭhāya sabbaṃ suttaṃ samannāharitvā evaṃ buddhabalaṃ dīpetvā kathitasuttassa na bhagavatā nāmaṃ gahitaṃ, handassa nāmaṃ gaṇhāpessāmīti cintetvā bhagavantaṃ etadavoca.
所以在这里,“因此,阿难,你应当……”等句中的义理关联是这样的:阿难,因为在这部法门里,此世的利益和来世的利益都已经分别阐明,所以你应当把这部法门记持为“义网”;又因为这里讲说了众多经法,所以你应当把它记持为“法网”;又因为这里以最胜之义阐明了称为“梵”的一切知智,所以你应当把它记持为“梵网”;又因为这里阐明了六十二种邪见,所以你应当把它记持为“见网”;又因为听闻这部法门之后,就能摧破天子魔、蕴魔、死魔和烦恼魔,所以你应当把它记持为“无上的战场胜利”。巴利
Tasmātiha tvantiādīsu ayamatthayojanā – ānanda, yasmā imasmiṃ dhammapariyāye idhatthopi paratthopi vibhatto, tasmātiha tvaṃ imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ ‘‘atthajāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā panettha bahū tantidhammā kathitā, tasmā ‘‘dhammajāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā ca ettha seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ vibhattaṃ, tasmā ‘‘brahmajāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā ettha dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo vibhattā, tasmā ‘‘diṭṭhijāla’’ntipi naṃ dhārehi; yasmā pana imaṃ dhammapariyāyaṃ sutvā devaputtamārampi khandhamārampi maccumārampi kilesamārampi sakkā maddituṃ, tasmā ‘‘anuttaro saṅgāmavijayotipi naṃ dhārehī’’ti.
世尊说了这段话:从因缘序分的开头起,一直到“你应当把它记作无上的战场胜利”为止,世尊宣说了整部经。他开显了他人智慧无法触及、极其深奥的一切知智,就像太阳驱散黑暗一样,驱散了邪见的大黑暗,然后才说了这番话。巴利
Idamavoca bhagavāti idaṃ nidānāvasānato pabhuti yāva ‘‘anuttaro saṅgāmavijayotipi naṃ dhārehī’’ti sakalaṃ suttantaṃ bhagavā paresaṃ paññāya alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhaṃ paramagambhīraṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pakāsento sūriyo viya andhakāraṃ diṭṭhigatamahandhakāraṃ vidhamanto avoca.
149 那些比丘满心欢喜:是说那些比丘内心欢喜、心意满足,因为对佛陀生起的喜悦而心怀踊跃。世尊所说法:这是指世尊以种种善巧方式的教说所庄严宣说的这部经,是世尊以如迦陵频伽鸟鸣般美妙、悦耳怡心、犹如以不死甘露为智者之心灌顶的梵音所说的话。他们欢喜:意思是他们既随喜,也信受。因为“欢喜”这个词,在“欢喜、欢迎”等用法中也用来指贪爱;而在“诸天与人皆欢喜食物”等用法中,则表示靠近。巴利
149.Attamanā te bhikkhūti te bhikkhū attamanā sakamanā, buddhagatāya pītiyā udaggacittā hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhagavato bhāsitanti evaṃ vicitranayadesanāvilāsayuttaṃ idaṃ suttaṃ karavīkarutamañjunā kaṇṇasukhena paṇḍitajanahadayānaṃ amatābhisekasadisena brahmassarena bhāsamānassa bhagavato vacanaṃ. Abhinandunti anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu ca. Ayañhi abhinandasaddo – ‘‘abhinandati abhivadatī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.5) taṇhāyampi āgato. ‘‘Annamevābhinandanti, ubhaye devamānusā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.43) upagamanepi.
一个离家很久的人,从远方平安归来;
亲戚、朋友和知己,都欢喜他的归来。巴利
‘‘Cirappavāsiṃ purisaṃ, dūrato sotthimāgataṃ; Ñātimittā suhajjā ca, abhinandanti āgata’’nti. (dha. pa. 219);
在“接受”等含义中也是这样。在“欢喜并随喜之后”这类说法里,它也有“随喜”的意思。所以这个词在这里同时适用于“随喜”和“接受”两种情况。因此说“他们欢喜”,意思就是他们既随喜,也接受了。巴利
Ādīsu sampaṭicchanepi. ‘‘Abhinanditvā anumoditvā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.205) anumodanepi. Svāyamidha anumodanasampaṭicchanesu yujjati. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘abhinandunti anumodiṃsu ceva sampaṭicchiṃsu cā’’ti.
对于那位如如不动的人,善说与善语就是“善哉、善哉”这样的赞叹。
比丘们心生欢喜,以头顶礼,接受了这番话。巴利
Subhāsitaṃ sulapitaṃ, ‘‘sādhu sādhū’’ti tādino; Anumodamānā sirasā, sampaṭicchiṃsu bhikkhavoti.
这里说的“于此记说中”,就是指在这部无偈颂的经里。因为它是无偈颂的,所以称为“记说”。巴利
Imasmiñca pana veyyākaraṇasminti imasmiṃ niggāthakasutte. Niggāthakattā hi idaṃ veyyākaraṇanti vuttaṃ.
“一万个世界界”是指范围大到一万个轮围世界的世界界。应当知道,“震动”并不是只在经文结束时才震动,因为经文说的是“正在讲说的时候”。因此,当世尊把六十二种邪见一一解开、加以开示时,每讲完一种邪见,就在那一种邪见的结尾处震动;所以应当知道,是在六十二个地方都发生了震动。巴利
Dasasahassīlokadhātūti dasasahassacakkavāḷaparimāṇā lokadhātu. Akampitthāti na suttapariyosāneyeva akampitthāti veditabbā. Bhaññamāneti hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatesu viniveṭhetvā desiyamānesu tassa tassa diṭṭhigatassa pariyosāne pariyosāneti dvāsaṭṭhiyā ṭhānesu akampitthāti veditabbā.
在这里,应当知道大地震动有八种原因:界的扰动、具神通者的威力、菩萨入胎、从母胎出来、证得正觉、转法轮、舍弃寿行、般涅槃。对这八种原因的详细判定,等注释《大般涅槃经》时再讲,因为经里说:“阿难,有这八种因、八种缘,会使大地剧烈震动。”不过,这片大地在另外八种场合也震动过:大出离时、前往菩提座时、捡拾粪扫衣时、洗涤粪扫衣时、在《黑园经》中、在《乔达摩经》中、在《须大拏本生》中,以及在这部《梵网经》中。其中,在大出离和前往菩提座时,是靠精进的力量震动。捡拾粪扫衣时,世尊舍弃了周围有两千岛屿的四大洲而出家,走到坟场去捡粪扫衣,因为世尊做了这样极难做到的事,大地被这种稀有、不可思议的力量冲击而震动。洗涤粪扫衣和《须大拏本生》这两处,是在非正常的时候震动。在《黑园经》和《乔达摩经》中,是以“我能为世尊作证”这种作证的方式震动。而在这部《梵网经》中,当六十二种邪见被解开、彻底理清并加以开示时,是以给予赞叹的方式震动。巴利
Tattha aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi pathavīkampo veditabbo – dhātukkhobhena, iddhimato ānubhāvena, bodhisattassa gabbhokkantiyā, mātukucchito nikkhamanena, sambodhippattiyā, dhammacakkappavattanena, āyusaṅkhārossajjanena, parinibbānenāti. Tesaṃ vinicchayaṃ – ‘‘aṭṭha kho ime, ānanda, hetū aṭṭha paccayā mahato bhūmicālassa pātubhāvāyā’’ti evaṃ mahāparinibbāne āgatāya tantiyā vaṇṇanākāle vakkhāma. Ayaṃ pana mahāpathavī aparesupi aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu akampittha – mahābhinikkhamane, bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamane, paṃsukūlaggahaṇe, paṃsukūladhovane, kāḷakārāmasutte, gotamakasutte, vessantarajātake, imasmiṃ brahmajāleti. Tattha mahābhinikkhamanabodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanesu vīriyabalena akampittha. Paṃsukūlaggahaṇe dvisahassadīpaparivāre cattāro mahādīpe pahāya pabbajitvā susānaṃ gantvā paṃsukūlaṃ gaṇhantena dukkaraṃ bhagavatā katanti acchariyavegābhihatā akampittha. Paṃsukūladhovanavessantarajātakesu akālakampanena akampittha. Kāḷakārāmagotamakasuttesu – ‘‘ahaṃ sakkhī bhagavā’’ti sakkhibhāvena akampittha. Imasmiṃ pana brahmajāle dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhigatesu vijaṭetvā niggumbaṃ katvā desiyamānesu sādhukāradānavasena akampitthāti veditabbā.
大地不只是在前面说的那些地方震动过。在三次结集的时候,大地也震动过。摩诃摩欣德长老来到这座岛,在觉音林坐下来说法的那一天,大地也震动了。在迦良那寺,乞食长老把塔院打扫干净,就地坐下,以佛陀为所缘生起欢喜心,开始诵这部经,诵到结尾时,水一直涌到地面边缘,大地就震动了。铜殿东边有个地方叫芒果树下。长部诵者长老们坐在那里,开始诵《梵网经》,他们诵完的时候,水同样一直涌到地面边缘,大地就震动了。巴利
Na kevalañca etesu ṭhānesuyeva pathavī akampittha, atha kho tīsu saṅgahesupi mahāmahindattherassa imaṃ dīpaṃ āgantvā jotivane nisīditvā dhammaṃ desitadivasepi akampittha. Kalyāṇiyavihāre ca piṇḍapātiyattherassa cetiyaṅgaṇaṃ sammajjitvā tattheva nisīditvā buddhārammaṇaṃ pītiṃ gahetvā imaṃ suttantaṃ āraddhassa suttapariyosāne udakapariyantaṃ katvā akampittha. Lohapāsādassa pācīnaambalaṭṭhikaṭṭhānaṃ nāma ahosi. Tattha nisīditvā dīghabhāṇakattherā brahmajālasuttaṃ ārabhiṃsu, tesaṃ sajjhāyapariyosānepi udakapariyantameva katvā pathavī akampitthāti.
正是靠着他的威力,大地才一次次地震动起来。
大地啊,对于那部最胜的经,是由自生者所宣说的。
智者在这里要理解《梵网经》里的法和义理,
恭敬地学下来之后,应当如理地付诸实践。巴利
Evaṃ yassānubhāvena, akampittha anekaso; Medanī suttaseṭṭhassa, desitassa sayambhunā. Brahmajālassa tassīdha, dhammaṃ atthañca paṇḍitā; Sakkaccaṃ uggahetvāna, paṭipajjantu yonisoti.